FP3/FP10SH: Hardware

PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
FP3/FP10SH
Hardware
FP3/FP10SH Hardware
ARCT1F300E-1 06.9
Safety Precautions
Observe the following notices to ensure personal safety or to prevent accidents.
To ensure that you use this product correctly, read this User’s Manual thoroughly before use.
Make sure that you fully understand the product and information on safe.
This manual uses two safety flags to indicate different levels of danger.
WARNING
If critical situations that could lead to user’s death or serious injury is assumed by
mishandling of the product.
-Always take precautions to ensure the overall safety of your system, so that the whole
system remains safe in the event of failure of this product or other external factor.
-Do not use this product in areas with inflammable gas. It could lead to an explosion.
-Exposing this product to excessive heat or open flames could cause damage to the lithium
battery or other electronic parts.
CAUTION
If critical situations that could lead to user’s injury or only property damage is assumed
by mishandling of the product.
-To prevent abnormal exothermic heat or smoke generation, use this product at the values less
than the maximum of the characteristics and performance that are assure in these specifications.
-Do not dismantle or remodel the product. It could lead to abnormal exothermic heat or
smoke generation.
-Do not touch the terminal while turning on electricity. It could lead to an electric shock..
-Use the external devices to function the emergency stop and interlock circuit.
-Connect the wires or connectors securely.
The loose connection might cause abnormal exothermic heat or smoke generation
-Do not allow foreign matters such as liquid, flammable materials, metals to go into the
inside of the product. It might cause exothermic heat or smoke generation.
-Do not undertake construction (such as connection and disconnection) while the power
supply is on.
Copyright / Trademarks
-This manual and its contents are copylighted.
-You may not copy this manual,in whole or part,without written consent of Matsushita Electric
Works,Ltd.
-Windows and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
-All other company names and product names are trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective owners.
-Matsushita Electric Works,Ltd. pursues a policy of continuous improvement of the
Design and performance of its products, therefore,we reserve the right to change the manual/
product without notice.
Table of Contents FP3/FP10SH
Table of Contents
Before You Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x
Chapter 1 Features and System Configuration
1.1 General Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 3

1.2 Basic System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 6
1.2.1 Basic Configuration and Number of Control I/O Points . . . . . . . . 1 − 6
1.2.2 Configuration and Number of Control I/O Points When
Expanded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 8
1.3 Unit Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 10
1.3.1 Unit Line−Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 10
1.3.2 Restrictions on Unit Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 12
1.3.3 Limitations on Current Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 15
1.4 Expansion System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 20
1.4.1 MEWNET−F (remote I/O) Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 20
1.4.2 MEWNET−TR System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 22
1.4.3 MEWNET−W System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 24
1.4.4 MEWNET−P Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 26
1.4.5 Computer Link Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 28
1.4.6 Control by MODEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 30
1.5 Programming Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 32
1.5.1 Tools Needed for Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 32
1.5.1.1 Using NPST−GR Software for FP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 32
1.5.1.2 Using NPST−GR Software for FP10SH . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 33
1.5.1.3 Using FP Programmer II Ver.2 for FP3 Only . . . . . . 1 − 33
1.5.2 Table of Programming Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 34
1.5.3 Tools Needed for ROM Writing of FP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 35
1.5.3.1 When Creating a ROM With a Commercially
Available ROM Writer, Through a Master
Memory (EEPROM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 35
1.5.3.2 When Creating a ROM With NPST−GR Software
and a Commercially Available ROM Writer . . . . . . . 1 − 36
1.5.4 Tools Needed for ROM Writing of FP10SH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 37
1.5.4.1 When Creating a ROM With a Commercially
Available ROM Writer, Through a Master
Memory (FROM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 37
1.5.4.2 When Creating a ROM With NPST−GR Software
and a Commercially Available ROM Writer . . . . . . . 1 − 38
Chapter 2 Parts and Its Specifications
2.1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 −3
2.1.1 FP3/FP10SH General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 −3
2.1.2 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 −3
2.1.3 FP3 Performance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 −4
ii Matsushita Automation Controls

FP3/FP10SH Table of Contents
2.1.4 FP10SH Performance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 7

2.2 Backplane for FP3/FP10SH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 10
2.3 Expansion Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 12
2.4 FP3 CPU and Optional Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 14
2.4.1 FP3 CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 14
2.4.1.1 Status Indicator LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 16
2.4.1.2 Initialize/Test Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 17
2.4.1.3 Mode Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 17
2.4.2 Memory (EPROM) and Master Memory (EEPROM) . . . . . . . . . 2 − 18
2.5 FP10SH CPU and Optional Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 20
2.5.1 FP10SH CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 20
2.5.1.1 Status Indicator LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 22
2.5.1.2 Initialize/Test Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 23
2.5.1.3 Mode Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 23
2.5.1.4 Operation Condition Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 24
2.5.1.5 Station Number Setting Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 26
2.5.1.6 COM Port (RS232C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 26
2.5.2 Expansion Memory Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 29
2.5.3 ROM Operation Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 31
2.5.4 IC Memory Card Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 35
2.5.5 IC Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 37
2.6 Power Supply Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 42
2.6.1 Power Supply Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 44
2.7 Power Supply Dummy Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 45
2.7.1 Conditions for Using a Power Supply Dummy Unit . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 46
2.7.2 Installing the Power Supply Dummy Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 48
2.8 Common Specifications of Input, Output and I/O Mixed Units . . . . . . . . . 2 − 49
2.8.1 Table of Input Unit Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 50
2.8.2 Table of Output Unit Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 50
2.8.3 Table of I/O Mixed Unit Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 51
2.9 Input Units Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 52
2.9.1 16-point Type DC Input Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 52
2.9.1.1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 52
2.9.1.2 Internal Circuit Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 53
2.9.1.3 Pin Layout of Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 53
2.9.2 32-point Type DC Input Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 54
2.9.2.1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 54
2.9.2.3 Pin Layout of Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 56
2.9.3 64-point Type DC Input Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 57
2.9.3.1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 57
2.9.3.4 Internal Current Consumption Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 59
2.9.3.5 Limitations on Number of Simultaneous Input ON
Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 60
2.9.3.6 Notes Regarding the Internal Current Consumption
Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 60
2.9.4 64-point/High−speed Response Type DC Input Units . . . . . . . . 2 − 61
Matsushita Automation Controls iii

2.9.4.1
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 61
2.9.4.2
Internal Circuit Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 61
2.9.4.3
Pin Layout of Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 62
2.9.4.4
Limitations on Number of Simultaneous Input ON
Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 63
2.9.5 8-point Type AC Input Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 64
2.9.5.1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 64
2.9.6 16-point Type AC Input Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 66
2.9.6.1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 66
2.10 Output Units Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 68
2.10.1 16-point Type Relay Output Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 68
2.10.1.1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 68
2.10.2 16-point Type Output Unit−Transistor NPN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 70
2.10.2.1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 70
2.10.3.1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 72
2.10.4.1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 74
2.10.5 16-point Type Output Unit−Transistor PNP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 76
2.10.5.1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 76
2.10.6 32-point type Output Unit−Transistor PNP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 78
2.10.6.1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 78
2.10.7 64-point Type Output Unit−Transistor PNP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 80
2.10.7.1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 80
2.10.8 16-point Type Triac Output Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 82
2.10.8.1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 82
2.11 I/O Mixed Units Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 84
2.11.1 64−point Type I/O Mixed Unit−DC Input/Transistor NPN . . . . . 2 − 84
iv Matsushita Automation Controls

2.11.1.1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 84
2.11.2 64−point Type I/O Mixed Unit−DC Input/Transistor PNP . . . . . . 2 − 88
2.11.2.1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 88
2.11.3 16−point Type I/O Mixed Unit−DC Input/Relay Output . . . . . . . 2 − 92
2.11.3.1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 92
Chapter 3 I/O Allocation
3.1 Fundamentals of I/O Allocation (Automatic Allocation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 3

3.1.1 Example of Automatic Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 3
3.1.2 Using Automatic Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 4
3.1.3 Procedure for Automatic Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 5
3.2 Arbitrary Allocation With NPST−GR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 6
3.2.1 Example of Arbitrary Allocation With NPST−GR . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 6
3.2.2 Using Arbitrary Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 7
3.2.3 Procedure of Arbitrary Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 8
3.3 Registration of I/O Mount Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 9
3.3.1 Registration Method of Mount State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 9
3.3.1.1 Using Registration of I/O Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 9
3.3.1.2 Clearing Registered Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 10
3.4 Table of I/O Occupied Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 11
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring
4.1 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 3
4.1.1 Installation Space and Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 3
4.1.1.1 Setting the Board Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 6
4.1.2 Mounting Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 7
4.1.3 Connecting Expansion Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 9
4.1.4 Connecting Backup Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 10
4.2 Power Supply Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 11
4.2.1 Wiring the Power Supply to the Power Supply Unit . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 11
4.2.2 Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 13
4.3 Wiring Input and Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 14
4.3.1 Input Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 14
4.3.1.1 Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 14
4.3.1.2 AC Input Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 15
4.3.1.3 LED−Equipped Reed Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 15
4.3.1.4 Two−Wire Type Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 15
4.3.1.5 LED−Equipped Limit Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 16
4.3.1.6 Wiring 64−point Type Input Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 17
Matsushita Automation Controls v

4.3.2 Output Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 18

4.3.2.1 Protective Circuit for Inductive Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 18
4.3.2.2 Protective Circuit for Capacitive Loads . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 19
4.3.2.3 Precautions for Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 19
4.3.2.4 Precautions for Leakage Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 19
4.3.3 Cautions Regarding Input and Output Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 20
4.4 Wiring the Connector Type I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 21
4.4.1 Wiring the Connector Type Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 21
4.4.2 Connecting the Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 24
4.4.2.1 CT−2 Connector Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 24
4.4.2.2 RT−2 Relay Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 27
4.4.3 Connecting the Cable With Pressure Connection Terminal . . . 4 − 29
4.4.4 Connecting with Connector for Wire−pressed Terminal Cable . 4 − 31
4.4.5 Connecting with Flat Cable Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 33
4.5 Wiring the Terminal Type I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 35
4.5.1 Wiring the Terminal Type Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 35
4.6 Safety Measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 36
4.6.1 Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 36
4.6.1.1 Precautions Regarding System Design . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 36
4.6.1.2 Interlock Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 36
4.6.1.3 Emergency Stop Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 36
4.6.1.4 Start Up Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 36
4.6.1.5 Alarm Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 37
4.6.2 Momentary Power Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 37
4.6.3 Alarm Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 37
4.6.3.1 Watchdog Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 38
Chapter 5 Procedure Until Operation
5.1 Before Turning ON the Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 3

5.1.1 Check Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 3
5.1.2 Procedure Up To Trial Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 4
5.2 Programming with NPST−GR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 5
5.2.1 Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 5
5.2.2 Configuring NPST−GR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 6
5.2.2.1 Setting Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 7
5.3 Programming with an FP Programmer II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 9
5.3.1 Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 9
5.4 Operation of FP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 11
5.4.1 RAM and ROM Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 11
5.4.1.1 Comparison of RAM and ROM Operations . . . . . . . 5 − 11
5.4.2 Holding the Data During Power Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 12
5.4.2.1 Backup of Operation Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 12
5.4.2.2 Setting the Battery Error Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 12
5.4.3 Precautions for ROM Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 13
5.4.3.1 Transfer Data From ROM to the Built−in RAM . . . . . 5 − 14
5.4.4 Writing to ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 15
vi Matsushita Automation Controls

5.4.4.1
Using a Commercially Available ROM Writer Via
EEPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 15
5.4.4.2 Using NPST−GR and a Commercially Available ROM
Writer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 17
5.5 Operation of FP10SH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 19
5.5.1 RAM, ROM and IC Memory Card Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 19
5.5.1.1 Comparison of RAM, ROM and IC Memory Card
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 19
5.5.2 Holding the Data During Power Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 21
5.5.2.1 Backup of Operation Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 21
5.5.2.2 Setting the Battery Error Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 21
5.6 How To Use a ROM Operation Board (for FP10SH only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 22
5.6.1 Overview of FP10SH ROM Operation Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 22
5.6.2 Function of ROM Operation Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 23
5.6.2.1 Comment Storager Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 23
5.6.2.2 Precautions for Comment Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 24
5.6.3 Precautions for ROM Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 25
5.6.3.1 Transfer Data From ROM to the Built−in RAM . . . . . 5 − 26
5.6.4 Transfer Data from RAM to FROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 27
5.6.4.1 Method for Transferring From RAM to FROM . . . . . 5 − 27
5.6.4.2 Storage Capacity of User ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 27
5.6.5 Writing to ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 28
5.6.5.1 Writing of Master Memory (FROM) and Memory
(EPROM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 28
5.7 How To Use IC Card Board (for FP10SH only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 32
5.7.1 Overview of FP10SH IC Card Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 32
5.7.2 Function of IC Card Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 33
5.7.2.1 Comment Storage Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 33
5.7.2.3 Transfer Data from RAM to IC Memory Card . . . . . . 5 − 34
5.7.2.4 Precautions for Data File Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 35
5.7.3 Precautions for IC Memory Card Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 36
5.7.3.1 Transfer Data From IC Memory Card To Built−in
RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 37
Chapter 6 IC Memory Card
6.1 Overview of IC Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 − 3

6.2 Configuration of IC Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 − 6
6.2.1 Program Memory and Expansion Memory Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 − 6
6.2.2 IC Memory Card Formatting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 − 8
6.2.3 Procedure to Erase IC Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 − 9
6.2.4 Data Storage Capacity of IC Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 − 10
6.2.5 Managing IC Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 − 11
6.3 How To Use IC Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 − 13
6.3.1 For Use as Program Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 − 13
6.3.1.1 Writing the Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 − 13
6.3.1.2 Reading the Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 − 15
Matsushita Automation Controls vii

6.3.2 For Use as Expansion Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 − 19

6.3.2.1 Outline of Expansion Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 − 19
6.3.2.2 Configuration of Expansion Memory Area . . . . . . . . 6 − 21
Chapter 7 Self−Diagnostic and Troubleshooting
7.1 Self−Diagnostic Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 − 3

7.1.1 Status Indicator LEDs on CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 − 3
7.1.2 Operation When an Error Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 − 4
7.1.2.1 Allowing Duplicated Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 − 4
7.1.2.2 Continuing After An Operation Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 − 4
7.2 Troublesooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 − 5
7.2.1 If the ERROR LED Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 − 5
7.2.2 If the ALARM LED Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 − 7
7.2.3 If the LED (POWER) of Power Supply Unit Does Not Light . . . . 7 − 7
7.2.4 If Outputting Does Not Occur as Desired . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 − 8
7.2.5 If a Communication Error Appears When Using NPST−GR . . . 7 − 10
7.2.6 If a Protect Error Message Appears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 − 11
Chapter 8 Maintenance
8.1 Replacement of Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 3

8.1.1 Replacement of Backup Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 3
8.1.1.1 Lifetime of Backup Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 3
8.1.1.2 Replacement Method of Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 4
8.1.2 Battery of IC Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 6
8.1.2.1 Battery Lifetime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 6
8.1.2.2 Replacement Method of Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 7
8.1.3 Replacement of Fuse for Power Supply Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 8
8.1.3.1 Replacement Method of Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 8
8.1.4 Removable Terminal Block for Input and Output Units . . . . . . . . 8 − 9
8.1.5 Replacement of Relay for Output Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 9
8.1.5.1 Replacement Method of Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 9
8.1.6 Replacement of Fuse for Output Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 11
8.1.6.1 Replacement Method of Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 11
8.2 Preventive Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 12
Appendix A Performance Specifications
A.1 FP10SH Performance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A − 3

A.2 FP3 Performance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A − 6
Appendix B Table of System Registers
B.1 System Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B − 3

B.2 Content of System Register Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B − 6
viii Matsushita Automation Controls

B.3 Table of System Registers (for FP3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B − 10

B.4 Table of System Registers (for FP10SH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B − 16
B.4.1 Operation of DF Instruction Between MC and MCE
Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B − 22
Appendix C Table of Relays, Memory Areas and Constants
C.1 Relays, Memory Areas and Constants for FP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C − 3

C.2 Relays, Memory Areas and Constants for FP10SH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C − 5
C.3 Relay Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C − 7
Appendix D Table of Special Internal Relays
Appendix E Table of Special Data Registers
Appendix F Table of Error Codes
F.1 Confirmation of Error When the Error LED Turns ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F − 3

F.1.1 Confirmation Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F − 3
F.1.2 Self-Diagnostic Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F − 3
F.1.3 Syntax Check Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F − 4
F.2 Table of Syntax Check Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F − 5
F.3 Table of Self-Diagnostic Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F − 7
F.4 Table of Communication Check Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F − 13
Appendix G Table of Instructions
G.1 Table of Basic Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G − 3

G.2 Table of High-Level Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G − 16
Appendix H Table of Binary/Hexadecimal/BCD Expressions
Appendix I ASCII Codes
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i − 1
Record of changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R − 1
Matsushita Automation Controls ix

Before You Start FP3/FP10SH
Before You Start

Installation environment
Do not use the FP3/FP10SH unit where it will be exposed to the following:
Direct sunlight, and ambient temperatures outside the rang of
0 to 55°C/32 to 131°F.
Ambient humidity outside the range of 30 to 85 % RH and
sudden temperature changes causing condensation.
Inflammable or corresive gas.
Excessive vibration or shock.
Excessive airborne dust or metal particles.
Water or oil in any from including spray or mist.
Benzine, paint thinner, alcohol or other organic solvents or
strong alkaline solutions such as ammonia or caustic soda.
Static electricity
In dry locations, excessive static electricity can cause
problems. Before touching the unit, always touch a grounded
piece of metal in order to discharge static electricity.
Cleaning
Do not use thinner based cleaners because they deform the
unit and fade the colors.
Before turning ON the power

When turning ON the power for the first time, be sure to take the precautions given
below.
Verify that the power supply wiring, I/O wiring, and power
supply voltage are all correct.
Sufficiiently tighten the installation screws and terminal
screws.
Set the mode selector to PROG. mode.
Remove the dust proofing label, in order to let heat disperse.
Open the cover on the CPU, and connect the connector for the
backup battery. The connector is not connected when the CPU
is shipped.
x Matsushita Automation Controls

FP3/FP10SH Before You Start
Hardware compatibility between the two models

The FP3 and FP10SH share the same backplane and unit, but the following points
should be checked if the type of CPU is changed.
The internal current consumption varies depending on the CPU.
See section 1.3.3, and check the total current consumption.
With the FP10SH, there are some expansion cables which cannot be
used. See section 2.3 to check which cables can be used.
On the FP3, the programming tool port is an RS422 port (a 15−pin
connector), and on the FP10SH, the port is an RS232C port (a 9−pin
connector). The cables used for the two ports are different.
Programming tools
When using the NPST−GR software:
An adapter and cable are required to connect the FP3/FP10SH to a
computer (* section 1.5.2).
With the FP10SH, NPST−GR Ver.4 or a subsequent version is required.
When using the handy−type FP programmer:
With the FP3, use “FP Programmer II Ver.2 (AFP1114V2).
The FP programmer cable (AFP5520: 50cm/19.69 in. or AFP5523:
3 m/9.84 ft.) is required to connect the FP3 and the FP programmer II
Ver.2.
. Note
The FP Programmer II Ver.2 cannot be used with the FP10SH.
Precautions when using the FP10SH

When using the units listed below in combination with the FP10SH CPU, check the
version and lot number of the unit.
Type Order Version/Lot number

number
A/D converter unit AFP3402 The unit can be used if the lot number is
G type AFP3403 97***** or a subsequent number.
AFP3405 (Products manufactured in fiscal 1997 or
late )
later)
A/D converter unit AFP3406
I type AFP3407
AFP3408
Positioning unit AFP3431E The unit can be used if the version is Ver.
E type AFP3432E 1.5 or a subsequent version.
Computer communication AFP3462 The unit can be used if the version is Ver.
unit (C.C.U.) 1.2 or a subsequent version.
Matsushita Automation Controls xi

Before You Start FP3/FP10SH
Before entering a program

Be sure to perform a program clear operation before entering a program.
When using NPST−GR
Procedure:
1. Press the <CTRL> and <ESC> keys simultaneously to
change to the online monitor screen.
2. Press the <ESC> key to display the [NPST MENU].
From this menu, select [CLEAR A PROGRAM] from
[EDIT A PROGRAM] and press the <ENTER> key.
[CLEAR A PROGRAM]
CLEAR [ PROG & I/O CMT / PROGRAM / I/O CMT ]
SELECT WHAT YOU WANT TO CLEAR.
F1: EXECUTE
3. When [CLEAR A PROGRAM] window appears, press

the <F1> key.
When using FP programmer II Ver.2

Press the keys on the FP programmer II Ver.2, as shown below.
(−) SHIFT (DELT)
ACLR 0 ENT
OP SC INST
xii Matsushita Automation Controls

Chapter 1
Features and System Configuration
1.1 General Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 3
1.2 Basic System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 6

1.2.1 Basic Configuration and Number of
Control I/O Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 6
1.2.2 Configuration and Number of Control
I/O Points When Expanded . . . . . . . . 1 − 8
1.3 Unit Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 10

1.3.1 Unit Line−Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 10
1.3.2 Restrictions on Unit Types . . . . . . . . 1 − 12
1.3.3 Limitations on Current
Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 15
1.4 Expansion System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 20

1.4.1 MEWNET−F (remote I/O)
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 20
1.4.2 MEWNET−TR System Configuration 1 − 22
1.4.3 MEWNET−W System Configuration 1 − 24
1.4.4 MEWNET−P Configuration . . . . . . . . 1 − 26
1.4.5 Computer Link Function . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 28
1.4.6 Control by MODEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 30
1.5 Programming Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 32

1.5.1 Tools Needed for Programming . . . . 1 − 32
1.5.1.1 Using NPST−GR Software
for FP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 32
1.5.1.2 Using NPST−GR Software
for FP10SH . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 33
1.5.1.3 Using FP Programmer II Ver.2
for FP3 Only . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 33
next page
I/O Allocation FP3/FP10SH
1.5.2 Table of Programming Tools . . . . . . 1 − 34

1.5.3 Tools Needed for ROM Writing
of FP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 35
1.5.3.1 When Creating a ROM With a
Commercially Available ROM
Writer, Through a Master
Memory (EEPROM) . . . . . . 1 − 35
1.5.3.2 When Creating a ROM With
NPST−GR Software and a
Writer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 36
1.5.4 Tools Needed for ROM Writing
of FP10SH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 37
1.5.4.1 When Creating a ROM With a
Writer, Through a Master
Memory (FROM) . . . . . . . . . 1 − 37
1.5.4.2 When Creating a ROM With
NPST−GR Software and a
Writer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 38
1 −2 Matsushita Automation Controls

FP3/FP10SH I/O Allocation
1.1 General Features

Exclusive RISC (Reduced instruction set computer) processor for high speed
processing.
Basic sequence instructions: 40 ns
Timer, counter instructions: 280 ns
Data transfer instructions: 80 ns
Addition/subtraction instructions: 240 ns
Scan time of 1 ms (for 10 k steps)

The time required for one scan is greatly reduced by paralleling the calculation and
transmission processes.
Large program memory with a maximum of 120 k steps
CPU with an internal RAM capacity of 30 k steps. With the addition of the FP10SH
optional expansion memory unit of 30 k (or 90 k) steps, a programming capacity of up
to 60 k (or 120 k) steps can be obtained.
Expansion memory unit
Transmission port with 115 kbps capability

Greatly increased transmission speed means the program upload and download
processing speeds are also greatly increased.
Functions demanded from larger modules are added

1 ms unit timer added.
Real number calculations (trigonometric functions, exponents,
logarithms, square roots, etc.)
Index modifier functions (224 words with bit modifier is also possible)
Matsushita Automation Controls 1 −3

ROM and IC memory card available for optional memory

Program memory can be converted to ROM (with use of optional ROM
operation board).
Supports the use of IC memory cards for use as program memory or
expansion data memory (with use of optional IC memory card board).
ROM operation board IC memory card board
CPU comes standard with RS232C port
Hardware and software designed with considerations for expansion

With few restrictions when using units in combinations, up to 512 points are possible
with an 8−slot master backplane and 64−point units, and this is expandable to up to
1,536 points with additional backplanes (up to 2,048 with the FP10SH). Remodeling
and expansion of the equipment is also supported for greater flexibility.
Master
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Max.
backplane 512 points
Max.
1024 points
1st
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Max.
expansion
backplane 1536 points
Max.
2nd 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2048 points (*)
expansion
backplane
3rd
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
expansion
backplane
(*) The FP10SH CPU supports expansion of up to 3 expansion backplanes.
Common programming software (NPST−GR software)

Our FP series also supports the same programming software to allow you to make use
of the same programs used with the smaller programmable controllers.

Copious selection of units

Input units (16 points, 32 points, 64 points)
Output units (16 points, 32 points, 64 points)
I/O units (3 types)
Remote I/O-related units (2 types)
Analog I/O units (7 types)
Serial data controller units (2 types)
Positioning control units (4 types)
Interrupt control unit (1 type)
Link system-related units (5 types)
Standard modem initialization function

A modem can be connected to the CPU for use with program maintenance systems and
remote monitoring and observation systems over normal phone lines.
Expandable over existing networks

Besides MEWNET−F (remote I/O) systems, the units can be networked between
programmable controllers and computers. Units with Ethernet capabilities (ET−LAN
units) are also available.
Comparison of processing speed and memory capacity
Item FP10SH FP3
AFP3210C−F
AFP6221V3 AFP6211V3 AFP3220C−F
AFP3211C−F
Processing Sequence 0.04 µs 0.1 µs 0.5 µs
speed (pe a instruction
(per an
instruction) Timer 0.28 µs 0.7 µs 2.0 µs
instruction
High−level from 0.08 µs from 0.2 µs from dozens of speed µs
instruction
Program capacity 30 k steps 16 k steps 10 k steps
(expanded up to 120 k steps)
External input relays (X) 8,192 points 2,048 points
External output relays (Y) 8,192 points 2,048 points
Internal relays (R) 14,192 points 1,568 points
Data registers (DT) 10,240 words 2,048 words
File registers (FL) 32,765 words 22,525 words to 0 word
Link relays (L) 10,240 points 1,024 points × 2
Link data registers (LD) 8,448 words 128 words × 2

1.2 Basic System Configuration
1.2.1 Basic Configuration and Number of Control I/O Points
Item Master backplane
48 I/O points: using three 16-point I/O units

3-slot 96 I/O points: using three 32-point I/O units
type 192 I/O points: using three 64-point I/O units
Power supply CPU

unit
80 I/O points: using 16-point five I/O units

160 I/O points: using 32-point five I/O units
5-slot 320 I/O points: using 64-point five I/O units
type
Power supply unit CPU
128 I/O points: using eight 16-point I/O units

8-slot 256 I/O points: using eight 32-point I/O units
type 512 I/O points: using eight 64-point I/O units
Power supply unit CPU
Item Expansion backplane
48 I/O points: using three 16-point I/O units

3-slot 96 I/O points: using three 32-point I/O units
type 192 I/O points: using three 64-point I/O units
Power supply unit
80 I/O points: using five 16-point I/O units

5-slot
type
Power supply unit

8-slot 512 I/O points: using eight 64-point I/O units
type
Power supply unit
next page

The I/O units, intelligent units, power supply unit and backplane can be commonly used
for the FP3 and the FP10SH.
Although most of the I/O units and intelligent units can be combined freely in the layout,
you should check the following points when selecting your units:
− the restrictions on unit types (* section 1.3.2).
− the limitations on current consumption (* section 1.3.3).
The mounting position for the I/O units on each backplane are free and the I/O can be
assigned using NPST-GR, so system design and specifications changes are easily
supported.
The master and expansion backplanes are available in three types: 3-slot, 5-slot and
8-slot.
The number of I/O points controllable for one backplane for 16−point, 32−point, and
64−point I/O units as shown below.
Using 16−point Using 32−point Using 64−point
Backplane type
I/O units I/O units I/O units
3−slot 48 points 96 points 192 points

1.2.2 Configuration and Number of Control I/O Points When Expanded
FP3 FP10SH
Master Master
backplane backplane
Expansion cable Expansion cable
Expansion Expansion
backplane backplane
(No.1) (No.1)
Expansion cable Expansion cable
Expansion Expansion
backplane backplane
(No.2) (No.2)
Expansion cable
Expansion
backplane
(No.3)
Both master and expansion backplanes can be connected in any combination between
3−, 5− and 8−slot types.
Up to two (for the FP3) or three (for the FP10SH) expansion backplanes can be
connected to a master backplane.
When using 64−point units attached to 8−slot backplanes, up to the following number
of points become controllable.
FP3
Master Expansion Expansion
backplane backplane backplane
512 points + 512 points + 512 points = total 1,536 points
FP10SH
Master Expansion Expansion Expansion
backplane backplane backplane backplane
512 points + 512 points + 512 points + 512 points = total 2,048 points
For limitation on expansion of the expansion cable, refer to section 2.3.

Further expansion of I/O points is possible with remote I/O systems.

With remote I/O system, the number of control I/O points can be expanded as shown
below.
Type of CPU When expanded When using remote I/O system

FP3 Up to 1,536 points Up to 2,048 points
FP10SH Up to 2,048 points Up to 8,192 points
When the I/O equipments are dispersed or when you want to make the control panel
compact; use of remote I/O is recommended for I/O point expansion.
The use of expansion backplanes are recommended when the I/O equipments are
gathered in a small area or a high response speed is required.
Remote I/O system are available in two types: the MEWNET−F for large−scale network
and MEWNET−TR for small−scale network.
Note
For more information regarding the MEWNET−F and MEWNET−
TR, refer to their manuals.

1.3 Unit Combinations
1.3.1 Unit Line−Up
3-slot type
CPU
5-slot type (with built−in
RAM)
An expansion
memory unit
(RAM) is
available for FP3 FP10SH
the FP10SH. CPU CPU
8-slot type Optional memory
A ROM operation board or IC memory
card board is required when optional
memory is used for FP10SH.
For FP3 For FP10SH

IC memory
card
(SRAM/
FROM)
EPROM or EPROM or
3-slot type EEPROM FROM
MEWNET-F (remote I/O) slave unit
This unit need to be

installed when being
used as a slave station
of the MEWNET−F
5-slot type (remote I/O) system.
Power supply unit
8-slot type
Power supply
100/200 V AC type 24 V DC type dummy unit
(selectable)
1 − 10 Matsushita Automation Controls

Input units Output units
16 points 32 points 64 points 8 points 16 points 16 points 16 points 32 points 64 points 16 point
DC type DC type DC type AC type AC type Relay type Transistor Transistor Transistor Triac type
type type type
I/O mixed units Remote I/O-related units
I:8/O:8, I:32/O:32, MEWNET-F MEWNET-TR

DC input/ DC input/ (remote I/O) master unit
Relay type Transistor type master unit
Operation display panel
Analog I/O units
and computer interface unit Serial data controller units
A/D D/A Thermocouple RTD input Computer communication Serial Data process
converter converter input unit unit unit (C.C.U.) data unit unit
unit unit
Position control and motor control units Interrupt unit
High-speed Pulse Positioning Positioning Positioning Interrupt unit

counter unit output unit unit E-type unit F-type unit F-type
(transistor type) (Line−driver type)
Link system-related units Expansion data memory unit
MEWNET-P MEWNET-W C-NET link ET-LAN link Expansion data memory unit
(optical) link unit (wire) link unit unit unit
Matsushita Automation Controls 1 − 11

1.3.2 Restrictions on Unit Types
Combination of FP3/FP10SH units (A: Available, N/A: Not available)

Basic Units
MEWNET−F (remote I/O)

Backplanes and units
Expansion Backplane
Power Supply Unit
Master Backplane
Slave Unit
Set configurations
CPU
Basic The most basic configuration A N/A A A N/A
set for CPU installation.
Power supply unit and CPU
are installed to a master
backplane.
Power CPU I/O mounting

supply area
unit
Expan- This configuration is to N/A A A N/A N/A

sion set be used for expansion. (*)
A power supply unit is
installed to an expansion
backplane.
Power I/O mounting

supply area
unit
Remote This configuration is A N/A A N/A A

I/O slave used when the serves as
station slave station of MEWNET−F
set (remote I/O system).
A power supply unit and
remote I/O slave units are
installed to a master
Power Slave I/O mounting
supply area backplane.
unit
Note
(*): A power supply dummy unit may be used to omit the power
supply unit (* section 2.7).

A
A
A
Input Unit
A
A
A
Output Unit
A
A
A
I/O Mixed Unit
FP3/FP10SH
A
A
A
*4
A/D Converter Unit
A
A
A
D/A Converter Unit
A
A
A
Thermocouple Input Unit
A
A
A
RTD Input Unit
Matsushita Automation Controls

A
A
A
Serial Data Unit
A
A
A
Data Process Unit
High−speed Counter Unit
A A
A A
*1 *1
*1 *1
Pulse Output Unit
A A A
A
A
*5 *5 *6
Positioning Unit E type
A
A
A Positioning Unit F type
A
A
Up to 2 units Interrupt Unit
A N/A
A
A
*7
MEWNET−TR Master Unit
MEWNET−F (Remote I/O)
A
A
Up to 4 units
N/A
Master Unit
MEWNET−W Link Unit
N/A
N/A
Units which can be mounted on I/O mounting area
A A
*2 *2
MEWNET−P Link Unit

A
ET−LAN Unit
A
*2
C−NET Link Unit

A
*3
*2
C.C.U.
N/A N/A N/A N/A

N/A N/A N/A N/A
Expansion Data Memory
A
A
A
1 − 13
Unit
I/O Allocation
next page
Notes
(*1): Interrupt function is available on high−speed counter and
pulse output units when the total number of units is 8 or
less.
(*2): Up to 3 units in all −MEWNET−W link unit, MEWNET−P
link unit, C−NET link unit and computer communication
unit (Up to 5 units in all if the CPU is the FP10SH).
Up to 2 units in all −MEWNET−W and MEWNET−P− for PC
link function.
(*3): When using the FP10SH, the computer communication
unit Ver. 1.2 or later is required.
(*4): When using the FP10SH, units producted in 1997 or later
are required for I and G types (lot No. of 97**** or later).
(*5): The interrupt function is not available when a remote I/O
slave unit is connected.
(*6): When using the FP10SH, the positioning unit E−type Ver.
1.5 or later is required.
(*7): When using the FP10SH, the MEWNET−TR transmitter
master unit Ver.1.1 or later is required.

1.3.3 Limitations on Current Consumption
Power supply unit Rated output current (5 V)

AFP3631 2.4 A
AFP3634 2.4 A
AFP3638 9 A (at ambient temp.
Internal power supply (5 V) passes 45 °C/113 °F or less)
through the bus of backplane to each 7 A (at ambient temp.
unit. 55 °C/131 °F or less)
Commercial
available power
1Power goes from a service 2 Power goes from a commercial supply 24 V
power supply to each I/O available power supply to each
unit I/O unit
Power Rated output Use an external supply power (24 V) from either 1
supply unit current (24 V) a service power supply or 2 commercial available
AFP3631 0.8 A power supply.
Do not connect them ( 1 and 2 ) in parallel.
Internal supply power (5 V DC)
The 5 V DC power used for driving the internal circuit of each unit is supplied from the
power supply unit through the internal bus of the backplane.
External supply power (24 V DC)
The 24 V DC power supply used as the input power supply of the input units and the
output circuit driving power of the output units are supplied from the external terminal
of each unit.
For 24 V power supply, the service power supply of the power supply unit or a
commercial available power supply equipment is used.
Do not connect the service power supply of the power supply unit and the 24 V power
supply of commercial available power supply equipment in parallel.

Combination of units
The current consumed by each unit is shown in the following pages.
Give consideration to the combination of units so that the rated capacity of 5 V DC and
24 V DC power supplies should not exceeded.
<Example of current consumption calculation>
The table below shows the combination of typical units on a 8-slot type backplane.
Type Number of Current
Current
units and consumption
consumption
backplane at 24 V DC
at 5 V DC (mA)
used (mA)
FP3 CPU (AFP3211C−F) 1 250 −
Master backplane (AFP3502−F) 1 100 −
Input unit (32−point) (AFP33024−F) 2 240 (120×2) 512 (8×32×2)
Output unit (32−point) (AFP33484−F) 4 640 (160×4) 384 (3×32×4)
MEWNET-W link unit (AFP3720) 1 350 −
Computer communication unit 1 100 −
(AFP3462)
FP programmer II Ver.2 (AFP1114V2) 1 130 −
Total current consumption 1,810 mA 896 mA
Note
The current consumption at 24 V DC is calculated on the
assumption that the number of ON points of input/output unit is
at maximum.
The load current for the output units is not included.
Table of current consumption at 5 V DC

Type Order Current
number consumption
at 5 V DC (mA)
FP3 CPU AFP3210C−F 250
AFP3211C−F 250
AFP3220C−F 250
FP10SH CPU AFP6211V3 700
AFP6221V3 800
FP10SH Exapnsion
p memory
y unit AFP6204 30
optional
i l AFP6205 30
memory
ROM operation board AFP6208 100
IC memory card board AFP6209A 100
Master backplane
p 3-slot type AFP3505−F 100
5-slot type AFP3501−F 100
next page

Type Order Current

number consumption
at 5 V DC (mA)
Expansion
p backplane
p 3-slot type AFP3506−F 100
Input unit DC input 16-point, 12 to 24 V DC AFP33023−F 60
terminal
32-point,
p , 5 V DC AFP33014−F 120
connector 12 to 24 V DC AFP33024−F 120
64-point,
p , 12 to 24 V DC AFP33027−F 230
connector AFP33028−F 230
24 V DC AFP33068−F 230
5 V DC AFP33017−F 230
AC input
p 8-point,
p , 100 to 120 V AC AFP33041 60
terminal
i l 200 to 240 V AC AFP33051 60
16-point,
p , 100 to 120 V AC AFP33043 60
terminal
i l 200 to 240 V AC AFP33053 60
Output
p unit Relayy output
p 16-point,
p , terminal AFP33203−F 150
type AFP33103−F 150
Transistor 16-point,
p , NPN open collector AFP33483−F 100
output terminal
i l PNP open collector AFP33583−F 120
32-point,
p , NPN open collector AFP33484−F 160
connector PNP open collector AFP33584−F 160
64-point
p NPN open collector AFP33487−F 250
connector PNP open collector AFP33587−F 250
Triac output 16-point, terminal AFP33703 200
I/O mixed DC input/relay 16-point, 12 to 24 V DC AFP33223−F 150
unit output type terminal
(I: 8/O:8)
DC input/ 64-point, 12 to 24 V DC AFP33428−F 230
transistor (I: 32/O:32) NPN open collector
output type connector 12 to 24 V DC AFP33528−F 230
PNP open collector
A/D
/ 4-channel, Non-insulated AFP3400 500
converter G-type
yp ((8-channel,, non-insulated)) AFP3402 400
unit
AFP3403 400
AFP3405 400
I-type
yp ((8-channel,, insulated)) AFP3406 400
AFP3407 400
AFP3408 400
next page

Type Order Current

number consumption
at 5 V DC (mA)
D/A
/ 2-channel ((non-insulated)) AFP3410 700
converter AFP3411 700
unit
I-type
yp 2-channel AFP3412 600
(i
(insulated)
l d) AFP3413 600
AFP3416 600
AFP3417 600
4-channel AFP3414 1,000
AFP3415 1,000
AFP3418 1,000
AFP3419 1,000
Thermocouple input unit AFP3420 500
R.T.D. input unit AFP3421 500
Serial data unit AFP3460 100
Data process unit AFP3461 300
High-speed
g p counter unit 1-channel type AFP3621 150
2-channel type AFP3622 220
Pulse output unit AFP3480 150
Positioning
g unit E-type
yp Transistor 1-axis type AFP3431E 250
output type 2-axis type AFP3432E 250
Positioning
g unit F-type
yp Transistor 1-axis type AFP3431 350
output type 2-axis type AFP3432 400
Line-driver 1-axis type AFP3434 350
output type 2-axis type AFP3435 350
3-axis type AFP3436 400
Interrupt unit AFP3452 100
MEWNET-TR master unit AFP3750 150
MEWNET-F master unit AFP3742 450
slave unit AFP3743 400
MEWNET-W link unit AFP3720 350
MEWNET-P link unit AFP3710 320
ET-LAN link unit AFP3790 470
C-NET link unit AFP3463 350
Computer communication unit (C.C.U.) AFP3462 100
Expansion
p data memory y unit AFP32091 50
AFP32092 50
FP programmer II Ver.2 AFP1114V2 130
Teaching unit II AFP5134 350

Table of current consumption at 24 V DC

Type Order Current
number consumption
at 24 V DC
(mA)
Input
p unit DC input
p 16-point, terminal AFP33023−F 8×n
(12 to 24
2 V DC) 32-point, connector AFP33024−F 8×n
64-point,
p , connector AFP33027−F 6×n
AFP33028−F 6×n
DC input 64-point, connector AFP33068−F 3.5 × n
(24 V DC)
Output
p unit Relayy output
p 16-point,
p , terminal AFP33203−F 10 × n
type AFP33103−F 10 × n
p , NPN open collector AFP33483−F 6×n
output terminal
i l PNP open collector AFP33583−F 6×n
32-point,
p , NPN open collector AFP33484−F 3×n
connector PNP open collector AFP33584−F 3×n
64-point
p NPN open collector AFP33487−F 3×n
connector PNP open collector AFP33587−F 3×n
Notes
“n” expresses the number of inputs or outputs that are ON.
The input unit displays the current flowing to the internal
circuit. The other units display the current value required to
drive the internal circuit. This value does not include the load
current of the output unit.
Table of output current value of power supply unit

Power supply
pp y unit Order number Rated output current (mA)
at 5 V DC at 24 V DC
100 V/200
/ V AC type
yp AFP3631 2,400 800
AFP3638 7,000 (* Note 1) −
9,000 (* Note 2) −
24 V DC type AFP3634 2,400 −
Notes
(*1): At ambient temperature 55 °C/131.0 °F or less
(*2): At ambient temperature 45 °C/113.0 °F or less

1.4 Expansion System Configuration
1.4.1 MEWNET−F (remote I/O) Configuration
The MEWNET−F system is a distributed I/O system which uses two−core cable to
connect differently located input and output equipments.
The operation box can be installed in one location and used to control I/O equipment
in another locations. This system is ideal for network operations when the I/O units are
distributed in various places.
The MEWNET−F master unit serve as the master station.
Up to 4 wiring paths from the master station can be arranged to layout of slave stations
in a flexible way.
For more information regarding the MEWNET−F configuration, refer to the FP3/FP5
MEWNET−F manual.
MEWNET−F
master unit
Master
station
Path 1 Path 2
Slave Slave
station station Slave station
FP I/O terminal unit

FP I/O terminal board FP1 FP1 I/O link unit
Path 3 Path 4
Slave station Slave station Slave station RS485
I.O.P. M30/M21 series

FP3/FP5 Remote I/O slave unit

Item Description
Communication method two-line, half−duplex transmission
Synchronization method start−stop synchronous system
Communication path two−core cable
(VCTF: 0.75 mm2 × 2C or twisted−pair cable)
Transmission distance total distance:
(* Note 1) max. 400 m/1,312.34 ft. per port (using VCTF cable)
max. 700 m/2,296.59 ft. per port (using twisted−pair
cable)
Transmission speed 0.5 Mbps
(Baud rate)
Number of slave stations max. 32 stations per one master unit
(* Note 2)
Controllable I/O points max. 2,048 points per a FP3 CPU
max. 8,192 points per a FP10SH CPU
Interface conforming to RS485
Transmission error check CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) method
Notes
(*1): When using slave stations with conventional products
(AFP87442, AFP3741, and AFP5741) on the same network,
the maximum distance for transmissions is 200 m/
656.168 ft. with VCTF cable and 300 m/984.252 ft. with
twisted−pair cable.
(*2): The number of controllable slave stations will differ
depending on the type of slave station.

1.4.2 MEWNET−TR System Configuration
This network system allows control with reduced cabling between the FP3 or FP10SH
CPU and input/output units.
By connecting the exclusive I/O terminal block, you can control the input and output
from the I/O terminal block (remote I/O control function).
Allows the connection of two CPUs for the exchange of input/output information (I/O link
function).
Equipped with a sefety function for selecting the operation status (operation stop mode
or operation continue mode) when a communication error occurs.
For more information regarding the MEWNET−TR configuration, refer to the
MEWNET−TR manual.
Remote I/O control function

FP3 CPU or FP10SH CPU
Master
station
Two−core cable
(multi−drop wiring)
FP3 transmitter master unit
Slave
station
FP I/O transmitter unit FP I/O transmitter unit FP I/O transmitter unit

(4−input type, 4−output type) (8−input type, 8−output) (16−input type, 16−output type)
I/O link function

Two−core cable
Master Master
station A station B
FP1 Control unit FP1 transmitter master unit

FP3 CPU or FP10SH CPU Master
Master station B
station A

Item Description
Communication method two-lines, half−duplex transmission
Communication path two−core cable
Transmission distance max. 400 m/1,312.34 ft. (using VCTF cable: 0.75mm2 × 2C)
max. 700 m/2,296.59 ft. (using twisted−pair cable)
(Baud rate)
Controllable I/O points max. 2,048 points per a FP3 CPU
max. 8,192 points per a FP10SH CPU
Number of slave stations max. 32 stations (* Note)
Controllable I/O points max. 128 inputs and 128 outputs per a master unit
Transmission error check self−diagnosis data checking method
Note
The number of controllable slave stations will differ depending
on the type of slave station.

1.4.3 MEWNET−W System Configuration
The MEWNET−W system is a link system which enables economical connections

between programmable controllers using a twisted−pair cables.
Information can be send and received between programmable controllers in units of bits
or words.
Available functions include a PC link function which enables transfer of contact
(ON/OFF) and register information, and a data transfer function which selects the
source and destination for information transfer using program.
This network is recommended for an economical link between programmable
controllers such as an input/output information transfer between devices.
For more information regarding the MEWNET−W system, refer to the MEWNET−W
manual.
Multi−drop wiring via

Connected to twisted−pair cable: Max. 16 stations by PC link function
MEWNET−W link unit total 800 m/2,625 ft. Max. 32 stations by data transfer function
PC link function
The internal link relays (L) and data link registers (LD) are installed to share data
(contact and register information) among the programmable controllers that are
connected in an MEWNET network.
Data transfer function
With the F145 (SEND)/P145 (PSEND) and F146 (RECV)/P146 (PRECV) instructions
to send and receive data, you can specify the format (bit or word) and length of the data
to be sent and received, and appoint a destination station or an address. It is easy to
share data among the programmable controllers on the network. The remote stations
do not need a send/receive program.

Item Description
Communication method token bus
Transmission method baseband transmission
Communication path twisted−pair cable
Transmission distance total length: 800 m/2,625 ft.
(Baud rate)
Functions/number of PC link function: max. 16 stations
stations data transfer function: max. 32 stations
PC link capacity per one link relay: 1,024 points
unit link register: 128 words
Other functions remote programming
R.A.S. function hardware self-diagnostic function

1.4.4 MEWNET−P Configuration
The MEWNET−P (Optical) system links between programmable controllers and

between programmable controller and computers with optical fiber cables.
The system provides five functions: PC link, computer link, data transfer, remote
programming and computer−to−computer communication functions.
Since it possesses loop−back functions and other RAS functions for measures against
malfunctions, observation devices for monitoring the link system are unnecessary. With
the use of the optical fiber cables, a highly reliable system with minimal noise
interference can be constructed.
This network is recommended for medium−sized computer link system.
For more information regarding the MEWNET−P system, refer to the MEWNET−P
manual.
MEWNET−P
Loop with optical fiber
link board
cables:
up to 800 m/2,642 ft.
between stations
up to 10 km/32,808 ft.
Max. 63 stations/network
total distance
(Max. 16 stations for PC link function)
PC link function
The internal link relays (L) and data link registers (LD) are installed to share data
(contact and register information) among the programmable controllers that are
connected in an MEWNET network.
Computer link function
The host computer sends commands to the programmable controllers on network and
writes and reads the input/output information of relays as well as the data register
information. The communication programs are unnecessary on the programmable
controller side.
Data transfer function
With the F145 (SEND)/P145 (PSEND) and F146 (RECV)/P146 (PRECV) instructions
to send and receive data, you can specify the format (bit or word) and length of the data
to be sent and received, and appoint a destination station or an address. It is easy to
share data among the programmable controllers on the network. The remote stations
do not need a send/receive program.

Item Description
Communication method token ring
Transmission method baseband transmission
Communication path two−core optical fiber cable
Transmission distance between stations: 800 m/2,642 ft.
total distance: 10 km/32,808 ft.
Transmission speed 375 kbps
(Baud rate)
Functions/number of PC link function: max. 16 stations
stations computer link function: max. 63 stations
data transfer function: max. 63 stations
PC link capacity per one link relay: 1,024 points
unit link register: 128 words
Other functions remote programming
computer−to−computer communication
R.A.S. function loop automatic return function
node bypass function
self−diagnosis function
(hardware and transmission system test)

1.4.5 Computer Link Function
The FP3 can be connected to the computer as an addition to the computer

communication unit (C.C.U.). Since a RS232C port comes standard on the CPU for
the FP10SH, direct connection to and communication with the computer can be
achieved without the addition of any intelligent units.
Using a host computer program, the relay conditions and register contents of the CPU
can be read and written.
The host computer program are created in BASIC, or other languages, based on the
dedicated protocol (MEWTOCOL−COM).
With communications from a host computer, communication programs are
unnecessary on the CPU side.
For more information regarding the computer link function, refer to the C−NET link unit
manual.
1:1 communication 1:N communication

(One computer to one FP3/FP10SH (One computer to multiple FP3/FP10SH
communication) communication)
When using the RS232C port of FP10SH

C−NET adapter
CPU PC
PC <FP10SH>
CPU
<FP3> C.C.U.
RS232C cable RS232C port

Two−core
cables (RS485):
When using the RS232C port of C.C.U. (VCTF 0.75 × 2C) C−NET RS232C cable
adapter
PC <FP10SH>
<FP3>
CPU C.C.U.
CPU
RS232C cable
RS232C port
RS232C cable A max. of 32 stations can
be connected.

Item Description
Communication method full duplex two wire system,
system half duplex
Communication path RS232C cable two−core cable
(VCTF 0.75 mm2 × 2C)
Transmission distance max. 15 m/49.2 ft. max. 1200 m/3,937 ft.
Transmission speed 300 bps/600 bps/1200 bps/2400 bps/4800 bps/9600 bps/
(Baud rate) 19200 bps (* Note 1, 2)
Transmission code ASCII
Transmission format stop bit: 1 bit/2 bits (* Note 3)
parity check: none/even/odd
character bits: 7 bits/8 bits
Notes
Set the transmission speed, transmission format and unit
number with the internal switches of the CPU.
(*1): When using the tool port with 1:N communication with
the FP3, the transmission speed is 9,600/19,200 bps.
(*2): With the FP10SH, the transmission speed can be
selected from the following: 1,200; 2,400; 4,800; 9,600;
19,200; 38,400; 57,600; and 115,200 bps (however, 38,400
bps and higher can only be used for distances of 3 m/
9.84 ft. or less).
(*3): When using the tool port with 1:N communication with
the FP3, the transmission format is stop bit: 1 bit, odd
parity, and character bits of 8 bits.

1.4.6 Control by MODEM
FP3/FP10SH can be connected to MODEM for programming or computer linking over

long distances by using public telephone lines.
When the power supply is turned ON, it will verify whether a MODEM is connected, and,
if a MODEM is, it will automatically transmit the AT command to set the MODEM for
automatic reception.
Since the reading and writing of the relay conditions and register contents of the
programmable controller can be performed from the host computer, this function is
applicable for remote monitoring systems.
When using the tool port, you can use NPST−GR software and perform reading and
writing of the programmable controller program and maintenance operations.
When using the COM port (RS232C), transmission from the programmable controller
side can also be programmed.

Connections to a MODEM can be made Using the C−NET adapter enables
using either the RS232C port or the MODEMs to be connected for multiple
RS422 port. FP3/FP10SH.
Public
When using FP10SH COM. port (RS232C) MODEM telephone line
MODEM
Public
MODEM telephone line RS232C
MODEM cable
<FP10SH>
C−NET
adapter
RS232C cable C−NET

RS232C port <FP3>
adapter
When using FP3 CPU tool port (RS422)

Public
MODEM telephone line MODEM Two−core RS422 port
cables (RS485):
(VCTF 0.75 × 2C) <FP10SH>
C−NET
<FP3> adapter
RS422/232C RS232C port

adapter RS422 port
A max. of 32 stations can

be connected.

Item Description
FP3 FP10SH
Communication method half duplex
Transmission speed 2,400 bps (fixed) 1,200 bps/2,400 bps/
(Baud rate) (* Note) 4,800 bps/9,600 bps/
19,200 bps/38,400 bps/
57,600 bps/115,200 bps
Transmission code ASCII
Transmission format Start bit: 1-bit
(
(total:
l 10 bits)
bi ) (*
( N
Note)) Stop bit: 1-bit/2-bit
Parity check: none/odd/even
Character bit: 7-bit/8-bit
Note
Set the transmission speed and transmission format using the
internal switches of the CPU.

1.5 Programming Tools
1.5.1 Tools Needed for Programming
1.5.1.1 Using NPST−GR Software for FP3

Necessary tools
1
4
1 NPST−GR software
This is a program editing and debugging software package that can be
used with all programmable controllers in the FP series.
2 RS422/232C adapter (AFP8550)
Adapter needed for connection between the FP3 CPU and the computer.
3 FP PC cable
Cable needed for connection between the tool port (RS422) of FP3 CPU
and connector of RS422/232C adapter.
AFP5520 (50 cm/19.69 in.)
AFP5523 (3 m/9.84 ft.)
For the following, use commercially available products.

4 Commercially available PC
(IBM PC−AT or 100 % compatible machine)
5 Commercially available RS232C cable

1.5.1.2 Using NPST−GR Software for FP10SH

Necessary tools
1 3
1 NPST−GR software
This is a program editing and debugging software package that can be
used with all programmable controllers in the FP series.
2 FP PC cable (AFB85853)
Cable needed for connection between the FP10SH CPU and the
computer.
3 Commercially available PC
(IBM PC−AT or 100 % compatible machine)
1.5.1.3 Using FP Programmer II Ver.2 for FP3 Only

Necessary tools
1 FP Programmer II Ver.2
Handheld programming device (AFP1114V2)
2 FP peripheral cable
Cable needed for connection between the FP3 and the FP programmer II.
AFP5520 (50 cm/19.69 in.)
AFP5523 (3 m/9.84 ft.)
Note
The FP programmer II Ver.2 does not support functions
exclusive for FP10SH, such as operands and instructions newly
added to the FP10SH. Therefore, we recommend you use
NPST-GR software Ver.4 for controlling FP10SH.

1.5.2 Table of Programming Tools
Type Description Order

number
PC software NPST-GR Program editing software for use with AFP266541
software commercially available computers. (System
Ver. 4 required: IBM PC-AT or 100 % compatible
with 800 KB or more free EMS, 4 MB or
more hard disk space, MS-DOS Ver. 6.2 or
later, and EGA or VGA display mode)
FP PC cable Cable needed for connection between the AFB85853
for FP10SH tool port (RS232C) of FP10SH CPU and (3 m/9.84 ft.)
9 pins connector of computer (IBM PC/AT or
100% compatible).
FP PC cable Cable needed for connection between the AFP5520
for FP3 tool port (RS422) of FP3 CPU and 15 pins (50 cm/
connector of RS422/232C adapter. 19.69 in.)
AFP5523
(3 m/9.84 ft.)
RS422/232C Adapter needed for connection between the AFP8550
adapter FP3 CPU and the computer.
Programmer FP Handheld programming device for FP3. AFP1114V2
programmer
II Ver. 2
FP Cable needed for connection between the AFP5520
peripheral tool port of FP3 and the FP programmer II’s (50 cm/
cable communication port. 19.69 in.)
AFP5523
(3 m/9.84 ft.)
Note
When connecting to a computer (IBM PC/AT or 100% compatible),
use a commercially available 9−pin/25−pin adapter.

1.5.3 Tools Needed for ROM Writing of FP3
The memory (AFP5202) is an EPROM, and is used to store programs and carry out
ROM operations. A commercially available ROM writer is necessary in order to write
data.
The master memory (AFP5206) is an EEPROM, and is used to copy programs. When
installed in the FP3 CPU, the contents of the internal RAM of the FP3 CPU (supported
by FP3 CPU Ver. 4.4 or later) can be copied.
1.5.3.1 When Creating a ROM With a Commercially Available ROM Writer,

Through a Master Memory (EEPROM)
Necessary tools
FP3 CPU
1 4
1 FP programmer II Ver.2 and FP peripheral cable (* section 1.5.1.3)

2 Master memory (AFP5206)
(µPD28C256CZ−20, X28C256PI−20 or equivalent)
3 Memory (AFP5202)
(M5M27C256AK−12 or equivalent)
4 Commercially available ROM writer
A ROM writer that can be used with memory 2 or 3 (27C256 or
28C256 type).

1.5.3.2 When Creating a ROM With NPST−GR Software and a Commercially

Available ROM Writer
Necessary tools
1 PC
1 PC and NPST−GR software (* section 1.5.1.1)

2 Memory (AFP5202)
(M5M27C256AK−12 or equivalent)
A ROM writer that can be used with memory 2 (27C256 type).
4 Commercially available centronics cable or commercially available
RS232C cable
Use a cable that conforms with the specifications of the ROM writer.

1.5.4 Tools Needed for ROM Writing of FP10SH
The memory (AFP5209) is an EPROM, and is used to store programs and carry out
ROM operations. A commercially available ROM writer is necessary in order to write
data.
The master memory (AFP5208) is a FROM, and is used to copy programs. When
installed in the FP10SH CPU, the contents of the internal RAM of the FP10SH CPU
(supported by FP10SH CPU Ver.2 or later) can be copied.
1.5.4.1 When Creating a ROM With a Commercially Available ROM Writer,

Through a Master Memory (FROM)
Necessary tools
FP10SH CPU
5
1 PC
4
1 PC, NPST−GR software and cable (* section 1.5.1.2)

2 ROM operation board (AFP6208)
3 Master memory (AFP5208)
(SST−29EE020−150−4C−PH or equivalent)
4 Memory (AFP5209)
(M27C2001−150F1 or equivalent)

1.5.4.2 When Creating a ROM With NPST−GR Software and a Commercially

Available ROM Writer
Necessary tools
1 PC
1 PC and NPST−GR software (* section 1.5.1.2)

2 Memory (AFP5209)
(M27C2001−150F1 or equivalent)
4 Commercially available centronics cable or commercially available
RS232C cable
Use a cable that conforms with the specifications of the ROM writer.

Chapter 2
Parts and Its Specifications
2.1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 3
2.1.1 FP3/FP10SH General Specifications 2 − 3
2.1.2 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 3
2.1.3 FP3 Performance Specifications . . . . 2 − 4
2.1.4 FP10SH Performance Specifications 2 − 7
2.2 Backplane for FP3/FP10SH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 10
2.3 Expansion Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 12
2.4 FP3 CPU and Optional Memory . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 14

2.4.1 FP3 CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 14
2.4.2 Memory (EPROM) and Master Memory
(EEPROM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 18
2.5 FP10SH CPU and Optional Memory . . . . . . . 2 − 20

2.5.1 FP10SH CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 20
2.5.2 Expansion Memory Unit . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 29
2.5.3 ROM Operation Board . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 31
2.5.4 IC Memory Card Board . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 35
2.5.5 IC Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 37
2.6 Power Supply Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 42

2.6.1 Power Supply Specifications . . . . . . 2 − 44
2.7 Power Supply Dummy Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 45

2.7.1 Conditions for Using a Power Supply
Dummy Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 46
2.7.2 Installing the Power Supply Dummy
Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 48
next page
2.8 Common Specifications of Input, Output and

I/O Mixed Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 49
2.8.1 Table of Input Unit Types . . . . . . . . . 2 − 50
2.8.2 Table of Output Unit Types . . . . . . . . 2 − 50
2.8.3 Table of I/O Mixed Unit Types . . . . . 2 − 51
2.9 Input Units Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 52

2.9.1 16-point Type DC Input Unit . . . . . . . 2 − 52
2.9.2 32-point Type DC Input Units . . . . . . 2 − 54
2.9.3 64-point Type DC Input Units . . . . . . 2 − 57
2.9.4 64-point/High−speed Response Type
DC Input Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 61
2.9.5 8-point Type AC Input Units . . . . . . . 2 − 64
2.9.6 16-point Type AC Input Units . . . . . . 2 − 66
2.10 Output Units Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 68

2.10.1 16-point Type Relay Output Units . . 2 − 68
2.10.2 16-point Type Output Unit−Transistor
NPN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 70
NPN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 72
NPN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 74
PNP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 76
2.10.6 32-point type Output Unit−Transistor
PNP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 78
PNP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 80
2.10.8 16-point Type Triac Output Unit . . . . 2 − 82
2.11 I/O Mixed Units Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 84

2.11.1 64−point Type I/O Mixed Unit−DC
Input/Transistor NPN . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 84
Input/Transistor PNP . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 88
Input/Relay Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 92

2.1 Specifications
2.1 Specifications
2.1.1 FP3/FP10SH General Specifications
Item Descriptions
Ambient temperature 0 to 55 °C/32 to 131 °F
Storage temperature −20 to +70 °C/−4 to +158 °F
Ambient humidity 30 to 85 % RH (non-condensing)
Storage humidity 30 to 85 % RH (non-condensing)
Breakdown voltage 1,500 V AC for 1 minute between AC external terminal and
frame ground terminal
500 V AC for 1 minute between DC external terminal and
frame ground terminal
Insulation resistance 100 MΩ or more (measured with a 500 V DC megger testing)
between external terminal and frame ground terminal
Vibration resistance 10 to 55 Hz, 1 cycle/min: double amplitude of 0.75 mm/
0.030 in., 10 min on 3 axes
Shock resistance 98 m/s2 or more, 4 times on 3 axes
Noise immunity 1,500 Vp-p with pulse widths 50 ns and 1 μs
(based on in-house measurements)
Operating conditions Free from corrosive gases and excessive dust
2.1.2 Dimensions
Master backplane Expansion backplane
A A
B
B
150/5.906
100/3.937
150/5.906
100/3.937
120/4.724
120/4.724
(unit: mm/in.) (unit: mm/in.)
Type A (mm/in.): Overall length B (mm/in.): Mounting hole pitch

3-slot type 260/10.236 245/9.646
5-slot type 330/12.992 315/12.402
8-slot type 435/17.126 420/16.535

2.1 Specifications
2.1.3 FP3 Performance Specifications
Item Descriptions
Order number AFP3210C−F AFP3211C−F AFP3220C−F
Program method relay symbol
Control method cyclic operation
Controll− using one max. 512 points
able I/O backplane
points using master max. 1,536 points
and two
expansion
backplanes
using remote max. 2,048 points
I/O system
Program built-in RAM
memory
e oy memory
optional EPROM/EEPROM
memory
Program capacity max. 9,727 steps max. 15,871 steps
(* Note 1)
Number of basic 83 types
instruc−
tions high-level 237 types 241 types 241 types
Operation basic from 0.5 μs per instruction
speed instructions
(typical high−level varies from 10 μs to 100 μs
value) instructions
Relays external input 2,048 points
relays (X)
external 2,048 points
output relays
(Y)
(* Note 2)
internal relays 1,568 points
(R)
(* Note 3)
timer/counter total 256 points
(C) (The numbers of timer (T) and counter (C) can be changed.)
(* Note 3) down type ON-delay timer: 0.01 to 327.67 s, 0.1 to 3276.7 s or
1 to 32767 s
down type preset counter: 1 to 32,767 counts
link relays (L) 1,024 points × 2 roots (2 PC links)
(* Note 2, 3)
next page

2.1 Specifications
Item Descriptions
Memory data registers 2,048 words
areas (DT)
(* Note 3)
File registers 0 to 8,192 words 8,192 to 22,525
(FL) words
(* Note 1, 3)
link data 128 words × 2 roots (2 PC links)
registers (LD)
(* Note 3, 4)
timer/counter 256 words
set value area
(SV)
elapsed value
area (EV)
index 2 words
registers
(IX, IY)
Differential points unlimited number of points
(DF and DF/)
Auxiliary timer unlimited number of points, down type timer (0.01 to 327.67 s)
Master control relay 64 points
points (MCR)
Number of labels 256 labels
(JP and LOOP)
Number of step ladder 1,000 stages
(* Note 3)
Number of subroutine 100 subroutines
Number of interrupt 25 programs
program
Comment input function not available available not available
(* Note 5)
Sampling trace function not available available available
(* Note 6)
Clock/calendar function year, month, day, hour, minute, second and day of week
Link functions PC link, computer link, data transfer, remote programming and
MODEM capability
Self-diagnostic function watching dog timer, memory malfunction detection, I/O
malfunction detection, backup battery malfunction detection,
program syntax check, etc.
Other functions program edition during RUN (* Note 7), forced ON/OFF, interrupt
input, test run, constant scan and machine language program
option
Memory backup time AFP3210C−F : min. 17,000 hours
(lithium battery storage (typical value : approx. 34,000 hours)
time)
AFP3211C−F, AFP3220C−F : min. 10,000 hours
(typical value : approx. 22,000
hours)
next page

2.1 Specifications
Notes
(*1): The capacity will differ depending on the system register
settings.
(*2): Can also be used as an internal relay.
(*3): Hold or non−hold type can be set.
(*4): Can also be used as a data register.
(*5): Max. 2,730 points. Up to 12 characters per 1 comment.
(*6): Can perform sampling up to a maximum of 1,000
samples (4,000 words) for data of 16 contacts and 3
words.
(*7): During the ladder symbol input of NPST−GR, program
edits during RUN cannot be performed.

2.1 Specifications
2.1.4 FP10SH Performance Specifications
Item Descriptions
Order number AFP6221V3 AFP6211V3
Controll−a using one max. 512 points
ble I/O backplane
and three
expansion
backplanes
I/O system
memory
e oy memory
Optional IC memory card (* Note 4) or EPROM/FROM (* Note 5)
memory
Program capacity approx. 30 k steps (Approx. 60 k or 120 k steps available by
installing optional expansion memory.)
instruc−
tions high-level 431 types
Operation basic from 40 ns per instruction from 100 ns per instruction
speed instructions
(typical high−level from 80 ns per instruction from 200 ns per instruction
value) instructions
relays (X)
output relays
(Y) (* Note 1)
(R)
(* Note 2)
timer/counter total 3,072 points
(* Note 2) (TM number of timer (T) and counter (C) can be changed.)
− down type ON-delay timer: 0.001 to 32.767 s, 0.01 to 327.67 s,
0.1 to 3276.7 s or 1 to 32,767 s
− down type preset counter: 1 to 32,767 counts
link relays (L) 10,240 points
(* Note 1, 2)
pulse relays 2,048 points
(P)
(* Note 1, 2)
alarm relays 2,048 points
(E)
(* Note 1, 2)
next page

2.1 Specifications
Item Descriptions
areas (DT) (* Note 2)
file registers 32,765 words
(FL) (* Note 2)
link data 8,448 words
registers (LD)
(* Note 2, 3)
timer/counter 3,072 words
set value area
(SV)
elapsed value
area (EV)
index 14 words (I0 to ID) (with bank switching, 224 words portions can
registers be used)
(I)
(DF and DF/)
Master control relay 256 points (when using the 90 k step expansion memory, up to a
points (MCR) total of 512 points can be used for the no. 1 and 2 programs)
Number of labels 256 points (when using the 90 k step expansion memory, up to a
(JP and LOOP) total of 512 points can be used for the no. 1 and 2 programs)
Number of step ladder 1,000 steps (can only be used for the no. 1 program)
(* Note 2)
Number of subroutine 100 subroutines (can only be used for the no. 1 program)
Number of interrupt 25 program (can only be used for the no. 1 program)
program
Comment input function available (either the IC memory card board or ROM operation
board are required)
Sampling trace function max. 1,000 samples (16 contacts and 3 words/sample)
MODEM capability
Self-diagnostic function watching dog timer, memory malfunction detection, I/O malfunction
detection, backup battery malfunction detection, program syntax
check, etc.
Other functions program edition during RUN, forced ON/OFF, interrupt input, test
run and constant scan
Memory CPU only min. 4,800 hours min. 9,500 hours
backup (typical : approx. 29,000 hours) (typical : approx. 57,000 hours)
time
(lithium when used min. 4,300 hours (* Note 6) min. 7,600 hours (* Note 6)
battery expansion (typical : approx. 25,000 hours) (typical : approx. 44,000 hours)
storage memory
time)
next page

2.1 Specifications
Notes
(*4): In addition to the IC memory card, the IC memory card
board (AFP6209A) is required.
(*5): In addition to the ROM, the ROM operation board
(AFP6208) is required.
(*6): The value when the 90 k steps type expansion memory
board (AFP6205) is used.

2.2 Backplane for FP3/FP10SH

Master backplane
Illustration: 8−slot type
1 2 3 4 5 1
7 6
Expansion backplane
Illustration: 8−slot type
1 8 2 3 5 1
9 7 6
Parts Terminology and Functions

1 Backplane mounting holes
for mounting the backplane to the control panel. Use M5 screw for the mounting.
2 Connector for expansion cable (OUT)
for more details regarding the cable connecting, refer to section 4.1.3.
3 Connector for power supply unit
4 Connector for CPU
5 Unit installation holes
for installing the unit to the backplane. Use the screw supplied with the unit for
installation.
next page

6 Connector for various units

Use the supplied covers to cover the slots where no unit is attached.
7 Unit guide holes
Align the tab on the unit with this hole when installing the unit to the backplane.
8 Board number set switch
set the board number for the expansion backplane.
The I/O address will be allocated in the order of the board number (* section
4.1.1.1).
9 Connector for expansion cable (IN)
connect an expansion cable when using an expansion backplane. When not
using one, do not remove the covers on the connectors.
Type of Backplane
Type Number Order number Weight
of slot
Master 3-slot type 3 AFP3505−F approx. 700 g/24.692 oz.
backplane
5-slot type 5 AFP3501−F approx. 900 g/31.747 oz.
8-slot type 8 AFP3502−F approx. 1,200 g/42.329 oz.
Expansion 3-slot type 3 AFP3506−F approx. 700 g/24.692 oz.
backplane
5-slot type 5 AFP3503−F approx. 900 g/31.747 oz.
8-slot type 8 AFP3504−F approx. 1,200 g/42.329 oz.

2.3 Expansion Cable
2.3 Expansion Cable

Dimensions
11.5/4.53 32/12.60 32/12.60 11.5/4.53
40/15.75
48.7/19.17
(unit: mm/in.)
Length
Type of Expansion Cable

Length Order number Weight
0.5 m/1.6 ft. AFP3510 approx. 110 g/3.880 oz.
1 m/3.3 ft. AFP3511 approx. 170 g/5.996 oz.
3 m/9.8 ft. AFP3513 approx. 370 g/13.051 oz.
10 m/32.8 ft. AFP35110 approx. 1,100 g/38.802 oz.
Limitation on expansion
Be aware that the usable expansion cables will differ depending on the type of CPU
being used.
FP3
Up to two expansion backplanes can be added.
The use of expansion cable is limited as shown below.
Master Expansion Expansion

backplane backplane backplane
between backplanes: max. 25 m/82.02 ft.

total length: 40 m/131.2 ft.

2.3 Expansion Cable
FP10SH
Up to three expansion backplanes can be added.
The expansion cable of length “25 m/82.0 ft.” cannot be used.
The use of expansion cable is limited as shown below in the standard
setting (at the time of shipment).


To further extend the distance between backplanes, set system register

444 to “K1: long mode.”



2.4 FP3 CPU and Optional Memory
2.4.1 FP3 CPU
5 6
1 2
7
4

1 Status indicator LEDs
display the operating condition and error statuses (* section 2.4.1.1).
2 Initialize/test switch
is used to clear the errors, initializes the operation memory and set the test
operation mode (* section 2.4.1.2).
3 Mode selector
is used to change the operation mode (* section 2.4.1.3).
4 Backup battery
for backup of the internal memory (RAM). Not connected when the instrument is
delivered.
5 Memory protect and baud rate selector
is used to select the writing operation for the program memory and to set the
baud rate for the tool port.
Switch Item Switch position

number ON OFF
1 Program memory protection switch Write protected Write enabled
2 Baud rate selector for tool port 9600 bps 19200 bps
next page

6 Memory selector
selects either the RAM or the ROM as the program memory.
RAM ROM
7 Device (ROM type) selector

switches the type of ROM being used between EPROM (memory) and EEPROM
(master memory).
The device (ROM type) selector is only on Ver. 4.4 or later FP3 CPU.
EPROM EEPROM
8 Optional ROM sockets

is used to install an optional EPROM or EEPROM memory. The upper socket is
for even−numbered address ROM (EVEN) and the lower socket is for the
odd−numbered address ROM (ODD).
9 Tool port (RS422)
is used to connect a programming tool.
Weight
Type Weight
FP3 CPU approx. 350 g/12.346 oz.

Initialize/test switch
Status indicator LEDs
Mode selector
2.4.1.1 Status Indicator LEDs
These LEDs display the current mode of operation or the occurrence of error.
LED Description
RUN (green) This lights in the RUN mode, to indicate that the program is being executed.
It flashes during forced input/output.
PROG. (green) This lights in the PROG. mode. Operation stops while this LED is lighted.
It flashes when waiting for connection of a distributed slave station.
If the memory is initialized, the brightness dims, indicating that initialization
is being executed.
TEST (green) This lights in the test mode.
BREAK (green) This lights in the operation halts at a break during a test run or halts during
the step operation mode for the test run.
ERROR (red) This lights if an error is detected during the self−diagnostic function.
BATT. (red) This lights when the voltage of the backup battery drops below a specific
value.
ALARM (red) This lights if a hardware error occurs, or if operation slows because of the
program, and the watchdog timer is activated.

2.4.1.2 Initialize/Test Switch
This switch clears errors, initializes the memory, and sets the test operation mode.
The setting of mode selector is relevant when initializing the CPU memory.
Switch position Operation mode
INITIALIZE In the PROG. mode:
(upward) The contents of the operation memory are initialized. However, the system
register (including the I/O map) and the program are not initialized. If a
self−diagnostic error code of 42 or lower is occured, the special internal
relays R9000 to R9008 and the special data register DT9000 are not
cleared.
In the RUN mode:
Operation errors, remote I/O system errors, and battery errors are
cleared.
(center) The switch should normally be left in this position.
TEST Setting this switch to the downward position in the PROG. mode,
(downward) accesses the test mode. Switching to the RUN mode in this state, initiates
test operation.
To return from the test mode to the normal operation, return this switch to
the center position in the PROG. mode.
2.4.1.3 Mode Selector
Use the mode selector to start and stop the operation of the FP3 CPU. For test
operations, set the initialize/test switch to TEST position.
Selector position Operation mode
RUN (upward) This sets the RUN mode. The program is executed, and operation begins.
REMOTE This enables operation to be started and stopped from a programming
(center) tool. At the stage where the selector is changed, when switching from the
PROG. to the REMOTE mode, the system remains in the PROG. mode,
and when switching from the RUN to the REMOTE mode, it remains in the
RUN mode.
PROG. This sets the PROG. mode. In this mode, programming can be done using
(downward) tools, the test mode can be accessed, and the operation memory can be
initialized using the Initialize/tset switch.

2.4.2 Memory (EPROM) and Master Memory (EEPROM)
The FP3 can be operated using only the installed built−in RAM, but use of commercially
available EPROM/EEPROM is also possible if necessary.
The memory (EPROM) should be used for program storage and ROM operation, and
the master memory (EEPROM) should be used for copying and transferring programs.
(EEPROM is supported by Ver. 4.4 or later FP3 CPU.)
With the FP3, two memories are used as a pair, an even−numbered address ROM
(EVEN) and an odd−numbered address ROM (ODD).
Type of FP3 optional memories

Type Memory (EPROM) Master memory (EEPROM)
Using I.C. M5M27C256AK−12 or equivalent µPD28C256CZ−20 or equivalent
Order number AFP5202 (2 pieces in a set) AFP5206 (for 16 k steps)
(2 pieces in a set)
Writing method Commercially available ROM You can write program to EEPROM
programmer installing it on the CPU.
(A ROM programmer is not
required.)
Use Suitable for program storage or Suitable for copying and
ROM operation. transmitting the master program
(I/O comments are not written to
ROM)
Contents written to ROM

The contents of program and system registers are written to the memory or master
memory. Consequently, when the ROM is operated, the contents of the program are
rewritten at the same time as those of the system registers.
Be aware that the contents of operation memories such as internal relays and data
registers are not written to the memory or mastaer memory.

Notes
When installing or removing the EPROM or EEPROM, always
make sure the power supply to the CPU has been turned OFF
first.
Set the device (ROM type) selector to either “EPROM” or
“EEPROM”, depending on which type of ROM is being used.
Carefully adjust the pitch of the memory IC leads to the width
of the leads for the IC socket and securely insert the optional
memories in the correct direction for the grooves.
EVEN
EPROM or EEPROM
(28 pins)
Device (ROM type) selector
EPROM EEPROM
ODD
EPROM or EEPROM
(28 pins)
Cover with a masking sheet.
Lock after inserting the ROM

Lock release Lock
With the FP3, two memories are used as a pair, an

even−numbered ROM (EVEN) and an odd−numbered ROM
(ODD). When installing the ROM, check carefully to make sure
it is installed facing the correct direction.
When removing the ROM from the IC socket, use of an IC
EXTRACTOR is recommended. Note that the surface of the IC
socket might be damaged by using a screwdriver.
Always attach the masking sheet to cover the window on the
memory (EPROM). If the masking sheet is not attached,
flashes and other light sources may cause misoperation.
Masking sheet
Always make sure the divice (ROM type) selector matches the
type of memory. If the wrong setting is entered, runaway
operation or malfunction could occur.
The device (ROM type) selsctor should be set with the power
supply turned OFF. The setting changes as soon as the power
supply is turned ON.

2.5 FP10SH CPU and Optional Memory
2.5.1 FP10SH CPU
1 2
5
1 Status indicator LEDs

display the operating condition and error statuses (* section 2.5.1.1).
2 Initialize/test switch
is used to clear the errors, initializes the operation memory and set the test
operation mode (* section 2.5.1.2).
3 Mode selector
is used to change the operation mode (* section 2.5.1.3).
4 Operation condition switches
are used to set the baud rate of the programming tool, to select the program
memory, to select the writing operation for the program memory, and to set the
transmission format for the COM port (* section 2.5.1.4).
5 Station number setting switches
are used to set the station numbers (UNIT No.) for the computer link function of
the tool port and the COM port (* section 2.5.1.5).
6 Backup battery
for backup of the internal memory (RAM). Not connected when the instrument is
delivered.
next page

7 Tool port (RS232C)

is used to connect a programming tool.
8 Option slot
is used when installing an optional IC memory card board or a ROM operation
board.
9 COM port (RS232C)
is used to connect a computer or other devices with RS232C port (* section
2.5.1.6).
Weight
Type Weight
FP10SH CPU approx. 350 g/12.346 oz.
Expansion approx. 30 g/1.058 oz.
memory unit
IC memory card approx. 60 g/2.116 oz.
board
ROM operation approx. 35 g/1.235 oz.
board

Initialize/test switch
Status indicator LEDs
Mode selector
2.5.1.1 Status Indicator LEDs
These LEDs display the current mode of operation or the occurrence of error.
LED Description
RUN (green) This lights in the RUN mode, to indicate that the program is being executed.
It flashes during forced input/output.
PROG. (green) This lights in the PROG. mode. Operation stops while this LED is lighted.
It flashes when waiting for connection of a distributed slave station.
If the memory is initialized, the brightness dims, indicating that initialization
is being executed.
TEST (green) This lights in the test mode.
BREAK (green) This lights in the operation halts at a break during a test run or halts during
the step operation mode for the test run.
ERROR (red) This lights if an error is detected during the self−diagnostic function.
BATT. (red) This lights when the voltage of the backup battery drops below a specific
value.
ALARM (red) This lights if a hardware error occurs, or if operation slows because of the
program, and the watchdog timer is activated.

2.5.1.2 Initialize/Test Switch
This switch clears errors, initializes the memory, and sets the test operation mode.
The setting of mode selector is relevant when initializing the CPU memory.
Switch position Operation mode
INITIALIZE In the PROG. mode:
(upward) The contents of the operation memory are initialized. However, the system
register (including the I/O map) and the program are not initialized. If a
self−diagnostic error code of 42 or lower is occured, the special internal
relays R9000 to R9008 and the special data register DT90000 are not
cleared.
In the RUN mode:
Operation errors, remote I/O system errors, and battery errors are
cleared.
(center) The switch should normally be left in this position.
TEST Setting this switch to the downward position in the PROG. mode,
(downward) accesses the test mode. Switching to the RUN mode in this state, initiates
test operation.
To return from the test mode to the normal operation, return this switch to
the center position in the PROG. mode.
Note
With FP10SH CPU, by turning ON the Initialize/test switch while
in the PROG. mode, you can specify the type of operation
memory to be cleared with system register 4.
2.5.1.3 Mode Selector
Use the mode selector to start and stop the operation of the FP10SH CPU. For test
operations, set the initialize/test switch to TEST position.
Selector position Operation mode
RUN (upward) This sets the RUN mode. The program is executed, and operation begins.
REMOTE This enables operation to be started and stopped from a programming
(center) tool. At the stage where the selector is changed, when switching from the
PROG. to the REMOTE mode, the system remains in the PROG. mode,
and when switching from the RUN to the REMOTE mode, it remains in the
RUN mode.
PROG. This sets the PROG. mode. In this mode, programming can be done using
(downward) tools, the test mode can be accessed, and the operation memory can be
initialized using the Initialize/tset switch.

2.5.1.4 Operation Condition Switches
Each switch has the function shown below assigned to it.
Upper switches
Lower switches
Upper switches
Switches 1 through 8: Communication format settings for the COM port.
The settings written with bold characters are the default settings.
Settings
Functions
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8
COM MODEM Disabled OFF
port control
settings
g (* Note 1) Enabled ON
Header STX (H02) invalid OFF

(* Note
N 2,
2 3) STX (H02) valid ON
Terminator None OFF OFF
(* Note
N 2) CR (H0D) + LF (H0A) ON OFF
CR (H0D) OFF ON
ETX (H03) ON ON
Stop
p bit 2 bits OFF
1 bit ON
Parity
y check Invalid OFF OFF
Even parity ON OFF
Odd parity ON ON
Character 7 bits OFF
l
length
h 8 bits ON
Notes
(*1): MODEMs available for FP10SH CPU are Hays AT
command compatible types for public line use.
(*2): These functions are used for COM port’s serial data
communication with a field device. In order to use this,
set the system register 412 to K2 (serial data commu
nication mode) and control the communications using
the F144 (TRNS)/P144 (PTRNS) instructions.
(*3): Header is used to express the start of the communication
frame. If header setting in the valid mode, CPU handle a
series of data from STX header to terminator as a frame.

Lower switches
Switches 1 through 3: Transmission speed (baud rate) and communication
format settings for the programming tool (Tool port).
Switch 4: Set this switch to ON to disable writing to the program
memory.
Switch 5: Use this switch to set whether to use the internal RAM or
optional memory as the program memory.
When selecting optional memory after installing an IC
memory card, the program file named AUTOEXEC in the
IC memory card is automatically loaded into the internal
RAM.
Switches 6 through 8: Transmission speed (baud rate) settings for the COM port
The settings written with bold characters are the default settings.
Settings
Functions
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8
TOOL Transmission 19,200 bps (*Note 2) OFF
port speed
settings
g (baud rate) 9,600 bps ON
Data length
g 7 bits OFF
8 bits ON
MODEM Disabled OFF
control
(* Note 1) Enabled ON
Memory Program Write enabled OFF

settings memory
protection Write protected ON
Program
g CPU internal RAM OFF
memory Using optional ON
selection memory
COM Transmission 115,200 bps OFF OFF OFF
port speed
d 57,600 bps ON OFF OFF
settings (baud rate)
38,400 bps OFF ON OFF
19,200 bps ON ON OFF
9,600 bps OFF OFF ON
4,800 bps ON OFF ON
2,400 bps OFF ON ON
1,200 bps ON ON ON
Notes
(*1): MODEMs available for FP10SH CPU are Hays AT
command compatible types for public line use.
(*2): Can be changed with the settings in system register
414.

2.5.1.5 Station Number Setting Switches
Set the station number for the unit when using the computer link functions with the tool
port and COM port of the CPU.
Be sure to set a station number in the range of 01 to 32.
Upper: for tool port
Lower: for COM port
First Second
digit digit
UNIT No.
First Second
digit digit
2.5.1.6 COM Port (RS232C)

Pin alignment
Pin Signal
g name Signal direction
number FP10SH−Field device
1 Frame ground FG
2 Send data SD →
5 3 Received data RD ←
9 4
8 3 4 Request to send RS →
7 2
6 5 Clear to send CS ←
1
6 Not used −
7 Signal ground terminal SG
8 Not used −
9 Equipment ready (always →
ER
ON)
next page

Communication specifications
The transmission speed and communication format are decided by the operation
condition switches on the CPU (* section 2.5.1.4). The table below indicates the default
settings.
Item Description
Transmission speed (baud rate) 9,600 bps
Character bit 8 bits
Parity check Odd parity
Start bit 1 bit
Stop bit 1 bit
Header STX invalid
Terminator CR
In the computer link, header and terminator are decided by the MEWTOCOL-COM
format.
These settings are used for serial data communication with a field device. In order to
use this, set the system register 412 to K2 (serial data communication mode) and
control the communication with the F144 (TRNS)/P144 (PTRNS) instructions.
The serial data communication instructions F144 (TRNS)/P144 (PTRNS) cannot be
executed unless pin number 5 (CS) of COM port (RS232C) is turned ON.
Connection cable examples
Example 1: Connected to a computer (9-pin)
FP10SH COM port Computer
Pin no. Abbreviation Pin no. Abbreviation
1 FG 1 CD (DCD)
2 SD 2 RD (RXD)
3 RD 3 SD (TXD)
4 RS 4 ER (DTR)
5 CS 5 SG
6 − 6 DR (DSR)
7 SG 7 RS (RTS)
8 − 8 CS (CTS)
9 ER 9 RI (CI)
Example 2: Connected to a computer (25-pin)

FP10SH COM port Computer
1 FG 1 FG
2 SD 2 SD (TXD)
3 RD 3 RD (RXD)
4 RS 4 RS (RTS)
5 CS 5 CS (CTS)
6 − 6 DR (DSR)
7 SG 7 SG
8 − 8 CD (DCD)
9 ER 20 ER (DTR)

Example 3: Connected to a I.O.P. D series (9-pin)

FP10SH COM port I.O.P. D series
1 FG 1 −
2 SD 2 SD
3 RD 3 RD
4 RS 4 RS
5 CS 5 CS
6 − 6 −
7 SG 7 SG
8 − 8 −
9 ER 9 −

2.5.2 Expansion Memory Unit
The expansion memory unit is installed in the FP10SH CPU.

The expansion memory unit enables FP10SH to expand program memory up to
60 k or 120 k steps using two following types:
Type Order number Weight
30 k steps type AFP6204 approx.
pp 30 g/1.058
g/ oz.
90 k steps type AFP6205
Note
When installing and removing an expansion memory unit, the
contents of built−in RAM of CPU may be destroyed. Be sure to
make backup of program stored in the built−in RAM of CPU before
installing and removing an expansion memory unit. And, if you
need, re-transfer the program to the CPU using NPST−GR software,
after installation.
Installing the expansion memory unit

Procedure:
1. Remove the side cover of the FP10SH CPU with a
flat-head screwdriver.
Side cover Flat-head
screwdriver
next page

2. Loosen the screw in the FP10SH CPU.
Screw
FP10SH
CPU
3. Properly connect the expansion memory unit to the

CPU’s connector. Then, secure the fixing screw.
Screw
Expansion memory unit
Connectors
Notes
Be sure to turn OFF the power before installing and removing
the expansion memory unit.
Never touch the ICs or connectors when handling the
expansion memory unit.

2.5.3 ROM Operation Board
The FP10SH can be operated using only the installed built−in RAM, but use of
commercially available EPROM/FROM is also possible if necessary.
The ROM operation board is necessary for ROM operation.
Memory (EPROM) and Master Memory (FROM)
Attach to the ROM operation board for operation.

The memory (EPROM) should be used for program storage and ROM operation, and
the master memory (FROM) should be used for copying and transferring programs.
CPU Ver. 2 or later is required to use the memory.
Type of FP10SH optional memories

Type Memory (EPROM) Master memory (FROM)
Using I.C. M27C2001−150F1 or equivalent SST−29EE020−150−4C−PH or
equivalent
Order number AFP5209 AFP5208
Writing method Commercially available ROM You can write program to FROM
programmer installing it on the CPU.
Use Suitable for program storage or Suitable for copying and transmitting
ROM operation the master program
Note
The I/O comments are written to the internal memory of the ROM
operation board.
Comments written to ROM

The program, system register, and initial settings (memory contents and user selections
for DT and other settings) are written to the memory (EPROM) or master memory
(FROM). Therefore, for ROM operation, be aware that the program contents and data
register (operation data) contents are simultaneously rewritten.
The comments (line comments, comment statements, and I/O comments) are stored
in the internal memory of the ROM operation board.

ROM Operation Board
The ROM operation board is for installing the optional memory (ROM). Install the
memory (EPROM) and master memory (FROM) onto the board and insert the board into
the CPU.
Item Description
Order number AFP6208
Weight approx. 35 g/1.235 oz.
Notes
When installing the optional memory (EPROM or FROM) to the
ROM operation board, carefully adjust the pitch of the memory
IC leads to the width of the leads for the IC socket and
securely insert the ICs in the correct orientation (with the
grooves facing in the correct direction). After inserting the
optional memory, securely lock it into place.
Memory (EPROM) or Master memory (FROM)
ROM operation board (AFP6208)
Lock after inserting the ROM IC socket.

Lock
Lock
release
When removing the ROM from the IC socket, first unlock it

from the socket.
Always attach a masking sheet to cover the window of the
memory (EPROM). If the masking sheet is not attached,
flashes and other light sources may cause misoperation.
Masking sheet

Installing the ROM operation board

When installing the ROM operation board, first remove the FP10SH CPU from its
backplane.
Procedure:
1. Place the CPU down flat on a surface and insert the
ROM operation board into the CPU along the guides
provided. At this time, make sure that the hook on the
bottom of the CPU used for attaching the unit to the
backplane is located off the table you are working on.
ROM operation
board
Insert
FP10SH CPU
2. Align the ROM operation board with its connector on

the bottom of the CPU. To make sure that the board is
properly attached, confirm it visually by looking
through the holes on the side of the CPU. If the board
is inserted while not aligned with the connector, the
pins of the board may become bent.
Verify proper connection
next page

3. Firmly press on the ROM operation board from above

and insert it into its connector. Firmly insert the
board until its upper frame is caught on the hooks of
the CPU (continue pushing until a catching sound is
heard).
Hooks
4. To remove the board, unhook the hook by hand,

insert a screwdriver into the hole provided and pry
the board upwards.
ROM operation
board
Remove
Pry upwards
FP10SH CPU

2.5.4 IC Memory Card Board
In order to install the IC memory card in the FP10SH CPU, the IC memory card board
is required.
Item Description
Order number AFP6209A
Weight approx. 60 g/2.116 oz.
1 IC memory card access LED

1
Illuminates when data is being read
2 from or written to the IC memory card.
3 When lit Accessing
When not lit Not accessing
2 IC memory card access enable
IC memory switch
card board Use to enable reading from and writing
to the IC memory card.
ON Read and write enable
OFF Read and write disable
3 IC memory card eject button

Use to remove the IC memory card.
Installing the IC memory card board
When installing the IC memory card board, first remove the FP10SH CPU from its
backplane.
Procedure:
1. Place the CPU down flat on a surface and insert the
IC memory card board into the CPU along the guides
provided.
At this time, make sure that the hook on the bottom
of the CPU used for attaching the unit to the
backplane is located off the table you are working on.
IC memory
card board
Insert
next page

2. Align the IC memory card board with its connector on

the bottom of the CPU. To make sure that the board is
properly attached, confirm it visually by looking
through the holes on the side of the CPU. If the board
is inserted while not aligned with the connector, the
pins of the board may become bent.
Verify proper connection
3. Firmly press on the IC memory card board from

above and insert it into its connector. Firmly insert
the board until its upper frame is caught on the
hooks of the CPU (continue pushing until a catching
sound is heard).
Hooks
4. To remove the board, unhook the hook by hand, insert

a screwdriver into the hole provided and pry the board
upwards.
IC memory
card board
Remove
Pry upwards
FP10SH CPU

2.5.5 IC Memory Card
AIC31000 AIC30010
Matsushita Matsushita
Electric Works, Ltd. Electric Works, Ltd.
Made in Japan Made in Japan
The IC memory card can be used for program storage or copies or as expansion
memory for reading and writing data from the program.
The IC memory card can be divided into a MS−DOS format area for storing various
programs and an expansion memory area for data storage.
Example: If a 1 MB card is formatted for 512 KB, then 512 KB can be used for
the MS−DOS format area and the remaining 512 KB can be used for
the expansion memory area.
The card can be used exclusively for program storage or exclusively for data memory
by using the full memory area for the MS−DOS format area or the expansion memory
area.
When the FLASH-EEPROM area is designated as an expansion memory area, then the
card becomes read only.
Usage
Memory Order
Type Program Expansion memory Recommended usage
capacity number
storage area
S-RAM 1 MB AIC31000 Write using the Write using the Because data can be
type NPST-GR “IC F13 (ICWT)/ read or written from the
CARD P13 (PICWT) program, this type is
PROGRAM instruction. ideal for expansion data
MANAGER” Read using memory.
menu. F12 (ICRD)/
P12 (PICRD)
instruction.
FLASH- 1 MB AIC30010 Write using the Becomes read-only Because backup battery
EEPROM NPST-GR “IC memory. is not required, this type
type CARD Read using is ideal for program
PROGRAM F12 (ICRD)/ storage.
MANAGER” P12 (PICRD)
menu. instruction.
next page

Notes
Both the S-RAM type and FLASH-ROM type can also be
divided into MS−DOS format area and expansion memory
area.
When using the IC memory card for program memory, there
are three methods for reading the program:
− Automatic read at power ON.
− Read using the NPST-GR software “IC CARD PROGRAM
MANAGER” menu.
− Read using F14 (PGRD)/P14 (PPGRD) instruction.
Handling the IC memory card

− Avoid subjecting the card to high temperature, high humidity,
and direct sunlight.
− Do not bend or subject to strong impact.
− Do not touch or allow foreign materials to enter the connector part.
− Never throw the card into a fire.
Inserting and removing the IC memory card

The IC memory card can be inserted or removed even when the FP10SH power is ON.
To insert or remove the card when the power is ON, be sure to follow the following
procedure.
Insertion procedure:
1. Set the IC memory card access enable switch to OFF
position.
IC memory card access

enable switch
2. Insert the IC memory card into the slot.
next page

3. Continue pushing the IC memory card until the eject

button pops out.
Eject button
4. Set the IC memory card access enable switch to ON

position.

enable switch
Notes
Do not try to insert the IC memory card while the IC memory
card access enable switch is ON. It could lead to damage of
the memory contents or a malfunction of the CPU.
Do not use excessive force on the IC memory card or slot.
Removal procedure:
position. Verify that the IC memory card access LED
is OFF.
IC memory card access LED
IC memory card access enable switch
2. Push the eject button until the IC memory card

becomes free.
Eject button
next page

3. Pull out the IC memory card.
Notes
Do not try to remove the IC memory card while the IC memory
card access enable switch is ON. It could lead to damage of
the memory contents or a malfunction of the CPU.
Do not use excessive force on the IC memory card or slot.
Battery for S-RAM type IC memory card

The S-RAM type IC memory card is backed up by a battery. Be sure to set the battery
in the card before insertion into the CPU.
Procedure:
1. Use the screwdriver supplied with the IC memory
card to remove the screw on the card side.
2. Set the accessory backup battery. Make sure the
direction of the battery is correct.
3. Attach the cover and screw in place.
Backup
battery
S−RAM type
Cover
IC memory card
Screw
Refer to section 8.1.2 for an explanation of the backup battery life and replacement
method.

IC memory card write protection

There is a write protect switch on the IC memory card. To prohibit writes to the IC
memory card, set this switch to WP position.
IC memory card
Write protect switch
Note
To write the program or data to the IC memory card, set the write
protect switch to protect OFF position.

2.6 Power Supply Units

100/200 V AC type 100/200 V AC type 24 V DC type
(AFP3631) (AFP3638) (AFP3634)
1 1 1
2 2 2
3 3 3
4 4
9 9 9
5 5 5
6 6 6
7
8 8 8

1 POWER LED
Turns ON when power is applied to the unit.
2 Power supply fuse holder
3 Power supply terminal
AC type: This terminal is the terminal for 100 to 240 V AC.
DC type: This terminal is the terminal for 24 V DC.
4 Voltage selecting terminals (for AFP3631 and AFP3638)
When the supply voltage is in the 100 to 120 V AC range, short the terminals with
the supplied jumper.
Check that the terminals are open when the supply voltage is in the 200 to 240 V AC
range.
The terminals are open when shipped from the factory.
5 Line ground terminal
is the terminal for the built−in line filter. To minimize effects from noise and prevent
electrical shocks, ground this terminal together with the frame ground terminal.
6 Frame ground terminal
is connected to a metal portion of the backplane.
To prevent electrical shocks, connect this terminal to ground.
next page

7 Service power terminal (24 V DC) (for AFP3631 only)

Used for the DC power supply (24 V DC) for the I/O units. The capacity will differ
depending on the type of power supply unit. Do not connect this service power
terminal in parallel with the power supply for other commercially available power
supply devices.
8 Alarm output terminal
Contact output terminals of the relay which turns ON when the ALARM LED of the
CPU turns ON. Normally closed contact (N.C.) and normally open contact (N.O.) are
available.
However, this relay operates only when the power supply unit is installed in the
master backplane.
9 Terminal block
is the terminal for power supply wiring. Uses M3.5 crimp terminals
(* section 4.2.1).

2.6.1 Power Supply Specifications
Item AC type DC type

Order number AFP3631 AFP3638 AFP3634
Rated input voltage 100 to 120 V AC or 200 to 240 V AC 24 V DC
(voltage selectable)
Operating voltage range 85 to 132 V AC or 170 to 264 V AC 16.8 to 28.8 V DC
Rated frequency 47 to 63 Hz
Surge current 20 A or less
Current consumption 0.9 A or less 1.3 A or less 1.0 A or less
(at 100 V AC) (at 100 V AC) (at 24 V DC)
0.5 A or less 0.7 A or less
(at 200 V AC) (at 200 V AC)
Rated output 5 V DC 2.4 A 9 A (at ambient 2.4 A
current temperature 45 °C/
(* Note) 113 °F or less)
7A (at ambient
temperature 55 °C/
131 °F or less)
24 V DC 0.8 A
Alarm contact rated 2 A 250 V AC, 2 A 30 V DC 2 A 30 V DC
control capacity
Weight approx. 600 g/21.164 oz. approx. 500 g/
17.637 oz.
Note
The rated output current for 5 V DC indicates the current from the
power supply unit that can be supplied through the backplane to
each unit. The rated output current for 24 V DC indicates the
current from the service power terminal that can be supplied to
the I/O units and other units.
CAUTION (AFP3638 only)

When expanding units, it is necessary to use the same type of
power supply units between basic backplane and expansion
backplane.
When using the D/A converter unit, up to 6 units can be
expanded on one backplane.
(The consumption current of the power supply unit is
temporarily rise when the power is supplied. The system does
not work for excessive current protection if the excessive
current flow.)

2.7 Power Supply Dummy Unit
If the internal current consumption used for the expansion backplanes is small, this
power supply dummy unit can be installed in place of the unnecessary power supply
unit on the expansion backplane.
<Normal setup installation>

The power supply used on each backplane is provided by a power supply unit installed
on that backplane.
Power supply
unit
Master backplane
Power supply
unit
Expansion backplane

<Setup with a power supply dummy unit>

The power supply for the expansion backplane with the power supply dummy unit installed
is provided by the power supply unit on the preceding backplane.
Power supply
Master backplane
unit
(Preceding backplane)
Power supply
dummy unit
Expansion backplane
2.7.1 Conditions for Using a Power Supply Dummy Unit
A power supply dummy unit can be installed on an expansion backplane if the following
conditions are satisfied:
The length of the expansion cable which connects the backplane
installed with a power supply dummy unit and the preceding backplane
must be shorter than 3 m/9.8 ft..
The total value (i1) of the internal current consumption at 5 V DC of the
backplane installed with the power supply dummy unit is less than 1.0 A.
The sum of the total value (i1) of the internal current consumption at 5 V
DC of the backplane installed with the power supply dummy unit and
total value (i0) of the internal current consumption at 5 V DC of the
preceding backplane is less than the rated current value of the power
supply unit.
Note
You cannot use two power supply dummy units in series.

Example 1:
When the power supply dummy unit is installed on the 1st expansion backplane
Master backplane Conditions
i0 + i1 ≦ Rated current value of power
Power supply
i0 supply unit (1)

unit (1)
CPU
i1 ≦ 1 A
L1 L1 ≦ 3 m/9.8 ft.
1st expansion backplane
i0: Total value of internal current
consumption at 5 V DC of the master
Power supply
dummy unit
i1 backplane with the power supply

unit (1).
consumption at 5 V DC of the 1st
2nd expansion backplane
expansion backplane with the power
supply dummy unit.
Power supply
unit (2)
L1: Length of expansion cable between

the master backplane and the 1st
expansion backplane.
Example 2:
When the power supply dummy unit is installed on the 2nd expansion backplane
Master backplane Conditions
∆ i0 + i1 ≦ Rated current value of power
Power supply
unit (1)
supply unit (2)

CPU
∆ i1 ≦ 1 A
∆ L2 ≦ 3 m/9.8 ft.
L1
1st expansion backplane
consumption at 5 V DC of the 1st
Power supply
i0
unit (2)
expansion backplane with the

power supply unit (2).
L2 2nd expansion backplane consumption at 5 V DC of the 2nd
expansion backplane with the
power supply dummy unit.
Power supply
dummy unit
i1
L2: Length of the expansion cable
between the 1st expansion
backplane and the 2nd expansion
backplane .
Note
Refor to section 1.3.3, for detalis about the current consumption
of each unit.

2.7.2 Installing the Power Supply Dummy Unit

Procedure:
1. Align the connector on the rear of the power supply
dummy unit with the power supply connector on the
expansion backplane.
Expansion backplane
Power supply
dummy unit
2. Secure the power supply dummy unit to the

expansion backplane with the installation screws
provided.

2.8 Common Specifications of Input, Output and I/O Mixed Units
2.8 Common Specifications of Input, Output and I/O

Mixed Units
8−point/16−point 32−point 64−point
1 1
1
2
4 5

1 Input and output indicators
Indicate the ON/OFF states of input and output.
2 Terminal fixing screws
The terminal block can be removed by loosening the two screws.
3 Terminal block
Input, output and power supply wiring section for the 8-point and 16-point types.
Uses M3.5 pressure connection terminals (* section 4.2.1).
4 Connectors (32−points type: 20−pin×2, 64−points type: 40−pin×2)
Input, output and power supply wiring section for the 32-point and 64-point types.
You can use either discrete−wire connectors or flat cable connectors (* section 4.4).
5 Selector for input and output indicators
Selects the inputs and output that will be represented by the input and output
indicators. When this selector is set to the up position, the input and output ON/OFF
states for the first 16-point are indicated and when set to the down position, the states
for the last 16-points are indicated.

2.8.1 Table of Input Unit Types
Type Number Connection Description Order number

of points method
DC input 16-point terminal 12 to 24 V DC, sink/source AFP33023−F
type input
32-point connector 12 to 24 V DC, sink/source AFP33024−F
input
5 V DC, sink/source input AFP33014−F
64-point connector 12 to 24 V DC, sink/source AFP33027−F
input
5 V DC, sink/source input AFP33017−F
high-speed response type, 12 AFP33028−F
to 24 V DC, sink/source input
high-speed response type, AFP33068−F
24 V DC, sink/source input
AC input
p 8-point
p terminal 100 to 120 V AC AFP33041
type 200 to 240 V AC AFP33051
16-point
p terminal 100 to 120 V AC AFP33043
200 to 240 V AC AFP33053
2.8.2 Table of Output Unit Types

of points method
Relay
y 16-point
p terminal without relay sockets, 2 A/point AFP33103−F
output type with relay sockets, 2 A/point AFP33203−F
Transistor 16-point terminal 5 to 24 V DC, 0.5 A AFP33483−F
(NPN open 32-point connector 5 to 24 V DC, 0.1 A AFP33484−F
collector)
output type 64-point 5 to 24 V DC, 0.1 A AFP33487−F
Transistor 16-point terminal 5 to 24 V DC, 0.1 A AFP33583−F
(PNP open 32-point connector 5 to 24 V DC, 0.1 A AFP33584−F
collector)
output type 64-point 5 to 24 V DC, 0.1 A AFP33587−F
Triac output 16-point terminal 100 to 240 V AC, 0.5 A/point AFP33703
type
Note
The maximum load current for the transistor output type output
unit will differ depending on the voltage used.
Refer to the specifications pages for each unit.

2.8.3 Table of I/O Mixed Unit Types

of points method
DC input/ 16-point terminal Input: 12 to 24 V DC, AFP33223−F
Relay I: 8 sink/source input
output type O: 8 Output: 2 A, with relay sockets
DC input/ 64-point connector Input: 12 to 24 V DC, AFP33428−F
Transistor I: 32 sink/source input
(NPN open O: 32 Output: 5 to 24 V DC, 0.1 A
collector)
output type
DC input/ 64-point connector Input: 12 to 24 V DC, AFP33528−F
Transistor I: 32 sink/source input
(PNP open O: 32 Output: 5 to 24 V DC, 0.1 A
collector)
output type

2.9 Input Units Specifications
2.9.1 16-point Type DC Input Unit
2.9.1.1 Specifications
Item Description
Order number AFP33023−F
Rated input voltage 12 to 24 V DC
Rated input current approx. 8 mA (at 24 V DC)
Input impedance approx. 3 k Ω
Input voltage range 10.2 to 26.4 V DC
(max. input current: 10 mA or less)
Min. ON voltage/ 9.6 V/4 mA
Min. ON current
Max. OFF voltage/ 2.5 V/1 mA
Max. OFF current
Response
p OFF → ON 1.5 ms or less
time
i ON → OFF 2.0 ms or less
Internal current 60 mA or less
consumption (at 5 V DC)
Input points per common 8 points/common
Either the positive or negative of the input power supply can
be connected to COM (common) terminal.
Connection method terminal block (M 3.5 screw)
Weight approx. 300 g/10.582 oz

2.9.1.2 Internal Circuit Diagram
AFP33023−F
Input
indicator
LED
Input 1.5 kΩ
Internal circuit
12 to
0.1 µF 1 kΩ
24 V DC
COM 1.5 kΩ
2.9.1.3 Pin Layout of Terminal Block
AFP33023−F
12 to
24 V DC 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
COM
(+, −)
8
12 to A
9
24 V DC C
B
E
F
COM
(+, −)
Σ
Σ
Note
For more information regarding the applicable pressure
connection (crimp) terminals and wiring, refer to section 4.5.

2.9.2 32-point Type DC Input Units
Item Description
Order number AFP33024−F AFP33014−F
Rated input voltage 12 to 24 V DC 5 V DC
Rated input current approx. 8 mA (at 24 V DC) approx. 4.2 mA (at 5 V DC)
Input impedance approx. 3 k Ω approx. 1.2 k Ω
Input voltage range 10.2 to 26.4 V DC 4.25 to 5.5 V DC
Min. ON voltage/ 9.6 V/4 mA 3.5 V/3 mA
Min. ON current
Max. OFF voltage/ 2.5 V/1 mA 1.5 V/1 mA
Max. OFF current
Response
time
Connection method two 20-pin connectors
When an AFP33024−F is used, keep the rate of input points per common which are
simultaneously ON within the following range as determined by the ambient
temperature.
at 24 V DC
Rate of input points
per common which at 26.4 V DC
are simultaneous
ON (%)
35/ 50/ 55/

95 122 131
Ambient temperature (°C/°F)

AFP33024−F
Input
indicator
Input 1.5 kΩ LED
Internal circuit
12 to
24 V DC 0.1 µF 820 Ω
COM 1.5 kΩ
AFP33014−F
Input
indicator
Input 560 Ω
LED
Internal circuit
5 V DC 0.1 µF
1.5 kΩ
COM 560 Ω

2.9.2.3 Pin Layout of Connector
Pin layout of first 16 points
12 to 24 V DC
(AFP33024−F)
or
5 V DC
(AFP33014−F)
II I
Pin layout of last 16 points
12 to 24 V DC
(AFP33024−F)
or
5 V DC
(AFP33014−F)
IV III
Notes
COM terminals for I and II are internally connected.
COM terminals for III and IV are internally connected.
For more information regarding the applicable connectors and
terminals, refer to section 4.4.

2.9.3 64-point Type DC Input Units
Item Description
Rated input current approx. 6.2 mA (at 24 V DC) approx. 4.2 mA (at 5 V DC)
Input impedance approx. 3.9 k Ω approx. 1.2 k Ω
Min. ON current
Max. OFF current
Response
time
AFP33017−F/AFP33027−F
Input
12 to 3.9 kΩ (AFP33027−F) indicator
COM Switching ON
LED
24 V DC circuit
1.2 kΩ (AFP33017−F)
Internal circuit
(AFP33027−F)
or OFF 1 kΩ (AFP33027−F)
5 V DC 1.5 kΩ (AFP33017−F)
(AFP33017−F)
Input
Internal current consumption
switch (SW1 and SW2)
(* section 2.9.3.4)

Pin layout of first 32 points Pin layout of last 32 points

left side connector right side connector
12 to
24 V DC
(AFP33027−F)
or III
II 5 V DC
(AFP33017−F)
12 to
24 V DC
(AFP33027−F) IV
or
I 5 V DC
(AFP33017−F)
. next page

Notes
2.9.3.4 Internal Current Consumption Switch
The 64-point type input unit has an internal switching circuit using non-contact relays
to limit the current consumption of the internal circuit as shown in the internal circuit
diagram (* section 2.9.3.2).
The internal circuit can be switched using the internal current consumption switches
(SW1 and SW2) on the rear of the unit. The SW1 corresponds to the circuit for the input
connector (I and II) on the left side of the unit, while the SW2 corresponds to the circuit
for the input connector (III and IV) on the right side of the unit.
SW2
SW1
(For input (For input

connector connector
I and II) III and IV)
Rear side
The operation of the circuit differs as follows according to whether the internal current
consumption switch is ON or OFF.
− When this switch is ON
The switching circuit is activated. A voltage with a pulse waveform is applied to
the internal circuit of the 64−point type input unit.
0.5 0.5
ms ms
− When this switch is OFF

The externally supplied voltage is applied as is to the internal circuit of the input
unit. However, compared to when the this switch is ON, the internal current
consumption is large so that, as shown in the graph (* section 2.9.3.5 on next
page), the relative conditions become more severe.

2.9.3.5 Limitations on Number of Simultaneous Input ON Points
Keep the number of input points per common which are simultaneously ON within the
following range as determined by the temperature.
When internal current consumption When either internal current consumption
switch SW1 and SW2 are both OFF switch SW1 or SW2 is ON
(settings at time of shipment from the at 24 V
factory) at 24 V DC
100 100
DC 90 at 26.4 V
at 26.4 V 80 DC
80 DC
Rate of input
70
Rate of input points per
points per common
common which are
which are simultaneous
simultaneous ON (%)
ON (%) 29/84.2 48/118.4 55/131 46/ 52/ 55/
Ambient temperature (_C/_F) 114.8 125.6 131
Ambient temperature (_C/_F)
There is no limit when the internal current consumption switch SW1 and SW2 are both
ON.
There is no limit when using 12 V DC.
2.9.3.6 Notes Regarding the Internal Current Consumption Switch Settings
When using two-wire type sensor or proximity sensors, be sure to turn OFF the internal
current consumption switch corresponding to the circuit connected to the sensor.
When adding an operation verification LED in parallel with the input contact, or
depending on the type of sensor used, there is a danger that the current will leak into
another input circuit and cause erroneous operation. When this happens, either turn
OFF the internal current consumption switch to the problem circuit or insert a diode into
the input circuit (* section 4.3.1.6).
COM
Internal circuit
Operation 64−point type

LED DC input unit
Input Input
contact Insert diode
Note
The dotted line represents reversal of input voltage polarity.

2.9.4 64-point/High−speed Response Type DC Input Units
Item Description
Rated input current approx. 6.2 mA (at 24 V DC) approx. 3.5 mA (at 24 V DC)
Input impedance approx. 3.9 k Ω approx. 6.8 k Ω
Min. ON current
Max. OFF current
Response
time
AFP33028−F/AFP33068−F
Input
indicator
3.9 kΩ (AFP33028−F)
12 to LED
24 V DC COM 6.8 kΩ (AFP33068−F)
Internal circuit
(AFP33028−F)
or 1 kΩ
24 V DC
(AFP33068−F)
Input


left side connector right side connector
12 to
24 V DC
(AFP33028−F)
or III
II 24 V DC
(AFP33068−F)
12 to
24 V DC
(AFP33028−F) IV
I or
24 V DC
(AFP33068−F)
next page

Notes
2.9.4.4 Limitations on Number of Simultaneous Input ON Points
Keep the rate of input points per common which are simultaneously ON within the
following range as determined by the temperature.
AFP33028−F AFP33068−F
at 24 V at 24 V
DC 100 DC
100
at 26.4 V 90 at 26.4 V
DC DC
80 70
70 Rate of input
Rate of input points per
points per common
common which are
which are simultaneous
simultaneous ON (%)
ON (%) 29/84.2 48/118.4 55/131 50/ 53/ 55/
Ambient temperature (°C/°F) 122 127.4 131

2.9.5 8-point Type AC Input Units
Item Description
Rated input voltage 100 to 120 V AC 200 to 240 V AC
Rated input current approx. 10 mA (at 100 V AC) approx. 10 mA (at 200 V AC)
Input impedance approx. 10 k Ω approx. 20 k Ω
Input voltage range 85 to 132 V AC (max. input 170 to 264 V AC (max. input
current: 20 mA or less) current: 20 mA or less)
Min. ON voltage/ 80 V/6 mA 160 V/6 mA
Min. ON current
Max. OFF voltage/ 30 V/3 mA 50 V/3 mA
Max. OFF current
Response
p OFF → ON 15 ms or less
time
i ON → OFF 30 ms or less

AFP33041/AFP33051
Input
indicator
Input 1.2 kΩ LED
Internal circuit
100 to 120 V AC
(AFP33041)
0.1 µF 200 Ω
or
200 to 240 V AC
(AFP33051)
COM
0.27 µF (AFP33041)
1.2 MΩ 0.12 µF (AFP33051)
100 to
120 V AC
(AFP33041)
or
200 to
240 V AC 1
0
(AFP33051) 3
2
5
6
7
COM
Σ
Σ
Σ
Σ
Σ
Σ
Σ
Σ
Σ
Σ
Σ
Note

2.9.6 16-point Type AC Input Units
Item Description
Rated input voltage 100 to 120 V AC 200 to 240 V AC
Rated input current approx. 10 mA (at 100 V AC) approx. 10 mA (at 200 V AC)
Input impedance approx. 10 k Ω approx. 20 k Ω
Input voltage range 85 to 132 V AC 170 to 264 V AC
(max. input current: 20 mA or (max. input current: 20 mA or
less) less)
Min. ON voltage/ 80 V/6 mA 160 V/6 mA
Min. ON current
Max. OFF voltage/ 30 V/3 mA 50 V/3 mA
Max. OFF current
Response
p OFF → ON 15 ms or less
time
i ON → OFF 30 ms or less
Limitations on Number of Simultaneous Input ON Points

Keep the number of input points per common which are simultaneously ON within the
following range as determined by the ambient temperature.
AFP33043 AFP33053
Number of Number of
input points input points
per common per common
which are which are
simultaneous simultaneous
ON ON
Ambient temperature (°C/°F) Ambient temperature (°C/°F)

AFP33043/AFP33053
Input
indicator
Input 1.2 kΩ LED
Internal circuit
100 to 120 V AC
(AFP33043)
0.1 µF 200 Ω
or
200 to 240 V AC
(AFP33053) COM
0.27 µF (AFP33043)
1.2 MΩ 0.12 µF (AFP33053)
AFP33043/AFP33053
100 to 120 V AC
(AFP33043)
or
200 to 240 V AC
(AFP33053)
100 to 120 V AC
(AFP33043)
or
200 to 240 V AC
(AFP33053)
Note

2.10 Output Units Specifications
2.10.1 16-point Type Relay Output Units
Item Description
Order number AFP33103−F/AFP33203−F
Rated control capacity (*Note) 2 A 250 V AC (5 A/common)/2 A 30 V DC (5 A/common)
Response
p time OFF → ON 10 ms or less
ON → OFF 8 ms or less
Life time Mechanical 20,000,000 operations or more
Electrical 100, 000 operations or more
Internal current consumption 150 mA or less
(at 5 V DC)
Power supply for Voltage 24 V DC  10% (21.6 to 26.4 V DC)
driving internal
circuit Current 160 mA or less
Surge absorber none
Relay socket AFP33103−F: without relay socket
AFP33203−F: with relay socket
Output points per common 8 points/common
Note
Resistance load

AFP33103−F/AFP33203−F
Output
indicator
LED
Output
Load
Max.
250 V AC, 2 A
Output 30 V DC, 2 A
Internal
circuit
24 V DC
AFP33103−F/AFP33203−F
250 V AC, 2 A
30 V DC, 2 A
250 V AC, 2 A
30 V DC, 2 A
24 V DC
Note

2.10.2 16-point Type Output Unit−Transistor NPN
Item Description
Rated load voltage 5 to 24 V DC
Load voltage range 4.75 to 26.4 V DC
Maximum load current 0.5 A (at 12 to 24 V DC), 0.1 A (at 5 V DC)
(* Note)
Maximum surge current 3 A, 10 ms or less
OFF state leakage current 100 µA or less
ON state maximum voltage 0.5 V or less
drop
Response
p time OFF → ON 0.1 ms or less
ON → OFF 0.3 ms or less
(at 5 V DC)
Power supply for Voltage 4.75 to 26.4 V DC (* Note)
driving internal
circuit Current 100 mA (at 24 V DC)
Surge absorber zener diode
Fuse ratings 5 A (AFP88042)
Note
The load current will vary depending on the power supply for
driving the internal circuit. Adjust the load current referring to the
following range.
Max. load current (mA)
Power supply for driving

internal circuit (V)

AFP33483−F
Output
indicator
LED
5.6 kΩ
Output
Internal
circuit
Load
Fuse 5 to 24 V DC
5A
2 kΩ
AFP33483−F
5 to 24 V DC
Note

Item Description
Maximum load current 0.1 A (at 12 to 24 V DC), 50 mA (at 5V DC)
(* Note)
Maximum surge current 0.3 A
drop
Response
(at 5 V DC)
driving internal
Fuse ratings none
Note
following range.



AFP33484−F
Output
indicator
LED
10 kΩ
Internal
Output
circuit
Load
5 to 24 V DC
10 kΩ
Pin layout of
first 16 points 5 to 24 V DC
I II
Pin layout of
last 16 points 5 to 24 V DC
IV III
Notes
Although  (10A, 10B) and ⊖ (9A, 9B) terminals are
connected with the same connector. It is recommended that
they also be connected externally.

Item Description
Maximum load current 0.1 A (at 12 to 24 V DC), 50 mA (at 5 V DC)
(* Note)
drop
Response
(at 5 V DC)
Fuse ratings none
Note
following range.


AFP33487−F Output
indicator
LED
10 kΩ
Output
Internal
circuit
Load
Y0 to YF
⋮
Y30 to Y3F 5 to 24 V DC
10 kΩ
III
II
5 to
5 to 24 V DC
24 V DC
IV
I
Notes
Although  and ⊖ pins are connected with the same
connector. It is recommended that they also be connected
externally.

2.10.5 16-point Type Output Unit−Transistor PNP
Item Description
Maximum load current 0.5 A (at 24 V DC),
(* Note) 0.3 A (at 12 V DC),
0.1 A (at 5 V DC)
drop
Response
(at 5 V DC)
Power supply for Voltage 4.75 to 26.4 V DC (* Note.)
driving internal
Fuse ratings 5 A (1 piece/common)
Note
following range.


AFP33583−F
Output
indicator
LED
15 kΩ
Fuse
5A 5 to 24 V DC
Internal
Output
circuit
Load
3.9 kΩ
AFP33583−F
5 to 24 V DC
Note

2.10.6 32-point type Output Unit−Transistor PNP
Item Description
Maximum load current 0.1 A (at 12 to 24 V DC)
(* Note)
drop
Response
(at 5 V DC)
driving internal
Fuse ratings none
Note
following range.


AFP33584−F Output
indicator
LED
10 kΩ
Output 5 to 24 V DC
Internal
circuit
Load
10 kΩ
5 to 24 V DC
Pin layout of
first 16 points
II I
5 to 24 V DC
Pin layout of
last 16 points
IV III
Notes
Although  pins for I, II, III, IV and ⊖ pins for I, II, III, IV are
internaily connected.
It is recommended that they also be connected externally.

2.10.7 64-point Type Output Unit−Transistor PNP
Item Description
(* Note)
drop
Response
(at 5 V DC)
Fuse ratings none
Note
following range.


AFP33587−F Output
indicator
LED
10 kΩ
Output 5 to 24 V DC
Internal
circuit
Load
10 kΩ
III
I
5 to
24 V DC
5 to
24 V DC
IV
II
Notes
Although  pins and ⊖ pins are internally connected. It is
recommended that they also be connected externally.

2.10.8 16-point Type Triac Output Unit
Item Description
Order number AFP33703
Rated load voltage 100 to 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
Load voltage range 85 to 264 V AC
Maximum load current 0.5 A/point, 2 A/common
Minimum load current 25 mA
OFF state leakage current 3 mA or less (at 240 V AC)
ON state maximum voltage 2.5 V or less (0.1 A or less)
drop 1.5 V or less (0.1 A to 0.5 A)
Response
ON → OFF 0.5 cycle + 1 ms or less
(at 5 V DC)
Surge absorber varistor
Fuse ratings 5 A (1 piece/common)

AFP33703
Output
indicator
LED
Output
22 Ω
Load
Internal
circuit
0.022µF 100 to 240 V AC

Fuse
5A COM
100 to
240 V AC
100 to
240 V AC
Note

2.11 I/O Mixed Units Specifications
2.11.1 64−point Type I/O Mixed Unit−DC Input/Transistor NPN
Item Description
Input
put Number of input points 32 points
Rated input current approx. 6.2 mA (at 24 V DC)
Input impedance approx. 3.9 k Ω
Min. ON voltage/Min. ON 9.6 V/3 mA
current
Max. OFF voltage/Max. OFF 2.5 V/1 mA
current
Response
Either the positive or negative of the input power
supply can be connected to COM (common)
terminal.
Output
p Number of output points 32 points
Maximum surge current 0.3 A or less
drop
Response
Power supply Voltage 4.75 to 26.4 V DC
for driving
internal circuit Current 100 mA (at 24 V DC)
Fuse ratings none
(at 5 V DC)

AFP33428−F
Input section (left side connector)
Input
indicator
LED
Input 3.9 kΩ
Internal
12 to
circuit
0.1
24 V DC µF 1 kΩ
COM 3.9 kΩ
Note
Keep the rate of input points per common which are
simultaneously ON within the following range as determined by
the temperature.
100 at 24 V DC
at 26.4 V DC
Rate of input
points per 85
common 70
which are
simultaneous
ON (%)
37/ 49/ 55/
98.6 120.2 131
Output section (right side connector)
Output
indicator
LED
10 kΩ
Output
Internal
circuit
Load
5 to
24 V DC
10 kΩ
next page

Note
following range.

Input section Output section

(left side connector) (right side connector)
II
5 to
24 V DC
12 to
I 24 V DC
CN1 CN2

next page

Notes
COM pins for I and for II are internally connected.
Although  pins and ⊖ pins for III and for IV are internally
connected. It is recommended that they also be connected
externally.

2.11.2 64−point Type I/O Mixed Unit−DC Input/Transistor PNP
Item Description
Input
Rated input current approx. 6.2 mA (at 24 V DC)
Input impedance approx. 3.9 k Ω
current
current
Response
terminal.
Output
Maximum surge current 0.3 A or less
drop
Response
Power supply Voltage 4.75 to 26.4 V DC
for driving
internal circuit Current 100 mA (at 24 V DC)
Fuse ratings none
(at 5 V DC)

AFP33528−F
Input section (left side connector)
Input
indicator
LED
Input 3.9 kΩ
Internal
12 to 0.1 circuit
24 V DC µF 1 kΩ
COM 3.9 kΩ
Note
Keep the rate of input points per common which are
simultaneously ON within the following range as determined by
the temperature.
100 at 24 V DC
at 26.4 V DC
Rate of input
points per 85
common 70
which are
simultaneous
ON (%)
37/ 49/ 55/
98.6 120.2 131
Output section (right side connector)
Output
indicator
LED
10 kΩ
Output 5 to 24 V DC
Internal
circuit
Load
10 kΩ
next page

Note
following range.

Input section Output section

(left side connector) (right side connector)
III
II
5 to
24 V DC
IV
12 to
I 24 V DC
CN1 CN2
next page

Notes
COM pins for I and for II are internally connected.
Although  pins and ⊖ pins for III and for IV are internally
connected. It is recommended that they also be connected
externally.

2.11.3 16−point Type I/O Mixed Unit−DC Input/Relay Output
Item Description
Input
Rated input current approx. 8 mA (at 24 V DC)
Input impedance approx. 3 k Ω
(max. input current: 10 mA)
current
current
Response
terminal.
Output
Rated control capacity 2 A 250 V AC (5 A/common),
2 A 30 V DC (5 A/common)
Response
ON → OFF 8 ms or less
Life time Mechanical 20,000,000 operations or more
Electrical 100,000 operations or more
Power supply Voltage 24 V DC  10% (21.6 to 26.4 V DC)
for driving
internal circuit Current 80 mA or less
Surge absorber none
Relay socket with relay socket
(at 5 V DC)

AFP33223−F LED
Input 1.5 kΩ
12 to 24 V DC 1 kΩ
0.15 µF
Internal circuit
COM
1.5 kΩ
Output
Load
Output
250 V AC, 2 A
30 V DC, 2 A

24 V DC ⊖
AFP33223−F
12 to 24 V DC
24 V DC
250 V AC, 2 A
30 V DC, 2 A
Note

Chapter 3
I/O Allocation
3.1 Fundamentals of I/O Allocation
(Automatic Allocation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 3
3.1.1 Example of Automatic Allocation . . . . 3 − 3
3.1.2 Using Automatic Allocation . . . . . . . . 3 − 4
3.1.3 Procedure for Automatic Allocation . 3 − 5
3.2 Arbitrary Allocation With NPST−GR . . . . . . . . . 3 − 6

3.2.1 Example of Arbitrary Allocation
With NPST−GR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 6
3.2.2 Using Arbitrary Allocation . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 7
3.2.3 Procedure of Arbitrary Allocation . . . 3 − 8
3.3 Registration of I/O Mount Allocation . . . . . . . . . 3 − 9

3.3.1 Registration Method of Mount State . 3 − 9
3.3.1.1 Using Registration of I/O
Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 9
3.3.1.2 Clearing Registered
Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 10
3.4 Table of I/O Occupied Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 11


3.1 Fundamentals of I/O Allocation (Automatic Allocation)
3.1.1 Example of Automatic Allocation
Link unit
Input 16 points
Input 32 points
Output 16 points
Output 32 points
Input 64 points
Output 64 points
C.C.U.
Master backplane
0 10 20 40 50 70 110 150
to to to to to to to to
F 1F 3F 4F 6F 10F 14F 15F
Input 32 points
Input 32 points
Input 32 points
Output 32 points
Output 32 points
On 5−slot type backplane, the
3 remaining slots, which
Expansion backplane actually do not exist, are
allocated each with 16 points.
On 3−slot type backplane, the
5 remaining slots, which
actually do not exist, are
160 180 200 220 240 260 270 280 allocated each with 16 points.
17F 19F 21F 23F 25F 26F 27F 28F
Input 32 points
Expansion backplane
Input 32 points
allocation can be
performed in the order of Free slot
the number of board Output 32 points
number setting switches. 16 points are allocated to
Output 32 points
the free slots.
Free slot
Input 64 points
Output 64 points
Expansion backplane
290 310 330 340 360 380 390 430

30F 32F 33F 35F 37F 38F 42F 46F

3.1.2 Using Automatic Allocation
The I/O number is determined by the unit installation location and allocated in order
starting from the left side (slot 0) of the master backplane.
I/O points are allocated for each unit according to its own I/O occupation (* section 3.4).
In the table of section 3.4, the occupied points are expressed in the following fashion
for convenience.
How to express the occupied points
I/O occupation points

16, 32, 64, 128
Type of unit
Nil: I/O unit
S: Intelligent unit
Type of I/O
X: Input, Y: Output, E: without I/Os
16 points are allocated for the free slot.

All backplanes, including 3- and 5-slot types, are regarded as 8-slot types, and slots
which do not actually exist are regarded as open slots.
On 5−slot type backplane, the 3 remaining slots, which actually do not exist, are
On 3−slot type backplane, the 5 remaining slots, which actually do not exist, are
Expansion backplane allocation can be performed in the order of the numbers of the
board number setting switches.

How to count the I/O numbers (relay numbers)

Since I/O number are handled in units of 16 points, they are expressed as a combination
of decimal and hexadecimal numbers as shown below.
<Example>
1 2 7 F
Decimal
, 1, 2, 3 . . . . . . . . 9
]
Hexadecimal
0, 1, 2, 3 . . . . . 9, A, B . . . F
3.1.3 Procedure for Automatic Allocation
Automatic allocation is performed automatically when the power supply is turned ON.
If you have already set arbitrary allocation (* section 3.2) or the I/O mount allocation
(* section 3.3), the I/O allocation will be performed according to those settings. If you
want to return to automatic allocation, initialize the system register (* section 3.3.1.2).

3.2 Arbitrary Allocation With NPST−GR
3.2.1 Example of Arbitrary Allocation With NPST−GR
Link unit
Input 16 points
Input 32 points
Output 16 points
Since units such as
Output 32 points the C.C.U., and link
Input 64 points unit do not require
Output 64 points actual I/Os, you do
C.C.U. not have to assign
I/O points. (Setting:
Master backplane 0SE)
0 10 30 40 60 100
to to to to to to
F 2F 3F 5F 9F 13F
Input 32 points
Input 32 points
Input 32 points
Output 32 points
Output 32 points
For 5-slot type backplane, the
Expansion backplane number of occupied I/O points
for the 3 slots which do not
actually exist can be set to 0.
(Setting: 0E) The same is true
for the 3-slot type backplanes.
140 160 180 200 220

to to to to to You can allocato I/O
15F 17F 19F 21F 23F points for units that
Input 32 points will be installed in the
intervening free slots.
Input 32 points
(In this example, 64
Free slot points can be
Output 32 points allocated by using the
Output 32 points 64X or 64Y setting.)
Free slot When it has not yet
Input 64 points been decided what
Output 64 points kind of unit will be
installed, an
Expansion backplane indeterminate number
of points can be
allocated. (In this
example, because 64
points have been
allocated, a 16−point,
240 260 280 320 340 360 400 440 32−point or 64−point
to to to to to to to to input or output unit
25F 27F 31F 33F 35F 39F 43F 47F can be selected.)

3.2.2 Using Arbitrary Allocation
You have the following advantages when you use the NPST−GR software to perform
arbitrary allocation.
For link unit and C.C.U. (computer communication unit), etc., that do not require actual
I/Os, the number of I/O points can be set to 0, and the I/O numbers will be renumbered
accordingly. (Use the NPST-GR setting: 0SE).
For the 5-slot type backplanes, the number of I/O points for the 3 slots which do not
actually exist can be set to 0 and the I/O numbers will be renumbered accordingly.
For the 3-slot type backplanes, the number of I/O points for the 5 slots which do not
actually exist can be set to 0 and the I/O numbers will be renumbered accordingly.
(Use the NPST-GR setting: 0E).
For free slots, I/O points can be allocated for I/O units that will be installed later. For
example, if a 32-point or 64-point unit will be added in the future, the addition of the unit
will not affect the I/O numbers for the subsequent units.
When there is a possibility that the number of I/O points will increase, but the type of
unit has not yet been decided, an indeterminate number of points can be allocated.
In this example, because 64 points (64Y) have been allocated in the free slot, a 16−point,
32−point or 64−point output unit can be selected. The addition of the unit will not affect the
I/O numbers for the subsequent units.
Note
When arbitrary allocation is not used, I/Os will be allocated
automatically according to the automatic allocation.

3.2.3 Procedure of Arbitrary Allocation
You can use the NPST−GR software. If you want to use NPST−GR software, read the
NPST−GR manuals.
Procedure:
1. Set the NPST−GR to OFFLINE mode.
2. Press the <ESC> key to display the “NPST MENU.”
Select “ALLOCATE I/O MAP” from “PLC
CONFIGURATION” of the menu and press the <ESC>
key.
<Settings for the example on page 3 − 6>

1. Set the number of slots to 24.
(The slots will be set at 8 slots
per one backplane.)
2. Allocations will be performed

for each unit according to the
settings.
3. After the allocations are completed, register the contents of allocation by

pressing the <Ctrl> and <f1> keys simultaneously. The registered
settings can be written to the FP3/FP10SH CPU together with the
program.
The system will operate according to the I/O allocation.
Writing contents of arbitrary allocation on the NPST−GR screen

2. Select “PROGRAM MANAGER” then “LOAD A PROGRAM TO PLC”,
and press the <ESC> key. The program is transferred to the
FP3/FP10SH CPU, and the contents of allocation are simultaneously
written to the FP3/FP10SH CPU as part of its system register settings.

3.3 Registration of I/O Mount Allocation
3.3.1 Registration Method of Mount State

Registering with NPST-GR
Procedure:
1. Set the mode selector of CPU to the PROG. mode and
set the NPST−GR to online mode.
Select “ALLOCATE I/O MAP” from the “PLC
CONFIGURATION”, and press the <ENTER> key.
3. Then press <F10 (LD I/O)> key to register the current
I/O mapping.
4. Verify that “OK? (Y/N)” appears, and then press the
<Y> key. By selecting “Y” in the screen, the unit
currently mounted is read to the NPST−GR screen,
and the contents of allocation are recorded to the
CPU at the same time. The contents recorded at this
time are the same as the contents for automatic
allocation.
Registering with FP programmer II Ver.2

Perform the following key operations.
The contents recorded at this time are the same as the contents for automatic
allocation.
(−)
5 2 ENT WRT
OP
3.3.1.1 Using Registration of I/O Allocation
The registration of I/O allocation refers to the registration of the I/O numbers assigned
to each unit in the system registers of the CPU.
For automatic allocation (* section 3.1), the allocation depends on the state of the
installed units when the power is turned ON. However, if the I/O allocations are
registered, the I/O numbers will not be shifted even if there are mistakes in the
installation of the units.
Arbitrary allocation (* section 3.2) is registered in the CPU at the same time the program
is written, so there is no need for the registration operation.
next page

Notes
It is not absolutely necessary to perform the registration of I/O
allocation. If the allocation is not registered, the system will
operate according to the automatic allocations.
If the I/O allocation is registered, correct operation will not be
possible if units are changed or mount positions are changed
after registration. Redo the registration if the installation
conditions do match the contents of the registration.
3.3.1.2 Clearing Registered Content
The registered content is cleared by initializing system register.

Note that the contents of all the system registers will be reset when you initialize system
register.
Clearing content using NPST-GR
Procedure:
1. Set the NPST−GR to ONLINE monitor.
Select “SYSTEM REGISTER” from the “PLC
CONFIGURATION” of the NPST menu, and press the
<ENTER> key.
3. press <F2 (INT)> key.
4. Verify that “INITIALIZE? (Y/N)” is displayed, and
press the <Y> key. The contents of the system
register will be cleared.
Clearing content using FP programmer

Perform the following key operations.
(−)
5 1 ENT WRT
OP

3.4 Table of I/O Occupied Points

Name Order I/O occupied
number point
Input DC input 16-point, 12 to 24 V DC AFP33023−F 16X
u
unitt terminal
, 12 to 24 V DC
32-point,
p AFP33024−F 32X
connector 5 V DC AFP33014−F
64-point,
p , 12 to 24 V DC AFP33027−F 64X
connector AFP33028−F
24 V DC AFP33068−F
5 V DC AFP33017−F
AC input
p 8-point,
p , 100 to 120 V AC AFP33041 16X
terminal
i l 200 to 240 V AC AFP33051
16-point,
p , 100 to 120 V AC AFP33043 16X
terminal
i l 200 to 240 V AC AFP33053
Output
p Relay
y 16-point,
p , With relay socket AFP33203−F 16Y
unit
i output terminal
i l Without relay socket AFP33103−F
p , NPN open collector AFP33483−F 16Y
output terminal
i l PNP open collector AFP33583−F
, NPN open collector
32-point,
p AFP33484−F 32Y
connector PNP open collector AFP33584−F
, NPN open collector
64-point,
p AFP33487−F 64Y
connector PNP open collector AFP33587−F
Triac 16-point, terminal AFP33703 16Y
output
I/O DC input/ 16-point, terminal AFP33223−F 16X
mixed relay 16Y
unit output
type
DC input/ 64-point, connector AFP33428−F 32X
transistor 32Y
(NPN)
output
DC input/ 64-point, connector AFP33528−F 32X
transistor 32Y
(PNP)
output
next page


number point
A/D
/ 4-channel Standard type AFP3400 16SX
converter 8-channel G-type
yp AFP3402 16SE (0SE)
( )
unit ( Note
(* N 1))
AFP3403
AFP3405
8-channel I-type
yp AFP3406
AFP3407
AFP3408
D/A
/ 2-channel Standard type
yp AFP3410 16SX
converter AFP3411
unit
2-channel I-type
yp AFP3412 16SE (0SE)
( )
AFP3413 ( Note
(* N 1))
AFP3416
AFP3417
4-channel I-type
yp AFP3414
AFP3415
AFP3418
AFP3419
R.T.D. input unit AFP3420 16SX
Thermocouple input unit AFP3421 16SX
Serial data unit AFP3460 16SX
Data process unit AFP3461 16SY
SY
High-speed
g p counter 1-channel type AFP3621
unit
i 2-channel type AFP3622
Pulse output unit AFP3480 16SX/16SY
Positioning
g unit E-type
yp AFP3431E 16SX/16SY
AFP3432E 32SX/32SY
Positioning
g unit F-type
yp AFP3431 16SX
AFP3434 16SY
SY
AFP3432 32SX
AFP3435 32SY
SY
AFP3436
Interrupt unit AFP3452 16SX
MEWNET-TR transmitter master unit AFP3750 0X to 128X
0Y to 128Y
(* Note 2)
MEWNET-F master unit AFP3742 16SE (0SE)
( )
MEWNET-W link unit AFP3720 ( Note
(* N 1))
next page


number point
MEWNET-P link unit AFP3710 16SE (0SE)
( )
C-NET link unit AFP3463 ( Note
(* N 1))
ET-LAN unit AFP3790
C.C.U. AFP3462
Data memory
y unit AFP32091 16SX
AFP32092
Notes
(*1): The number of I/O occupied points that units marked
“16SE (0SE)” possess can be set to 0 using arbitrary
allocation in the NPST-GR.
(*2): I/O allocation for a MEWNET-TR transmitter master unit
vary depending on the unit settings.
The occupied I/O points are expressed in the following fashion
for convenience.
I/O occupation points

16, 32, 64, 128
Type of unit
Nil: I/O unit
S: Intelligent unit
Type of I/O
X: Input, Y: Output, E: without I/Os


Chapter 4
Installation and Wiring
4.1 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 3
4.1.1 Installation Space and Environment . 4 − 3
4.1.1.1 Setting the Board Number . 4 − 6
4.1.2 Mounting Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 7
4.1.3 Connecting Expansion Cable . . . . . . 4 − 9
4.1.4 Connecting Backup Battery . . . . . . . 4 − 10
4.2 Power Supply Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 11

4.2.1 Wiring the Power Supply to the
Power Supply Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 11
4.2.2 Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 13
4.3 Wiring Input and Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 14

4.3.1 Input Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 14
4.3.1.1 Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 14
4.3.1.2 AC Input Devices . . . . . . . . 4 − 15
4.3.1.3 LED−Equipped
Reed Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 15
4.3.1.4 Two−Wire Type Sensor . . . 4 − 15
4.3.1.5 LED−Equipped
Limit Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 16
4.3.1.6 Wiring 64−point
Type Input Unit . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 17
4.3.2 Output Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 18
4.3.2.1 Protective Circuit for
Inductive Loads . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 18
4.3.2.2 Protective Circuit for
Capacitive Loads . . . . . . . . 4 − 19
4.3.2.3 Precautions for Overload . 4 − 19
next page
4.3.2.4 Precautions for

Leakage Current . . . . . . . . . 4 − 19
4.3.3 Cautions Regarding Input and
Output Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 20
4.4 Wiring the Connector Type I/O Units . . . . . . . 4 − 21

4.4.1 Wiring the Connector Type Units . . . 4 − 21
4.4.2 Connecting the Terminals . . . . . . . . . 4 − 24
4.4.2.1 CT−2 Connector Terminal . 4 − 24
4.4.2.2 RT−2 Relay Terminal . . . . . 4 − 27
4.4.3 Connecting the Cable With
Pressure Connection Terminal . . . . 4 − 29
4.4.4 Connecting with Connector for
Wire−pressed Terminal Cable . . . . . 4 − 31
4.4.5 Connecting with Flat Cable
Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 33
4.5 Wiring the Terminal Type I/O Units . . . . . . . . . 4 − 35

4.5.1 Wiring the Terminal Type Units . . . . 4 − 35
4.6 Safety Measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 36

4.6.1 Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 36
4.6.1.1 Precautions Regarding
System Design . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 36
4.6.1.2 Interlock Circuit . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 36
4.6.1.3 Emergency Stop Circuit . . . 4 − 36
4.6.1.4 Start Up Sequence . . . . . . . 4 − 36
4.6.1.5 Alarm Function . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 37
4.6.2 Momentary Power Failures . . . . . . . 4 − 37
4.6.3 Alarm Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 37
4.6.3.1 Watchdog Timer . . . . . . . . . 4 − 38

4.1 Installation
4.1 Installation
4.1.1 Installation Space and Environment

Dimensions
Master backplane
A
B
150/5.906
100/3.937
120/4.724
(unit: mm/in.)
Type Overall length Mounting hole

A (mm/in.): pitch
B (mm/in.):
3-slot type 260/10.236 245/9.646
5-slot type 330/12.992 315/12.402
8-slot type 435/17.126 420/16.535
Expansion backplane
A
B
150/5.906
100/3.937
120/4.724
(unit: mm/in.)
Type Overall length Mounting hole

A (mm/in.): pitch
B (mm/in.):
3-slot type 260/10.236 245/9.646
5-slot type 330/12.992 315/12.402
8-slot type 435/17.126 420/16.535

4.1 Installation
Installation Space
Duck and other devices
50 mm/1.97 in. or more
Master
backplane
50 mm/1.97 in. or more (*)
Expansion
backplane
(*): When using the MEWNET-P link unit: 80 mm/3.15 in. or more
Panel door, etc.

FP3/FP10SH
devices
Other
Leave at least 50 mm/1.97 in. of space between the peripheral ducts of the unit and
other devices to allow heat radiation and unit replacement.
Leave some further space, as indicated below, around the lower section when using a
link unit.
When using the MEWNET-P link unit: 80 mm/3.15 in. or more
When installing devices facing the FP3/FP10SH such as on the door of the panel, leave
a space of at least 100 mm/3.94 in. between that device and the unit to avoid the effects
of heat or radiated noise.
next page

4.1 Installation
Although the depth of the unit is 120 mm/4.724 in., leave a space of at least 200
mm/7.87 in. from the mounting surface for programming tool connections and wiring.
120 mm/4.724 in.
FP peripheral cable
Approx. 190 mm/7.480 in.
Avoid installing the unit in the following locations:

Ambient temperatures outside the range of 0 to 55 °C/32 to 131 °F
Ambient humidity outside the range of 30 to 85 % RH
Sudden temperature changes causing condensation
Inflammable or corrosive gases
Excessive airborne dust or metal particles
Benzine, paint thinner, alcohol, other organic solvents or strong alkaline solutions
such as ammonia or caustic soda
Excessive vibration or shock
Direct sunlight
Water in any from including spray or mist
Avoid noise interference from the following items:

Influence from power transmission lines, high voltage equipment, power cables,
power equipment, radio transmitters, or any other equipment that generates high
switching surges.

4.1 Installation
Measures regarding heat discharge

Install as shown below, for heat radiation.
Do not install the FP3/FP10SH unit as shown below.
Do not install the unit above devices which generate heat such as heaters, transformers
or large scale resistors.
4.1.1.1 Setting the Board Number

Set the board numbers in order starting with backplane nearest to the master
backplane. Start with board number 1.
<Example> FP10SH
Board number Power supply unit
setting switch FP10SH CPU
Master backplane
1 Expansion backplane
2
Expansion backplane
3
Expansion backplane

4.1 Installation
4.1.2 Mounting Method

Mounting hole dimensions
(unit: mm/in.)
Type Number of slot Order number A (mm/in.) B (mm/in.)

Master 3-slot AFP3505−F 260/10.236 245/9.646
b k l
backplane 5-slot AFP3501−F 330/12.992 315/12.402
8-slot AFP3502−F 435/17.126 420/16.535
Expansion
p 3-slot AFP3506−F 260/10.236 245/9.646
b k l
backplane 5-slot AFP3503−F 330/12.992 315/12.402
8-slot AFP3504−F 435/17.126 420/16.535
Mount the backplane using M5 screws according to the following procedure

Procedure:
1. Lightly secure the upper part of the backplane using
the mounting holes.
2. Align the mounting holes for the lower part and
secure.
3. Tighten the upper screws.
Backplane
M5 screws

4.1 Installation
Install each unit using the supplied screws according to the following procedure.
Procedure:
1. Fit the two unit tabs into the unit holes on the
backplane.
2. Push the unit in the direction of the arrow and install

onto the backplane.
3. After properly installing the unit to the backplane,

secure the mounting screw at the top.
Secure the power supply unit and CPU with screws at
both the top and bottom.

4.1 Installation
4.1.3 Connecting Expansion Cable
The expansion cables are directional and are equipped with a key to prevent erroneous
insertion.
Connect so that the IN and OUT marks on the cable match the IN and OUT marks on
the backplane.
Match the “IN” and Master backplane

“OUT” markings on the
cables to those on the
backplanes.
Expansion backplane
Expansion backplane
Leave on the connector
cover on any unused
connector.
Insert the expansion cables firmly until they click into place.
When removing the cable, hold down the springs on the side of the cable connector to
release it from the locked condition and pull out the expasion cable.
Connector
Springs
Notes
Leave on the dust proofing label on the upper surface of the
unit until the wiring work is finished.
Leave the connector covers on any unused slots to protect
them from dust.
The same for the connector of expansion cable.

4.1 Installation
4.1.4 Connecting Backup Battery
The internal RAM of the CPU is backed up by the internal battery of the unit. Verify that
it is properly connected before programming.
Procedure:
1. Turn OFF power.
2. Open the cover of CPU.
3. Securely connect the backup battery connector.
4. When closing the cover, make sure it does not bite
into the lead wire.
5. Turn ON power.
FP3
Connector
Backup
battery
FP10SH
Backup battery
Lead wire
Connector

4.2 Power Supply Wiring
4.2.1 Wiring the Power Supply to the Power Supply Unit

Pin layout of power supply unit (AFP3631 is used for the example below.)
Use separate systems for
Power supply terminals
the power devices and the
Supplies 100 to 120 V AC or
Breaker input devices.
200 to 240 V AC
L
Use 2 mm2 (AWG14) twisted N

pair cable or larger.
Use an insulated transformer
when effects from noise are Voltage switch terminal
great. (for AFP3631 and AFP3638 only)
100 to 120 V AC: shorted
200 to 240 V AC: open
Use a wire that is thicker that
2 mm2 for the ground wire.
Service power supply terminal
(only on the AFP3631)
Connected to the various I/O
units. Can draw a 24 V power
Line ground and frame ground supply. Do not connect
terminals servie power supplies to
each other, or in parallel with
other power supplies.
ALARM output terminal
An alarm output can be output
when the ALARM condition
occurs. (* section 4.6.3)
Grounding
Power supply voltage

Verify that the power supply voltage is within allowable limits.
Type Order number Rated input voltage Operating voltage range
AC type
yp AFP3631,, AFP3638 100 to 120 V AC 85 to 132V AC
200 to 240 V AC 170 to 264V AC
DC type AFP3634 24 V DC 16.8 to 28.8 V DC
For the AFP3631 and AFP3638, switch between 100 V AC and 200 V AC with the
voltage switch terminal.
Power supply wire
Use power supply wire that is thicker than 2 mm2 to minimize the voltage drop.
Twist the electrical wire to minimize the effects of noise.
Voltage switch terminal
When using the power supply unit, AFP3631 and AFP3638:
− When using 100 to 120 V AC, short the voltage switch terminal using the short
circuiting bar included in the package.
− When using 200 to 240 V AC, check that the space between the terminals is open.

Pressure connection terminal

M3.5 screws are used for the terminals.
The following M3.5 pressure connection terminals are recommended for the wiring.
Fork type terminal Round type terminal
7.2 mm/0.283 in. or less 7.2 mm/0.283 in. or less
Power supply system

Use separate wiring system for the FP3/FP10SH, input/output devices and motorized
devices.
Breaker
Motorized
device
I/O device
FP3/FP10SH
Insulated
transformer
Eliminating effects from noise

Use a low noise power supply.
Excessive noise and line voltage fluctuations can result in FP3 or FP10SH CPU
misoperation or in system shutdown. To prevent accidents caused by noise and line
voltage fluctuations, be sure to employ countermeasures (such as use of an insulated
transformer, etc.) when wiring the power supply lines.
Note
Use the same power supply system for the master and
expansion backplanes so that they are turned ON and OFF
simultaneously.
Power
Master
supply
backplane
unit
Turned ON and OFF

simultaneously via the
same power supply
system.
Power
Expansion
supply
backplane
unit

4.2.2 Grounding
The frame ground terminal (FRAME GROUND) is connected to the metallic part of the
master backplane and is the terminal for connection to ground.
The line ground terminal (LINE GROUND) is the midpoint terminal for the internal noise
filter.
When the effects from noise are large, ground as shown in the diagram below.
The line ground terminal (LINE GROUND) has an electric potential, so be sure to
ground it to prevent electric shock when connecting it to the frame ground terminal
(FRAME GROUND).
Power supply unit
CORRECT
CORRECT
For grounding purposes, use ground wires with a minimum of 2 mm2 and the
grounding connection should have a resistance of less than 100 Ω.
The point of grounding should be as close to the FP3/FP10SH unit as possible.
The ground wire should be as short as possible.
If two devices share a single ground point, it may produce an adverse effect. Always
use an exclusive ground for each device.
FP3/ Other
CORRECT FP10SH device
FP3/ Other
FP10SH device

4.3 Wiring Input and Output
4.3.1 Input Wiring
There is a limit on the number of simultaneous ON points allowed on some units. Refer
to the specifications page for each input unit (* sections 2.9 and 2.11). In particular, take
care when using the units in locations with a high ambient temperature.
In this section you find some examples for wiring sensors, an AC input device, an
LED-equipped reed switch, a two-wire type sensor and a LED-equipped limit switch.
4.3.1.1 Sensors
Relay output type NPN open collector output type
Input terminal Input terminal
Vcc
Output
Sensor COM DC Input Sensor DC Input
0V⊖
Relay unit COM unit
Internal Internal
circuit circuit
Power supply Power supply Power supply for input
for sensor for input
Voltage output (Universal output) Two-wire type (* section 4.3.1.4)

type Input terminal
Input terminal
Vcc
Output Sensor DC Input
Sensor DC Input
0V⊖ COM unit
COM unit
Internal Internal
circuit circuit
Power supply for input Power supply for input
PNP open collector output type

Input terminal
Sensor DC Input
COM unit
Internal
circuit
Power supply for input

4.3.1.2 AC Input Devices
Contact output type Non-contact output type

Input Input
AC terminal AC terminal
input Input input Input
Contact unit unit
device device
COM COM
Power Power
supply supply
4.3.1.3 LED−Equipped Reed Switch
When a LED is connected to an input contact such as LED-equipped reed switch, make
sure that the voltage value applied to the input terminal of FP3/FP10SH is greater than
ON voltage value.
In particular, take care when connecting a number of switches in series.
Input
LED terminal
LED−equipped Con− ON voltage DC
reed switch
value or more input unit
tact
COM
4.3.1.4 Two−Wire Type Sensor
If the input of FP3/10SH is not turned OFF because of leakage current from the
two−wire type sensor, the use of a bleeder resistor is recommended, as shown below.
Using 12 to 24 V DC type input unit

(OFF voltage: 2.5 V, Input impedance: 3 kΩ)
Input terminal
Two−wire Bleeder DC
type sensor R input unit
resistor
COM
Internal
circuit
I: Sensor’s leakage current (mA)
R: Bleeder resistor (kΩ)
next page

The OFF voltage of the input is 2.5 V, therefore, select an R value so that the voltage
between the COM terminal and the input terminal will be less than 2.5 V.
(The input impedance is 3 kΩ.)
7.5
The resistance R of the bleeder resistor is: R ≦ (kΩ)
3 × I−2.5
(Power supply voltage)2
The wattage W of the resistor is: W=
R
In the actual selection, use a value that is 3 to 5 times the value of W.
4.3.1.5 LED−Equipped Limit Switch
If the input of the FP3/FP10SH is not turned OFF or if the LED of the limit switch is kept
ON because of the leakage current, from the LED−equipped limit switch, the use of a
bleeder resistor is recommended, as shown below.
Using 12 to 24 V DC type input unit

(OFF voltage: 2.5 V, Input impedance: 3 kΩ)
Input
terminal
LED−equipped Bleeder
limit switch R DC
r resistor
Input unit
COM
Internal circuit
r: Internal resistor of limit switch (kΩ)

R: Bleeder resistor (kΩ)
The OFF voltage of the input is 2.5 V, therefore when the power supply voltage is 24 V,
select R so that
24 - 2.5
The current will be greater than I =
r
7.5
The resistance R of the bleeder resistor is: R ≦ (kΩ)
3 × I−2.5
(Power supply voltage)2
The wattage W of the resistor is: W=
R
In the actual selection, use a value that is 3 to 5 times the value of W.

4.3.1.6 Wiring 64−point Type Input Unit
If the dip switch position (* section 2.9.3.4) on the rear side of the 64−point type input
unit is set to ON position in the following situations, the current will wrap around as a
result of the switching circuit, causing erroneous operation. In these situations, set the
dip switch on the rear side of the 64−point type input unit to OFF position or insert a
diode as shown below in example diagram.
To add an LED for checking operation in parallel with the input contact
COM
LED for
checking Input unit
operation
Input
Input contact
When using a non-open collector transistor output type for the sensor as shown
in the diagram below
Internal circuit
Internal circuit
Internal circuit
Vcc Vcc Vcc
Sensor Sensor Sensor

Output Output Output
0V⊖ 0V⊖ 0V⊖
Example:
Wrap around when using a photoelectric sensor
In the diagram below, when the switching circuit goes OFF when sensor 1 is OFF and
sensor 2 is ON, the current will flow as if on a thick wire, so that X0 and X1 will both go
ON even though sensor 1 is OFF.
Input unit
Diode
Sensor
1 X0
Diode
Sensor
2 X1
COM Switching Repeatedly turns ON and OFF with a period of approximately 1 ms

circuit when the dip switch is ON.

4.3.2 Output Wiring
There is a limit on the number of simultaneous ON points or load currents allowed on

some units. Refer to the specifications page for each unit (* sections 2.10 and 2.11).
In particular, take care when using the units in locations with high ambient
temperatures.
Use a protective circuit when connecting inductive load and capacitive load (* section
4.3.2.1 and 4.3.2.2).
Some output units have a limit on currents per the common. Use within that range.
4.3.2.1 Protective Circuit for Inductive Loads
With an inductive load, a protective circuit should be connected in parallel with the load.
When switching DC inductive loads with relay output type output unit, be sure to connect
a diode across the ends of the load.
When using an AC inductive load

Surge absorber (*)
R C (*) Example of surge absorber Resistor
(R: 50 Ω, C: 0.47 µF)
Output Output
Relay Triac terminal
terminal
type type
Output AC Inductive load output AC Inductive load
unit COM unit COM
Varister
Output
terminal
Output
unit AC Inductive load
COM
When using a DC inductive load

Diode (*)
Output
terminal (*) Diode:
Reverse voltage (VR): 3 times the load voltage
Output
DC Inductive load Average rectified forward current (I0): Load current or more
unit
COM

4.3.2.2 Protective Circuit for Capacitive Loads
When connecting the loads with large in−rush currents, to minimize their effect, connect
a protection circuit as shown below.
Resistor Inductor
Output Output
terminal terminal
Output Output
unit Capacitive load unit Capacitive load
COM COM
4.3.2.3 Precautions for Overload
The objective for output units with fuses is to prevent a burn out when an output short
circuits, etc. Since it is not possible to protect each element against overload even for
output units with fuses, it is recommended to connect an external fuse for each point.
However, there are cases where it is not possible to protect the elements of the output
unit when a short circuit occurs.
4.3.2.4 Precautions for Leakage Current
When there is a low current load with the triac type output unit, the load may not go OFF
because of the leakage current. If this type of trouble should arise, connect a resistor
in parallel with the load, as shown below.
Resistor
Triac Output
type terminal
output Low current load
unit
COM

4.3.3 Cautions Regarding Input and Output Units

Wiring
Arrange the wiring so that the input and output wiring are separated, and so that the
input and output wiring is separated from the motorized wiring, as so much as possible.
Do not route them through the same duct or wrap them up together.
Separate the wires of input/output from the motorized and high voltage wires by at least
100 mm/3.937 in.
Unit cover
Attach and remove the cover of the input and output unit as shown below.
The unit cover cannot be attached when using the connector for wire−pressed terminal
cable with hood cover in the connector type unit.
Unit cover
Dust proofing label

Do not remove the dust proofing label that is attached to the upper portion of the unit
until the installation and wiring are finished.
Be sure to remove the dust proofing label prior to operation to allow heat radiation.
Dust proofing label

4.4 Wiring the Connector Type I/O Units
4.4.1 Wiring the Connector Type Units
32−point type I/O unit 64−point type I/O unit
CT−2 connector CT−2 connector

terminal terminal
(20 points) (40 points)
(Used twice for one unit) (Used twice for one
unit)
RT−2 relay terminal
RT−2 relay terminal (Used four times for
(Used twice for one unit) one unit, 2 two−branch
type cables are
needed for conecting)
Cable with Cable with

pressure connection pressure
terminal connection
(20 pins) terminal
(40 pins)
Connector for Connector for

wire−pressed terminal wire−pressed terminal
cable cable
(20 pins) (40 pins)
unit)
Flat cable with Flat cable with
connector connector
(20 pins) (40 pins)
unit)
Wiring method
When using connector and relay terminals (* section 4.4.2):
Can be connected using exclusive cables, eliminating the bother of
wiring
With the RT−2 relay terminal, you can control up to 2 A, and
maintenance such as relay replacement is easy
Economical for input wiring and transistor output wiring by the CT−2
connector terminal
next page

When using cable with pressure connection terminal (* section 4.4.3)

The connector converted to a pressure connection terminal using the
connector terminal cable.
The correspondence between the I/O numbers and pressure connection
terminal pin numbers are the same as for connector terminals. (* section
4.4.2)
When using connector for wire−pressed terminal cable (* section 4.4.4)
You can directly connect wires from 0.2 to 0.3 mm2.
Eliminates the bother of wiring connections because the wires can be
connected without removing the covers from the wires.
Can correct wiring mistakes smoothly.
A tool exclusively designed for this purpose is necessary.
When using flat cable (* section 4.4.5)
There is a cable with a connector on only one end.
When using a commercially available flat cable, be sure to use a suitable
connector.
next page

Type of unit 32-point 32-point 64-point 64-point 64-point type

type type type type I/O mixed unit
Input unit Output unit Input unit Output unit
AFP33024−F AFP33484−F AFP33027−F AFP33487−F AFP33428−F
AFP33014−F AFP33584−F AFP33017−F AFP33587−F AFP33528−F
((*Note 1)) AFP33028−F ((*Note 1)) (*Note 1)
AFP
AFP33068−F
F
Input Output
Number of connector pins 20 40 40
Using CT−2 DIN rail mounting AYC1120 AYC1140 AYC1140
terminal connector type
t
terminal
i l
Direct mounting AVC2120 AYC2140 AYC2140
type
Exclusive 1 m/ AYT51203 AYT51403 AYT51403
cable 3.281ft
2 m/ AYT51205 AYT51405 AYT51405
6.562ft
RT−2 relay DIN rail mounting − AY232502 − AY232502 − AY232502
terminal type
Direct mounting − AY232522 − AY232522 − AY232522
type
Exclusive 1 m/ − AY15133 − AY15633 − AY15633
cable 3.281ft
2 m/ − AY15135 − AY15635 − AY15635
6.562ft
Using cable 1 m/3.281ft AYT58203 AYT58403 AYT58403
with
pressure
connection 2 m/6.562ft AYT58205 AYT58405 AYT58405
terminal
Using connector for Housing AXW1204A AXW1404A AXW1404A
wire−pressed
wire pressed terminal (2 pieces) (2 pieces) (2 pieces)
cable
bl
Contact AXW7221 (2 pieces) AXW7221 (4 pieces)
(5 pins/line) (*Note 2) (5 pins/line) (*Note 2)
Semi-cover AXW62001A AXW64001A AXW64001A
(2 pieces) (2 pieces) (2 pieces)
Pressure AXY52000
connector tool
Using flat Flat cable with a 1 m/ − − AFB8541 AFB8541
cable connector on one end 3.281ft
2 m/ − − AFB8542 AFB8542
6.562ft
Connector only AXM120415 AXM140415 AXM140415
Notes
(*1): The RT−2 relay terminal cannot be used in the PNP open
collector output type units AFP33584−F, AFP33587−F, and
AFP33528−F.
(*2): When ordering, please contact your dealer regarding the
minimum quantity.

4.4.2 Connecting the Terminals
4.4.2.1 CT−2 Connector Terminal
For 32−point type I/O units, use a 20−pin type CT−2 connector terminal. For 64−point
type I/O units, use a 40−pin type CT−2 connector terminal.
For connecting the terminal to the terminal block, use M3−sized pressure connection
terminals.
If using the CT−2 connector terminal for the input, connect between the COM
terminals.
If using the CT−2 connector terminal for the output, 24 V DC should be supplied
between (+) and (−) terminals. Power is supplied to drive the internal circuit of the
output unit. Connect between each the (+) terminals and between each the (−)
terminals.
next page

The correspondence between the terminal numbers of CT−2 connector terminal and
the I/O numbers of the I/O unit is shown in the table below.
Correspondence−CT−2 connector terminal and 32−point type I/O unit
32−point type I/O unit
(AFP33024−F, AFP33484−F)
Exclusive cable for connector

terminal (20 pins−20 pins)
CT−2 Connector terminal

(20 pins) (AYC1120)
Terminal Unit Input Output Terminal Unit Input Output

number symbol number number number symbol number number
A1 I1 X0 Y0 B1 II1 X8 Y8
A2 I2 X1 Y1 B2 II2 X9 Y9
A3 I3 X2 Y2 B3 II3 XA YA
A4 I4 X3 Y3 B4 II4 XB YB
A5 I5 X4 Y4 B5 II5 XC YC
A6 I6 X5 Y5 B6 II6 XD YD
A7 I7 X6 Y6 B7 II7 XE YE
A8 I8 X7 Y7 B8 II8 XF YF
A9 I9 COM − B9 II9 COM −
A10 I10 N.C. + B10 II10 N.C. +
Note
The above table shows the I/O numbers assuming connection to
the connector (I, II) on the upper side of the 32−point type I/O
unit. If connection has been made to the connector (III, IV) on the
lower side, the I/O number allocations in the above table should
be read as shown below, e.g.:
A1 . . . . Input X10, Output Y10
B1 . . . . Input X18, Output Y18

Correspondence−CT−2 connector terminal and 64−point type I/O unit

(AFP33027−F, AFP33487−F,
AFP33428−F)
Exclusive cable for

connector terminal
(40 pins−40 pins)
CT−2 Connector terminal

(40 pins) (AYC1140)
Terminal number Input Output Terminal number Input Output

number number number number
A1 X0 Y0 B1 X8 Y8
A2 X1 Y1 B2 X9 Y9
A3 X2 Y2 B3 XA YA
A4 X3 Y3 B4 XB YB
A5 X4 Y4 B5 XC YC
A6 X5 Y5 B6 XD YD
A7 X6 Y6 B7 XE YE
A8 X7 Y7 B8 XF YF
A9 COM − B9 COM −
A10 N.C. + B10 N.C. +
A11 X10 Y10 B11 X18 Y18
A12 X11 Y11 B12 X19 Y19
A13 X12 Y12 B13 X1A Y1A
A14 X13 Y13 B14 X1B Y1B
A15 X14 Y14 B15 X1C Y1C
A16 X15 Y15 B16 X1D Y1D
A17 X16 Y16 B17 X1E Y1E
A18 X17 Y17 B18 X1F Y1F
A20 N.C. + B20 N.C. +
Note
the connector (CN1) of the 64−point type I/O unit. If connection has
been made to the connector (CN2), the I/O number allocations in
the above table should be read as shown below, e.g.:
A11 . . . Input X30, Output Y30

4.4.2.2 RT−2 Relay Terminal
For 32−point type output unit, you can connect two sets of the RT−2 relay terminals with
16 outputs.
For 64−point type output unit, you can connect four sets of the RT−2 relay terminals with
16 outputs by using two−branch type cable.
For connecting the terminal to the terminal block, use M3−sized pressure connection
terminals.
24 V DC should be supplied between the (+) and (−) terminals of the relay terminal. This
supplies the power to drive the relays of the terminal itself and the power to drive the
internal circuit of the output unit.
32−point type output unit to RT−2 64−point type output unit to RT−2
relay terminal relay terminal
32−point type output unit 64−point type output unit
(AFP33484−F) (AFP33487−F, AFP33428−F)
Two−branch type
cable for
relay terminal
(40 pins−20 pins × 2)
Exclusive cable for
relay terminal
(20 pins−20 pins)
The I/O numbers will be smaller for
RT−2 Relay terminal the relay terminal connected with
the shorter cable.
(Output: 16−point)
(AY232502 or AY232522) RT−2 Relay terminal
(Output: 16−point)
(AY232502 or AY232522)
Note
When using the relay RT−2 terminal, the I/O power supply
supplied to the units and the power supply supplied to the RT−2
relay terminals are the same power supply.

Correspondence−RT−2 relay terminal and I/O unit

The correspondence between the terminal numbers of RT−2 relay terminal and the I/O
numbers of the I/O unit is shown in the table below. The output terminals have four
points per common.
Terminal Output number Terminal Output number
number number
0+ Y0 8+ Y8
1+ Y1 9+ Y9
2+ Y2 A+ YA
3+ Y3 B+ YB
COM− Common terminal for COM− Common terminal for
Y0 to Y3 Y8 to YB
4+ Y4 C+ YC
5+ Y5 D+ YD
6+ Y6 E+ YE
7+ Y7 F+ YF
COM− Common terminal for COM− Common terminal for
Y4 to Y7 YC to YF

4.4.3 Connecting the Cable With Pressure Connection Terminal
For 32−point type I/O units, use a 20−pin type cable with pressure connection terminal.
For 64−point type I/O units, use a 40−pin type cable with pressure connection terminal.
The M3.5−sized pressure connection terminals are used for the cable with pressure
connection terminal.
The correspondence between the terminal number of cable with pressure connection
terminals and the I/O numbers of the I/O unit is shown in the table below.
Correspondence−Cable with pressure connection terminal and 32−point type I/O
unit
(AFP33024−F, AFP33484−F)
Cable with pressure

connection terminal
(20 pins)
Terminal Unit Input Output Terminal Unit Input Output

A1 I1 X0 Y0 B1 II1 X8 Y8
A2 I2 X1 Y1 B2 II2 X9 Y9
A3 I3 X2 Y2 B3 II3 XA YA
A4 I4 X3 Y3 B4 II4 XB YB
A5 I5 X4 Y4 B5 II5 XC YC
A6 I6 X5 Y5 B6 II6 XD YD
A7 I7 X6 Y6 B7 II7 XE YE
A8 I8 X7 Y7 B8 II8 XF YF
A9 I9 COM − B9 II9 COM −
A10 I10 N.C. + B10 II10 N.C. +
Note
the connector (I, II) on the upper side of the 32−point type I/O
unit. If connection has been made to the connector (III, IV) on the
lower side, the I/O number allocations in the above table should
be read as shown below, e.g.:
B1 . . . . Input X18, Output Y18

Correspondence−Cable with pressure connection terminal and 64−point type I/O

unit

(AFP33027−F,
AFP33487−F,
AFP33428−F)
Cable with pressure

connection terminal
(40 pins)
…
Terminal number Input Output Terminal number Input Output

A1 X0 Y0 B1 X8 Y8
A2 X1 Y1 B2 X9 Y9
A3 X2 Y2 B3 XA YA
A4 X3 Y3 B4 XB YB
A5 X4 Y4 B5 XC YC
A6 X5 Y5 B6 XD YD
A7 X6 Y6 B7 XE YE
A8 X7 Y7 B8 XF YF
A10 N.C. + B10 N.C. +
A11 X10 Y10 B11 X18 Y18
A12 X11 Y11 B12 X19 Y19
A13 X12 Y12 B13 X1A Y1A
A14 X13 Y13 B14 X1B Y1B
A15 X14 Y14 B15 X1C Y1C
A16 X15 Y15 B16 X1D Y1D
A17 X16 Y16 B17 X1E Y1E
A18 X17 Y17 B18 X1F Y1F
A20 N.C. + B20 N.C. +
Note
the connector (CN1) of the 64−point type I/O unit. If connection has
been made to the connector (CN2), the I/O number allocations in
the above table should be read as shown below, e.g.:
A11 . . . Input X30, Output Y30

4.4.4 Connecting with Connector for Wire−pressed Terminal Cable
This is a connector that allows lose wires to be connected without removing the wire’s
insulation.
The pressure connection tool (AXY52000) is required to connect the loose wires.
Connector for wire−pressed

terminal cable
(20 pins)
Connector for wire−pressed

terminal cable
(40 pins)
Suitable wires (twisted wire)

Size Cross section area Insulation thickness Rated current
AWG22 0.3 mm2
dia 1.5
dia. 1 5 to dia.
dia 1.1
11 3A
AWG24 0.2 mm2
Contact puller pin for rewiring

If there is a wiring mistake or the wire is incorrectly pressure−connected, the contact
puller pin provided with the fitting can be used to remove the contact.
Press the housing against the

pressure connection tool so that the
contact puller pin comes in contact
with this section.

Assembly of connector for wire−pressed terminal cable

The wire end can be directly press−fitted without removing the wire‘s insulation, saving
labor.
Procedure:
1. Bend the contact back from the carrier, and set it in
the pressure connection tool.
2. Insert the wire without removing its insulation until it

stops, and lightly grip the tool.
3. After press−fitting the wire, insert it into the housing.
4. When all wires has been inserted, fit the semi−cover

into place.

4.4.5 Connecting with Flat Cable Connector

Suitable wires (twisted wire)
Size Pitch Rated current
AWG28
1.27 mm 1A
(7 pcs./dia. 0.127)
When connecting with a flat cable connector, the correspondence between the cable
numbers and I/O number is shown in the table below.
Flat cable connection diagram for the 32−point type I/O unit
32−point type I/O unit Connector
10
Connector 1
Connector 2
1 Α
II I
No. 1 side
Correspondence−flat cable number and I/O number (32 points)

Cable Unit Input Output Cable Unit Input Output
1 I1 X0 Y0 11 I6 X5 Y5
2 II1 X8 Y8 12 II6 XD YD
3 I2 X1 Y1 13 I7 X6 Y6
4 II2 X9 Y9 14 II7 XE YE
5 I3 X2 Y2 15 I8 X7 Y7
6 II3 XA YA 16 II8 XF YF
7 I4 X3 Y3 17 I9 COM −
8 II4 XB YB 18 II9 COM −
9 I5 X4 Y4 19 I10 N.C. +
10 II5 XC YC 20 II10 N.C. +
Note
the connector 1 on the upper side of the 32−point type I/O unit.
If connection has been mode to the connector 2 on the lower
side, the I/O number allocation in the above table should be read
as shown below, e.g.:
Cable No.1 . . . . Input X10, Output Y10

Flat cable connection diagram for the 64−point type I/O unit
Flat cable with connector
CN1 CN2
No. 1 side No. 1 side
Correspondence−flat cable number and I/O number (64 points)

Cable number Input Output Cable number Input Output
1 X0 Y0 21 X10 Y10
2 X8 Y8 22 X18 Y18
3 X1 Y1 23 X11 Y11
4 X9 Y9 24 X19 Y19
5 X2 Y2 25 X12 Y12
6 XA YA 26 X1A Y1A
7 X3 Y3 27 X13 Y13
8 XB YB 28 X1B Y1B
9 X4 Y4 29 X14 Y14
10 XC YC 30 X1C Y1C
11 X5 Y5 31 X15 Y15
12 XD YD 32 X1D Y1D
13 X6 Y6 33 X16 Y16
14 XE YE 34 X1E Y1E
15 X7 Y7 35 X17 Y17
16 XF YF 36 X1F Y1F
17 COM − 37 COM −
18 COM − 38 COM −
19 N.C. + 39 N.C. +
20 N.C. + 40 N.C. +
Note
the connector (CN1) on the left side. If connection has been made
to the connector (CN2) on the right side, the I/O number
allocations in the above table should be read as shown below,
e.g.:

4.5 Wiring the Terminal Type I/O Units
4.5 Wiring the Terminal Type I/O Units
4.5.1 Wiring the Terminal Type Units

Pressure connection terminals
M3.5 terminal screws are used for the terminals of input and output units. The following
pressure connection terminals are recommended for the wiring to the terminals.
Fork type terminal Round type terminal
7.2 mm/0.283 in. 7.2 mm/0.283 in.

or less or less
Wiring to terminal block

If the screws at both ends of the terminal block of the terminal type input and output units
are loosened, the terminal block can be pulled out while the wiring is still connected.
Do not forget to tighten these screws after the wiring is completed.
Terminal type
I/O unit
Screws
Terminal block

4.6 Safety Measures
4.6 Safety Measures
4.6.1 Safety Instructions
4.6.1.1 Precautions Regarding System Design
In certain applications, malfunction may occur for the following reasons:

Power ON timing differences between the FP3/FP10SH system and I/O
or motorized devices
An operation time lag when a momentary power failure occurs
Abnormality in the FP3/FP10SH, power supply circuit, or other devices
In order to prevent a malfunction resulting in system shutdown choose the adequates
safety measures listed in the following:
4.6.1.2 Interlock Circuit
When a motor clockwise/counter-clockwise operation is controlled, provide an interlock

circuit that prevents clockwise and counter-clockwise signals from inputting into the
motor at the same time.
4.6.1.3 Emergency Stop Circuit
Add an emergency stop circuit to controlled devices in order to prevent a system

shutdown or an irreparable accident when malfunction occurs.
4.6.1.4 Start Up Sequence
The FP3/FP10SH should be operated after all of the outside devices are energized. To
keep this sequence, the following measures are recommended:
Set the mode selector from PROG. mode to RUN mode after power is
supplied to all of the outside devices.
Program the FP3/FP10SH so as to disregard the inputs and outputs until
the outside devices are energized.

4.6 Safety Measures
4.6.1.5 Alarm Function
When an alarm occurs, the FP3/FP10SH turns OFF the output and stops operation.
Even while in this condition, take the appropriate safety precautions outside of the
FP3/FP10SH to ensure no malfunction or damage is transmitted to anywhere else in
the system.
4.6.2 Momentary Power Failures
If a momentary power failure occurs, the resulting operations will differ depending on
the duration of the power failure.
Less than 10 ms: Operation continues.
Between 10 ms and 20 ms: Depending on the conditions, the operation
may continue or may stop.
More than 20 ms: The unit resets and the output turns OFF. When the
power returns, operation starts from its initial conditions.
4.6.3 Alarm Output
The alarm output goes ON when the watchdog timer (* section 4.6.3.1) is activated by
a program error (eg., infinite loop) or an error in the hardware itself.
The alarm output terminal has two relay contacts, N.O. (normally open) and N.C.
(normally closed) on the power supply unit, which can be used as external alarm
signals.
Power supply unit
Power supply
Lamp for
alarm signal L
Note
Be aware that the alarm output for power supply unit that are
installed to the expansion backplanes will not work.

4.6 Safety Measures
4.6.3.1 Watchdog Timer
The watchdog timer is a program error and hardware error detection timer. It goes ON
when the scan time exceeds 640 ms.
When the watchdog timer is activated, at the same time the ALARM LED lights, the
ALARM contacts on the power supply unit go ON, all outputs to the output units are
turned OFF and the unit is put in halted state. (The system is in a non-processing state
that includes communications with programming tools as well.)

Chapter 5
Procedure Until Operation
5.1 Before Turning ON the Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 3
5.1.1 Check Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 3
5.1.2 Procedure Up To Trial Operation . . . . 5 − 4
5.2 Programming with NPST−GR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 5

5.2.1 Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 5
5.2.2 Configuring NPST−GR . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 6
5.3 Programming with an FP Programmer II . . . . . 5 − 9

5.3.1 Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 9
5.4 Operation of FP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 11

5.4.1 RAM and ROM Operations . . . . . . . 5 − 11
5.4.2 Holding the Data During Power
Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 12
5.4.3 Precautions for ROM Operation . . . 5 − 13
5.4.4 Writing to ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 15
5.5 Operation of FP10SH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 19

5.5.1 RAM, ROM and IC Memory Card
Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 19
5.5.2 Holding the Data During Power
Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 21
5.6 How To Use a ROM Operation Board

(for FP10SH only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 22
5.6.1 Overview of FP10SH ROM Operation
Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 22
5.6.2 Function of ROM Operation Board . 5 − 23
5.6.3 Precautions for ROM Operation . . . 5 − 25
5.6.4 Transfer Data from RAM to FROM . 5 − 27
5.6.5 Writing to ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 28
next page
5.7 How To Use IC Card Board

(for FP10SH only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 32
5.7.1 Overview of FP10SH IC Card Board 5 − 32
5.7.2 Function of IC Card Board . . . . . . . . 5 − 33
5.7.3 Precautions for IC Memory Card
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 36

5.1 Before Turning ON the Power
5.1.1 Check Items
After wiring, be sure to check the items below before turning ON the power supply to
the FP3/FP10SH system.
Item Description
Unit mounting −Does the unit type match the device list during the design stage?
status −Are the unit mounting screws properly tightened?
−Is the unit dust protected label detached?
Power supply unit −Is power supply voltage supplied correctly?
−For power supply units AFP3631 and AFP3638, are the voltage
switch terminals shorted together for 100 to 120 V AC operation
and open for 200 to 240 V AC operation?
−Are the terminal block mounting screws properly tightened?
−Is the wire size correct?
Input/Output units −Does the wiring of connector and terminal match?
−Is the operating voltage of I/O correct?
−Are the terminal block mounting screws properly tightened?
−Is the wire size correct?
Expansion cable −Are the expansion cables properly connected?
Board number −Are they set so that numbers are not identical?
setting (If expansion backplane are used, the numbers for the board
number set switch must be set.)
Setting of CPU −Is the mode selector set to the PROG. mode?
−Is the backup battery connector firmly connected?
−Has the DIP switch of CPU been set correctly?
ROM mounting −Has the ROM been mounted in the correct direction?
status −Has the ROM been securely installed? Are the lead feet firmly
secured and not likely to come loose?
−For the FP3, does the ROM type match the position of device
(ROM type) selector?

5.1.2 Procedure Up To Trial Operation
After installing and wiring, perform the trial operation by following procedure.
Procedure:
1. Before turning ON the power, check the items
described on the previous page
2. Turn ON the power
3. Check that the power supply unit’s POWER LED and
CPU’s PROG. LED are ON
4. Enter the program
When using a programming tool, perform the operation “Clear Program”
before inputting. Enter the program using the programming tool. Use the
proramming tool’s “total check function” to check for syntax errors.
5. Check output wiring
Use the forced output function to check the output wiring.
6. Check input wiring
Check the input wiring by watching the ON/OFF status of the input LEDs of
input unit or by using the monitoring function of the programming tool.
7. Switch the mode selector from PROG. to RUN mode
8. If the RUN LED turns ON, check the operation of the
program
9. Edit the program (debug) if necessary
If there is an error in the operation, check the program using the monitoring
function of the programming tool. And then correct the program.
10. Save the edited program
We highly recommend to save the created program onto a floppy disk.
Printing out is also possible.
The program can also be saved on ROM for FP3 and on an IC memory
card or ROM for FP10SH.

5.2 Programming with NPST−GR
5.2.1 Preparations
Baud rate selector

PC
RS422/RS232C
conversion adapter
(for FP10SH:
not necessary)
FP3 baud rate selector FP10SH baud rate selector
Connecting the FP3/FP10SH and a Computer

For FP3
An FP PC cable, RS422/RS232C conversion adapter (AFP8550) and commercially
available RS232C cable are required to connect a personal computer to FP3.
For FP10SH
The RS232C cable (AFB85813) is required to connect a personal computer to FP10SH.
Note
NPST−GR Ver 4. or later can be used with the FP10SH.
Setting the baud rate of CPU

Set the baud rate of the CPU using the baud rate selector of FP3 or operation condition
switches (dip switches) of FP10SH.
Set the baud rate of the computer (NPST−GR) to match that of the CPU. (*section 5.2.2)
Computer settings
Set your personal computer’s RS232C parameter to asynchronous. For the setting
procedure, refer to the operation manual that came with your computer.

5.2.2 Configuring NPST−GR
Depending on the PLC type and communication speed (baud rate), it is necessary to
set the basic configuration for NPST−GR. Be sure to set these items (parameters)
before beginning programming.
SCREEN MODE
[MONO/COLOR]
Select either black−and−white (monochrome) or color for the display of the NPST−GR
screen mode.
PLC TYPE
Select the PLC (programmable controller) type that is being used.
Communication format
The baud rate setting must match that of the CPU that is connected. (* section 5.2.1)
LOGGED DRIVE/DIRECTORY
Select the disk drive and directory from which the program and file are to be read.
NOTE DISPLAY
Select whether or not to display the title and the title is to be added to the filename when
displaying the filename.
PROGRAMMING MODE
[Ladder symbol mode, Boolean ladder mode and Boolean non−ladder mode]
Select the inputting method for creating and editing the program.

5.2.2.1 Setting Method

Call up the “NPST CONFIGURATION” menu
1. Press the <ESC> key to display the “NPSTMENU.”
2. Select “1. NPST CONFIGURATION” from “NPST
CONFIGURATION” and press the <ENTER> key.
The “NPST CONFIGURATION” menu appears.
Set the configuration
Select the item to be set with the <↑> and <↓> keys.
PLC TYPE
1. Press the <ENTER> key. A list of the corresponding PLC
(programmable controller) types appears.
2. Select PLC type with the <↑> and <↓> keys.
Select either “FP3 10K”, “FP3/FP−C 16K” or “FP10SH 30−120K”
according to the information in the table below.
CPU type Order number Selection
FP3 CPU AFP3210C−F and AFP3211C−F FP3 10K
AFP3220C−F FP3/FP−C 16K
FP10SH CPU AFP6211V3 and AFP6221V3 FP10SH 30−120K
NPST−GR Ver.3 NPST−GR Ver.4

FP1 0.9 FP0 2.7k
FP1/FP−M 2.7k FP0 5k
FP1/FP−M 5k FP1 0.9
FP3 10k FP1/FP−M 2.7k
FP3/FP−C 16k FP1/FP−M 5k
FP5 16k FP3 10k
FP10/FP10S 30k FP3/FP−C 16k
FP10 60k FP5 16k
FP5 24k
FP10/FP10S 30k
FP10 60k
FP10SH 30−120k
3. Press the <ENTER> key. The selected PLC

(programmable controller) type appears.

Log the setting items (parameters)

After setting the items (parameters), log the settings following the procedure below.
Procedure:
1. Press the <F1> key. The confirmation screen below
appears.
“LOG PARAMETERS? [Y/N]”
“SAVE DISK? [YES/NO]”
2. Verify that there are no mistakes in the settings.

If there is a mistake, press the <N> key and set the
parameters correctly.
3. Select whether or not to write the settings to disk
with <←> and <→> keys.
If you select [YES], then the new parameters will take
effect the next time the power is turned ON.
4. Press the <Y> key.
The settings are logged. If you selected [YES] in step
3., then the message below appears.
“SAVEING TO THE DISK COMPLETED.”
Completion of configuration setting

Procedure:
Press the <ESC> key to complete the configuration
settings. The following message will appear if the
settings are not recorded. If it is necessary to record
the settings, press the <N> key and proceed from
step 3. If it is not necessary to record the settings,
press the <Y> key to complete the settings.
“EXIT OK? (Y/N)”

5.3 Programming with an FP Programmer II
5.3.1 Preparations
FP3 baud rate selector
FP peripheral cable
AFP5520(50 cm/19.69 in.)
AFP5523(3 m/9.84 ft.)
Baud rate selector
FP programmer II
AFP1114V2
Connecting the FP3 and an FP programmer II

An FP peripheral cable is required to connect an FP3 to an FP programmer II.
− FP peripheral cable :
50 cm/19.69 in (AFP5520)
3 m/9.84 ft. (AFP5523)
Setting the baud rate of the CPU
Set the baud rate of CPU using the baud rate selector.
When using the FP programmer II, a baud rate of either 9,600 bps or 19,200 bps can
be selected.
Storage location of programs
The programs input with the FP programmer II are stored one after another in the FP3’s
built-in memory (RAM).

Downloading a program
Procedure:
1. Connect FP programmer II and the FP3 CPU using
the FP peripheral cable.
2. Set the mode selector of the CPU to PROG.
3. Press the keys on the FP programmer II, as shown
below, to clear all the data stored.
(−) SHIFT (DELT)
ACLR 0 ENT
OP SC INST
4. Enter the address from where you want to enter

instructions. Use the alphanumeric keys to enter the
address. In the example, instructions are entered
from address 0, therefore, press to read its
ACLR 0
READ
contents.
5. Download the program to the FP3 CPU.
Notes
An alarm will sound if you try to download a program while in
RUN mode or if you press the wrong keys. If an alarm sounds,
press the key and redo the download operation from the
ACLR
beginning.
The first time you input a program, be sure to execute the
program clear procedure (step 3, above) before starting input.
Previous FP programmers (AFP1111A, AFP1112A, AFP1111
and AFP1112) cannot be used with the FP10SH.

5.4 Operation of FP3
5.4.1 RAM and ROM Operations
5.4.1.1 Comparison of RAM and ROM Operations
Item RAM operation ROM operation

Operating
method Memory
Built−in
selector
RAM
Optional
memory
The FP3 CPU operates using The optional memory (EPROM or

built−in RAM. Have the memory EEPROM) is installed for ROM
selector set to the RAM position. operation. Have the memory
selector set to the ROM position.
Execution of The program written into the RAM When the mode is changed from
program is executed. PROG. mode to RUN mode, if the
power is turned ON while the in the
RUN mode, the program written
into the ROM are loaded into the
RAM and the program is executed.
Memory backup The program, system register, Since the program and system
during a power operation memory, and other data, registers are written into the ROM,
failure that is stored in the RAM are backup is not necessary. Since the
saved using a backup battery. hold type data of the operation
memory is written into the RAM,
backup is necessary using the
backup battery.
Maintenance It is necessary to replace the If a program does not use the hold
backup battery when voltage is type data of the operation memory,
low. then operation without being
connected to the backup battery is
possible.
Miscellaneous Options are unnecessary. Optional memory (EPROM or
(options) EEPROM) is necessary. If you are
using the EPROM, a commercially
available ROM writer is necessary
for writing.

5.4.2 Holding the Data During Power Failure
5.4.2.1 Backup of Operation Memory
The internal relay, data registers and other hold type data are backed up by the battery.
When performing ROM operation with the internal relay, data registers, and other such
data set to non− hold type data, you can perform operation without being connected
to a backup battery.
5.4.2.2 Setting the Battery Error Warnings
With the exception of FP3 CPU version 4.4 or greater, if the CPU is set with the battery
error warning disabled, the ERROR LED does not light even if operating while not being
connected to a backup battery. Set the battery error warning according to the following
procedure:
Procedure:
For NPST−GR software
1.
Press the <ESC> key to display the [NPST MENU].
In the [NPST MENU] screen, select the [SYSTEM
REGISTER] option from the [PLC CONFIGURATION]
and press <ENTER> key.
2. In the [PLC CONFIGURATION] screen, press the <F8>
key and select the [ACT ON ERROR] option. Then set
the [BATTERY ERROR] to [DISABLE].
3. Press the <F1> key to save the setting contents.
4. Press the <ESC> key and then the <Y> key to return
to the original screen.
For FP Programmer II
1. Use the following key sequence for the system
register
(−)
OP
5 0 ENT
2. To read contents of system register 4 , press the

following keys
READ
4 Β
3. To disable the battery error warning, press the

following keys.
ACLR 1 WRT

5.4.3 Precautions for ROM Operation
Once the ROM has been installed, be aware that operation varies as described below,
depending on the position of the memory selector when the power supply is turned ON.
Power is turned ON with the memory selector set to ROM position
When the power is turned ON, the contents of the memory (ROM) is automatically
transferred into the built−in RAM. Note that the previous contents of the RAM will be
erased.
Automatically transferred into the built−in RAM
Power is turned ON with the memory selector set to RAM position

Even if the memory (ROM) is installed, the programming tools read the contents of the
built−in RAM.
In order to verify the contents of the memory (ROM), you can transmit the contents to
the built−in RAM using your programming tool (* section 5.4.3.1).
To then perform ROM operation, turn the power OFF, set the memory selector to the
ROM position. And then the power is turned ON and restart the system.
When the power is tuned ON, there is a possibility

that the contents of built−in RAM and ROM will differ.

5.4.3.1 Transfer Data From ROM to the Built−in RAM
Procedure:
Using NPST−GR software
1. Press the <CTRL> and <ESC> keys together to
switch to the online monitor mode.
Select the [COPY PROGRAM BETWEEN ROM & RAM]
option from the [PROGRAM MANAGER] menu. And
then press the <ENTER> key.
3. After verifying that the menu reads [COPY ROM TO
RAM]. Press the <F1> key.
Using FP programmer II
Press the following key operations.
(−)
ACLR
OP
9 0 ENT WRT

5.4.4 Writing to ROM
5.4.4.1 Using a Commercially Available ROM Writer Via EEPROM

Procedure:
1. Turn OFF the power and attach the master memory
(EEPROM) to the CPU.
Set the device (ROM type) selector to the EEPROM
position.
2. Verify that the mode selector is set to PROG. mode
and then turn ON the power.
3. When using the NPST−GR or FP programmer II,
transfer the contents of the built−in RAM to the
master memory (EEPROM). (* refer to the next page)
4. Turn OFF the power, and detach the programmed

master memory (EEPROM) from the CPU and attach it
in the commercially available ROM writer.
5. Transfer the contents of master memory (EEPROM)

to the ROM writer
Transfer
next page

6. Remove the master memory (EEPROM) and install

the memory (EPROM) and write the contents of the
ROM writer to the memory (EPROM).
Write
Note
Refer to the manual of commercially available ROM writer for
operation procedure and setting of ROM.
Transfer data from the built−in RAM to master memory (EEPROM)

Procedure:
3. Press the <F2> key to switch to [COPY RAM TO
ROM].
4. Press the <F1> key. The contents of the built−in RAM
are transfered to EEPROM.
Using the FP programmer II

Press the following key operations.
(−)
ACLR
OP
9 9 ENT WRT
Note
If you want to write the contents of built−in RAM of the FP3 to the
master memory (EEPROM), be sure to verify that the memory
selector is set to the RAM position before turning ON the power.

5.4.4.2 Using NPST−GR and a Commercially Available ROM Writer

Procedure:
1. In the NPST−GR at the computer, select the [LOAD
TO/FROM ROM WRITER] option to transfer the pro-
gram to the commercially available ROM writer.
2. Attach the memory (EPROM) in the commercially

available ROM witer.
Write the data to the memory (EPROM) with the
commercially available ROM writer.
Note
Refer to the manual for the commercially available ROM writer for
the proper settings.
Transfer program from the computer with NPST−GR to the ROM writer
Procedure:
1. In the [NPST CONFIGURATION] menu, press the
<SHIFT> and <F6> keys together to display the [ROM
CONFIG].
<ROM CONFIG> window
TRANS RATE (bps) [ 9600 Σ 4800 Σ 2400 Σ 1200 Σ 600 Σ 300 ]
DATA LENGTH [ 8 Σ 7 ]
PARITY CHECK [ NO Σ EV Σ OD ]
STOP BIT [ 1 Σ 2 ]
next page

2. Set the transmission rate and communication format

that matches that for the ROM writer with, and press
<F1> key to save the settings.
3. Press the <ESC> key, and select [PROGRAM
MANAGER] from the [NPST MENU] then select the
[LOAD TO/FROM ROM WRITER] option. Press the
<ENTER> key.
[LOAD TO/FROM ROM WRITER]
READ WRITE VRFY
INTEL HEX MOTOROLA [S]
SERIAL PORT CENTRNICS PORT FILE
NO PASSWORD WITH PASSWORD
F1 : EXECUTE.
4. Specify the transmission format and connection

method appropriate for the ROM writer and then
select [WRITE]. Press the <F1> key. The program is
transfered to the ROM writer.

5.5 Operation of FP10SH
5.5.1 RAM, ROM and IC Memory Card Operations
5.5.1.1 Comparison of RAM, ROM and IC Memory Card Operation
Item RAM operation ROM operation IC memory card

operation
Operating
method
Built−in
RAM ROM operation board
or IC card board
This operates based on The optional ROM The optional IC memory

built−in RAM of CPU. Set operating board is card and IC card board
the program memory installed for ROM are installed for IC
switch (SW5) to OFF operation. Set the program memory card operation.
(* section 2.5.1.4). memory switch (SW5) to Set the program memory
ON. (* section 2.5.1.4). switch (SW5) to ON.
(* section 2.5.1.4).
Execution of The program written into When the power is turned Turning the power ON will
program the RAM is executed. ON, the program written transferred the program
into ROM are transferred (file named AUTOEXEC.
into the RAM and the SPG) of the IC memory
program is executed. card into the RAM and
execute the program.
Using the F14
(PGRD)/P14 (PPGRD)
instructions, it is possible
to read out the program
(with an arbitrary file
name) stored in the IC
memory card.
next page

Item RAM operation ROM operation IC memory card

operation
Memory The program, system Since the contents of As the program and the
backup during register and operation program and the system contents of the system
a power failure memory that is stored in register are written to the registers are written onto
the RAM are saved using ROM, backup is not the IC memory card,
the backup battery. necessary. Since the hold backup is not necessary.
type data of the operation As the hold type data of
memory is written to the the operation memory is
RAM, it is backed up by written to the RAM,
the backup battery. backup is necessary by
the backup battery.
Maintenance It is necessary to replace If a program does not use If the program does not
the backup battery when the hold type data of the use the hold type data of
voltage is low. operation memory, it is the operation memory, it is
possible to operate without possible to operate without
being connected to the the backup battery (when
backup battery. using the SRAM type IC
memory card, it is
necessary to replace the
battery of the IC memory
card.).
Miscellaneous Options are unnecessary. The optional ROM The optional IC memory
(options) operation board and either card and IC card board
the EPROM or FROM is are necessary.
necessary. If you are
using the EPROM, a
commercially available
ROM writer is necessary
for writing.
The NPST−GR version
4.2 or greater is
necessary.

5.5.2 Holding the Data During Power Failure
5.5.2.1 Backup of Operation Memory
The internal relay, data registers and other hold type data are backed up by the battery.
When performing ROM operation or IC memory card operation with the internal relay,
data registers, and other such data set to non− hold type data, you can perform
operation without being connected to a backup battery.
5.5.2.2 Setting the Battery Error Warnings
If the FP10SH CPU is set with the battery error warning disabled using system register
4, the ERROR LED does not light even if operating while not being connected to a
battery.
Set the battery error warning according to the following procedure:
Procedure:
For NPST−GR software
In the [NPST MENU] screen, select the [SYSTEM
REGISTER] option from the [PLC CONFIGURATION]
and press the <ENTER> key.
2. In the [PLC CONFIGURATION] menu, press the <F8>
key and select the [ACT ON ERROR] option. Then set
the [BATTERY ERROR] to [DISABLE].
3. Press the <F1> key to save the setting contents.
4. Press the <ESC> key and then the <Y> key to return
to the original screen.

5.6 How To Use a ROM Operation Board (for FP10SH only)
5.6.1 Overview of FP10SH ROM Operation Board
FP10SH CPU (version 2 or greater)
Built−in RAM
Program Data
2) [COPY RAM
TO ROM]
1) [COPY PROGRAM]
3) [ROM TO RAM]
4) When operation
condition
switches (SW5
of lower dip
switches) for
ROM operation
Comment turned ON
User ROM
memory
ROM operation board
1) You can copy programs and comments into the FP10SH using [COPY
PROGRAM] in the NPST−GR. At this time, the program is stored in the
built−in RAM of the FP10SH and the comment is stored in the comment
memory of the ROM operation board. (* section 5.6.2)
2) You can copy programs and data of the built−in RAM of the FP10SH into
the user ROM of ROM operation board using [COPY RAM TO ROM] in
the NPST−GR. (* section 5.6.4)
3) You can copy programs and data in the user ROM of ROM operation
board into the built−in RAM of the FP10SH using [ROM TO RAM] in the
NPST−GR. (* section 5.6.3)
4) Turning ON the power when the operation condition switches (SW5 of
lower dip switches) is ON, will automatically transfer the program and
data stored in the user ROM of ROM operation board into the built−in
RAM of the FP10SH (* section 5.6.3).

5.6.2 Function of ROM Operation Board
5.6.2.1 Comment Storager Function
The comment storage function has been added to the FP10SH. Use NPST−GR version
4 to store the comments to the ROM operation board.
There are three types of comments: the line space comment, the comment sentence
and I/O comment.
Comment
Storage to user ROM

With NPST−GR version 4.2 or greater, by selecting the [PROG & I/O CMT] of the
[LOAD A PROGRAM TO PLC] menu, the program on the NPST−GR is automatically
compressed and stored in the built−in RAM of FP10SH CPU and the comment is
automatically compressed and stored in the comment memory inside the user ROM
of the ROM operation board.
Comment

Reading from the user ROM

Select the [PROG & I/O CMT] option of the [LOAD A PROGRAM FROM PLC] menu to
read the built−in RAM and the data of the comment memory to the NPST−GR.
Comment
5.6.2.2 Precautions for Comment Storage
To erase data in the comment memory on the ROM operation board, select the [PROG
& I/O CMT] option of the program erase function of NPST−GR.
When storing the after compressing the comment, approximately 1MB of comment can
be stored. Otherwise, approximately 256kB of comment can be stored.
To compress the comment data, you must have the compression software LHA in the
current directory and 530kB of open area in the main memory.

5.6.3 Precautions for ROM Operation
Once the ROM has been installed, be aware that operation varies as described below,
depending on the position of the program memory selector when the power supply is
turned ON.
Power is turned ON with program memory selector set to ON (ROM) position

When the power is turned ON, the contents memory (ROM) is automatically transferred
into the built−in RAM. Note that the previous contents of the RAM will be erased.
Power is turned ON with program memory selector set to OFF (RAM) position
Even if the memory (ROM) is installed, the programming tools read the contents of the
built−in RAM.
In order to verify the contents of the memory (ROM), you can transmit the contents to
the built−in RAM using your programming tool (* section 5.6.3.1).
To then perform ROM operation, turn the power OFF, set the memory selector to the
ON (ROM) position. And then the power is turned ON and restart the system.
When the power is tuned ON, there is a possibility

that the contents of built−in RAM and ROM will differ.

5.6.3.1 Transfer Data From ROM to the Built−in RAM
Procedure:
RAM]. Press the <F1> key.

5.6.4 Transfer Data from RAM to FROM
5.6.4.1 Method for Transferring From RAM to FROM
Select the [COPY RAM TO ROM] function in the [PROGRAM MANAGER] function of
NPST−GR to transfer the program and data of the CPU to the ROM. You can specify
the start and end address for each area WL, WR, DT, FL, SV, EV, and LD.
Procedure:
3. Press the <F2> key to switch to [COPY RAM TO ROM]
4. Press the <F3> key to call up switch on the menu,
and specify the start and end address of the data file.
5. Press the <F1> key to transfer.
5.6.4.2 Storage Capacity of User ROM
The potential storage capacity of user ROM is:

Program capacity (Number of program step)
Data capacity (Total data file capacity)
+ System register capacity (Fixed value: 2 k words)
Total number of words
The largest number potential value of the above is 127 k words.

Editing of the program cannot be done during ROM operation. Transfer the data after
turning the program memory selector OFF. (* section 5.6.5.1)
5.6.5 Writing to ROM
It is possible to write to the master memory (Flash ROM: AFP5208) when it is installed
in the CPU, however the memory (EPROM: AFP5209) cannot be written with anything
other than a commercially available ROM writer.
5.6.5.1 Writing of Master Memory (FROM) and Memory (EPROM)

Procedure:
1. Turn the power OFF and install the ROM operation
board installed with the master memory (FROM). Turn
OFF the operation condition switches (program
memory selector: lower dip switches SW5) of CPU.
2. Verify that the PROG. mode has activated and turn
the power ON.
3. Using the NPST−GR, transfer the contents of the
built−in RAM to master memory (FROM). (* [COPY
PROGRAM BETWEEN ROM & RAM])
4. When performing ROM operation, set the operation
condition switches (program memory selector: lower
dip switches SW5) of the CPU to ON, and then turn
the power ON.
next page

5. Turn the power OFF and detach the master memory

(FROM) from the CPU. Attach it to the commercially
available ROM writer.
6. Transfer the contents of master memory (FROM) to

the ROM writer.
Transfer
7. Detach the master memory (FROM) and attach the

memory (EPROM) and begin writing.
Write
Notes
Refer to the commercially available ROM writer manual
regarding the setting and writing method. If a passwords is on
the CPU, it is possible to create a password for master
memory.
When writing the contents of the FP10SH built−in RAM to
master memory (FROM), be sure to verify that the operation
condition switches (program memory selector: lower dip
switches SW5) is OFF position before turning the power ON.

Transfer using the NPST−GR software

Use the [LOAD TO/FROM ROM WRITER] option of NPST−GR version 4.2 or later to
directly transfer the commercially available ROM writer.
Procedure:
1. In the [NPST CONFIGURATION] menu, press the
<SHIFT> and <F6> keys to display the [ROM
CONFIG].
<ROM CONFIG> Window
TRANS RATE (bps) [ 9600 Σ 4800 Σ 2400 Σ 1200 Σ 600 Σ 300 ]
DATA LENGTH [ 8 Σ 7 ]
PARITY CHECK [ NO Σ EV Σ OD ]
STOP BIT [ 1 Σ 2 ]
2. Set the transmission rate and communication format

that matches that for the ROM writer with, and press
<F1> to save the settings.
3. Press the <ESC> key, and select [PROGRAM
MANAGER] from the [NPST MENU] then select the
[LOAD TO/FROM ROM WRITER] option. Press the
<ENTER> key.
[LOAD TO/FROM ROM WRITER]
READ WRITE VRFY
INTEL HEX MOTOROLA [S]
SERIAL PORT CENTRNICS PORT FILE
NO PASSWORD WITH PASSWORD
F1 : EXECUTE.
4. Specify the transmission format and connection

method appropriate for the ROM writer and then
select [WRITE]. Press the <F1> key. The data is
transfered to the ROM writer.
. next page

5. Attach the memory to the commercially available

ROM writer. Write the data to the memory with the
ROM writer.
Note
Refer to the commercially available ROM writer manual regarding
the setting and writing method. If a passwords is on the CPU, it is
possible to create a password for master memory.

5.7 How To Use IC Card Board (for FP10SH only)
5.7.1 Overview of FP10SH IC Card Board
FP10SH CPU
Built−in RAM
Program Data
2) [COPY RAM TO
ROM] in
NPST−GR
1) [COPY PROGRAM] 3) [COPY ROM TO

in NPST−GR RAM] in
NPST−GR
5) When operation
condition switches
(SW5 of lower dip
switches) turned
AUTOEXEC.SDT ON
Comment file 4) [IC CARD MENU]

Comment in NPST−GR
AUTOEXEC.SPG
memory
DOS format area
<IC memory card>
IC card board
1) You can copy programs and comments an be written into the FP10SH
using [COPY PROGRAM] in the NPST−GR. At this time, program is
stored in the built−in RAM of the FP10SH and the comment is stored in
the comment memory of the IC card board. (* section 5.7.2).
2) The program and data of the built−in RAM of the FP10SH can be written
into the DOS format area of the IC memory card using [COPY RAM TO
ROM] in the NPST−GR. (* section 5.7.2.3).
3) You can copy the program and data in the DOS format area of the IC
memory card is written into the built−in RAM of the FP10SH using
[COPY ROM TO RAM] in the NPST−GR. (* section 5.7.3).
. next page

4) You can program and comment on the floppy disk or hard disk is written
into the DOS format area of the IC memory card using [IC CARD MENU]
in the NPST−GR. (* section 6.2)
5) If the power is turned ON with the operation condition switches (SW5 of
lower dip switches, program memory selector) set to ON, the program
and data in the DOS format area of the IC memory card automatically
transfer into the built−in RAM FP10SH. (* section 5.7.3).
5.7.2 Function of IC Card Board
5.7.2.1 Comment Storage Function
The comment storage function has been added to the FP10SH. Use NPST−GR version
4 to store the comments to the IC memory card.
There are three types of comments: the line space comment, the comment sentence
and I/O comment.
Comment
Storage to IC memory card

With NPST−GR version 4.2 or greater, by selecting the [PROG & I/O CMT] of the [LOAD
A PROGRAM TO PLC] menu, the program on the NPST−GR is automatically
compressed and stored in the built−in RAM and the comment is automatically
compressed and stored that uses the comment memory of the IC memory card.
Comment
Note
The IC card board (AFP6209A) has a built−in 512kB comment
storage memory.

Reading from IC memory card

Select the [PROG & I/O CMT] option of the [LOAD A PROGRAM FROM PLC] memu
to read the data of the built−in RAM and the comment memory to the NPST−GR.
Comment
To erase data in the comment memory on the IC memory card, select the [PROG & I/O
CMT] option of the program erase function of NPST−GR.
When storing the after compressing the comment, approximately 2MB of comment can
be stored. Otherwise, approximately 512kB of comment can be stored.
To compress the comment data, you must have the compression software LHA in the
current directory and 530kB of open area in the main memory.
5.7.2.3 Transfer Data from RAM to IC Memory Card
Select the [COPY RAM TO ROM] option in the NPST−GR [PROGRAM MANAGER]
menu to transfer the program and data of the CPU to the IC memory card. Specify the
start and end address for each area WL, WR, DT, FL, SV, EV, and LD.
next page

Type of file created by the IC memory card

Type File name Description
Program AUTOEXEC.SPG Program automatic start up
Data AUTOEXEC.SDT Readable and editable with the NPST−GR data
register edit function
Note
If the stored data exceeds 25,472 words it becomes a
AUTOEXEC.LDT data file.
5.7.2.4 Precautions for Data File Creation
Data files cannot be created with the IC card menu of NPST−GR, data register edit
function or F14 (PGRD)/P14(PPGRD) instructions.
Refer to section 6.2.4 for the data storage capacity of IC memory card.
Procedure:
3. Press the <F2> key to switch to [COPY RAM TO
ROM].
4. Press the <F3> key to call up switch on the menu,
and specify the start and end address of the data file.
5. Press the <F1> key to transfer.

5.7.3 Precautions for IC Memory Card Operation
Once the IC memory card has been installed, be aware that operation varies as
described below, depending on the position of the program memory selector (SW5 of
lower dip switches) of operation condition switch when the power is turned ON.
Power is turned ON when program memory selector (SW5) of operation condition

switches set to ON position.
When the power is turned ON, the program file name <AUTOEXEC> of the IC memory
card is automatically transferred into the built−in RAM. Note that the previous contents
of the RAM will be erased.
Power is turned ON when program memory selector (SW5) of operation condition

switches set to OFF position.
Even if the IC memory card is installed, the programming tool read the contents of the
built−in RAM.
When operating the program that is written into the IC memory card, set the program
memory selector (SW5) of the operation condition switches to ON position and then the
power is turned ON and restart the system.
When the power is turned ON with the program memory selector

(SW5) set to OFF, it is possible that the contents of the built−in RAM
and the IC memory card will be different.
next page

Notes
Refer to chapter 6 for details about how to write to the
program to the IC memory card.
Refer to section 2.5.1.4 for details about how to set the
operation condition switches.
5.7.3.1 Transfer Data From IC Memory Card To Built−in RAM
Procedure:
RAM] and press the <F1> key.


Chapter 6
IC Memory Card
6.1 Overview of IC Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 − 3
6.2 Configuration of IC Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . 6 − 6

6.2.1 Program Memory and Expansion
Memory Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 − 6
6.2.2 IC Memory Card Formatting
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 − 8
6.2.3 Procedure to Erase IC Memory
Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 − 9
6.2.4 Data Storage Capacity of IC Memory
Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 − 10
6.2.5 Managing IC Memory Card . . . . . . . 6 − 11
6.3 How To Use IC Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 − 13

6.3.1 For Use as Program Memory . . . . . . 6 − 13
6.3.1.1 Writing the Program . . . . . . 6 − 13
6.3.1.2 Reading the Program . . . . . 6 − 15
6.3.2 For Use as Expansion Memory . . . . 6 − 19
6.3.2.1 Outline of Expansion
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 − 19
6.3.2.2 Configuration of Expansion
Memory Area . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 − 21

6.1 Overview of IC Memory Card

The IC memory card is optional memory to be used with the FP10SH. It is not for use
with the FP3. It has two main purposes, saving programs and expanding the data area
memory. One IC memory card has the following three main applications:
− Exclusively for use in program storage
− Exclusively for use in expanding data memory area
− For combined use in program storage and expanding data memory area
For use in program storage

The program is written and saved onto the IC memory card. The IC memory card writted
program is then used as the program memory.
With the NPST−GR, change the name of the file to [AUTOEXEC] and make a copy of
the file. Then, by turning the power ON while the program memory selection (SW5) of
the operation condition switch is set to ON position (IC memory card), the program
automatically loads into the built−in RAM and you can begin operation.
Execute the F14 (PGRD)/P14 (PPGRD) instruction during RUN and it is possible to
switch the program with the program of any specified file name.
For use in expanding data memory area
Such things as the data written in the data register of FP10SH are written to the IC
memory card. With this method, the IC memory card can be used as an expanded
memory area can be used for the writing and reading of data by program.
When writing data, use the F13 (ICWT)/P13 (PICWT) instruction and when reading data
from IC memory card, use the F12 (ICRD)/P12 (PICRD) instruction.
The FLASH−EEPROM type IC memory card is exclusively for reading.
Note
The IC memory card of SRAM type and FLASH−EEPROM type are
split into two areas, one for program storage and one for
expanding data memoy.

How the IC memory card is used

Program memory Automatic operation when
areas power is turned ON
AUTOEXEC.SPG Program
memory
IC memory Program 1 (built−in RAM)
card Program 2
Program 3
F14 (PGRD) instruction
Program n
F12 (ICRD) instruction
Expanded data
memory F13 (ICWT) instruction
Operation
(SRAM type only)
memory
Expanded memory
area
When using the IC memory card as program memory, there are three methods for
reading a program:
− Reading automatically when the power is turned ON.
− Reading with the [IC CARD PROGRAM MANAGER] of the NPST−GR.
− Reading with the F14 (PGRD) instruction.
Types of IC memory card

There are of two types of IC memory cards, the SRAM type, and a FLASH−EEPROM
type. Selection can be made depending on the availability of use.
Type Memory capacity Order number
SRAM type 1MB AIC31000
FLASH−EEPROM type 1MB AIC30010
SRAM type IC memory card

Most suitable for use with data memory area expansion
When used as expansion memory, use the F13 (ICWT)/P13 (PICWT ) and F12
(ICRD)/P12 (PICRD) instructions for freely occurring data reading and data writing as
desired.
Equipped with a battery used for data backup.
next page

FLASH−EEPROM type IC memory card

Since a backup battery is not necessary it is suited to saving programs.
Perform the program writing with in the [IC CARD MANAGER] of NPST−GR.
When used as expansion memory, it is limited to reading.
Handling the IC memory card

Avoid high temperature, high humidity and direct sunlight.
Refrain from jolting or exposing the card to rough handling.
Do not allow the card to get wet.
Do not touch or allow foreign objects to contact the connectors.
Do not place in or near flames.

6.2 Configuration of IC Memory Card
6.2.1 Program Memory and Expansion Memory Areas
The area where the program is saved as is, referred to as the “program area” and the
area used for expansion of data memory is called the “expansion memory area.” It is
necessary to segregate the areas according to IC memory card use.
Left over capacity in IC memory card cannot be used.
Exclusive use as program memory
When using exclusively for saving programs, it is necessary to use the NPST−GR to
designate the whole IC memory card as program memory area.
SRAM type IC memory card:
Format all of the areas of the IC memory card using the [FORMAT IC CARD (SRAM)]
of the [IC CARD PROGRAM MANAGER] menu. Refer to the section 6.2.2 for formatting
procedure.
FLASH−EEPROM type IC memory card:
Procedure:
1. Erase all of the areas of IC memory card using
[ERASE IC CARD(F&SCRAM)] of the [IC CARD
PROGRAM MANAGER]. (* section 6.2.3)
2. Use [COPY FILES TO IC CARD (F−EEPROM)] to copy
the program from floppy or a hard disk to the IC
memory card.
Note
When copying for a second time, re−execute from procedure 1.

Exclusive use as data memory area

When using exclusively for expanding memory, it is necessary to designate the whole
IC memory card as “expansion memory area” using NPST−GR.
Erase all of the areas using [ERASE IC CARD(F&SRAM)] of the [IC CARD PROGRAM
MANAGER] menu. (* section 6.2.3).
Do not format. Data can not be written if formatted.

When an IC memory card has been formatted once, to designate its entire area as
“expansion memory area”, select the [ERASE IC CARD (F&SRAM)] option from the [IC
CARD PROGRAM MANAGER] menu of the NPST−GR.
Using program memory area and expansion memory area separately

You can set the area to be formatted as desired. All the area other than that formatted
area (for program memory area) becomes expansion memory area.
SRAM type
Specify the necessary area for program memory and format with the [FORMAT IC
CARD (SRAM)] menu.
THE IC MEMORY CARD WILL BE FORMATTED. MEMORY AREA 256KB
MS−DOS FORMAT AREA [ 64]KB (64KB −256KB)

EXPANDED MEMORY AREA 98KWORD
* TO CHANGE MS−DOS FORMAT AREA, USE RIGHT OR LEFT KEY.

* EXPANDED MEMORY AREA = ENTIRE MEMORY − MS−DOS FORMAT AREA
* CONTENTS IN IC CARD WILL BE LOST BY FORMATTING
Note
Record the addresses and store in a safe place.

6.2.2 IC Memory Card Formatting Procedures

Before saving the program, first format a IC memory card for MS−DOS and ensure that
there is a program memory area for saving the program.
Procedure:
1. Select the [FORMAT IC CARD (SRAM)] option from
the [IC CARD PROGRAM MANAGER] menu of the
NPST−GR software.
2. When the following screen appears, set the format
size (format area).


3. Press the <F1> key to execute.
FLASH−EEPROM type IC memory card

When you copy the program on the disk to the IC memory card, it simultaneously formats
the card.
Procedure:
1. Select the [COPY FILES TO IC CARD (F−EEPROM)]
option for the FLASH−EEPROM in the [IC CARD
PROGRAM MANAGER] menu of the NPST−GR
software.
2. When the following screen appears, set the format
size (format area) and press the <F1> key.


next page

3. When the IC memory card status is displayed, press

the <Y> key to format and simultaneously copy the
file.
[IC CARD FORMAT STATUS]
IC CARD : FLASH FLASH

MEMORY AREA: 512KB
MS−DOS ( 256KB) 512KB
MS−DOS AREA: 256KB
EXPAND AREA: 128KW 0h
EXPAND AREA ( 128KW)
7fh
[ESC]: RETURN TO THE PREVIOUS SCREEN.
6.2.3 Procedure to Erase IC Memory Card
For the SRAM and FLASH−EEPROM type IC memory cards, before you can use an IC
memory card for the expansion memory, you must first erase the IC memory card and
secure an expansion memory area.
Procedure:
1. Select the [ERASE IC CARD (F & SRAM)] option in the
[IC CARD PROGRAM MANAGER] menu of the
NPST−GR software.
2. When the following screen appears, press the <F1>
key to erase.
[ ERASE ]
< CONTENTS IN IC CARD WILL BE LOST >
F1 :EXECUTE FORMATTING

6.2.4 Data Storage Capacity of IC Memory Card
When storing a program or data in the IC memory card, the data storage capacity is as
follows.
Program only
Total number of bytes: program file (*.SPG), annotation comment (*.NCB), line space
comment (*.GYO), and FAT area (see note)
Keep the total number of bytes for the files given above less than the MS−DOS format
capacity.
Note
FAT area:
256kB format = 6kB
512kB format = 6.5kB
1M format = 10kB
Program and I/O comment

Total number of bytes: program file (*.SPG), annotation comment (*.NCB), line space
comment (*.GYO), I/O comment (*.SCM) and FAT area
Keep the total number of bytes for the files given above less than the MS−DOS format
capacity. The I/O comment changes according to the size of the statements.

6.2.5 Managing IC Memory Card
With the NPST−GR software Ver. 3 or later, there is a menu for managing the IC memory
card.
[IC CARD PROGRAM MANAGER]
[1. LOAD PROG FROM IC CARD (F&SRAM)]

[2. LOAD PROGRAM TO IC CARD (SRAM)]
[3. COPY FILES FROM IC CARD (F&SRAM)]
[4. COPY FILES TO IC CARD (SRAM)]
[5. COPY FILES TO IC CARD (F−EEPROM)]
[6. DELETE FILES (SRAM)]
[7. RENAME A FILE (SRAM)]
[8. CHANGE FILE ATTRIBUTE (SRAM)]
[9. ERASE IC CARD (F&SRAM)]
[A. FORMAT IC CARD (SRAM)]
Reading the programs and data stored in the IC memory card (For both the SRAM
and FLASH−EEPROM types )
[1. LOAD PROG FROM IC CARD (F & SRAM)]:
Selects one of the programs stored on the IC memory card and reads its to the
NPST−GR.
[3. COPY FILES FROM IC CARD (F & SRAM)]:
Reads the stored files of program or data from the IC memory card and copies it
to a floppy disk or (to the hard disk).
To create a copy of the IC memory card, first copy the files of the IC memory onto a disk,
then replace the card with a new IC memory card and copy the files from the disk to the
new IC memory card using the [COPY FILES TO IC CARD] option.
Initializing an IC memory card (For both the SRAM and FLASH−EEPROM types)
[9. ERASE IC CARD (F & SRAM)]:
Clears the entire contents of the IC memory card. Clears all program areas
formatted with [A. FORMAT IC CARD (SRAM)], and makes the whole area for
expansion memory.

Management of SRAM type IC memory card

Before use, [A. FORMAT IC CARD (SRAM)]:
MS−DOS formats the IC memory card, and reserves a program memory area for
saving the program. Any area not reserved as program memory area becomes
expanded memory area.
Writing to the IC memory card,
[2. LOAD PROGRAM TO IC CARD (SRAM)]:
Writes the program on the NPST−GR to the IC memory card.
[4. COPY FILES TO IC CARD (SRAM)]:
Copies the contents of a floppy disk or hard disk to the IC memory card. Also, with
this function, you can select multiple programs and write them to the IC memory
card at one time.
Other file management functions

[6. DELETE FILES (SRAM)]:
Deletes programs on the IC memory card. Also, with this function, you can select
multiple programs and delete at one time.
[7. RENAME A FILE (SRAM)]:
Changes the file names and titles of the program on the IC memory card
[8. CHANGE FILE ATTRIBUTE (SRAM)]:
Exclusively reads the programs on the IC memory card to read−only files or hidden
files.
Writing to FLASH−EEPROM type IC memory card

[5. COPY FILES TO IC CARD (F−EEPROM)]:
Writing to the FLASH−EEPROM type IC memory card is done by copying the entire
contents of a floppy disk or hard disk at one time.
With the FLASH−EEPROM type IC memory card, partial editing of contents, file
name changes, and erasing cannot be performed. Changes should be made on
a disk and then the entire disk should be copied to the IC memory card.

6.3 How To Use IC Memory Card
6.3.1 For Use as Program Memory
By saving the program to a IC memory card, it is simple to create a backup or load it to

another CPU.
Furthermore, by saving more than one program, switching between the programs can
be done as necessary.
IC memory
card
Program 1
Program 2
Program 3
Program 4
6.3.1.1 Writing the Program
There are 3 methods for writing programs to the IC memory card.

Use the [IC CARD PROGRAM MANAGER] menu in the NPST−GR
software, directly write the program that is saved on the disk to the IC
memory card. Possible with all types of IC memory card.
Directly write the program that is made by the NPST−GR software to the
IC memory card. Only possible with the SRAM type IC memory card.
Write the program on the RAM of the CPU into the IC memory card. Only
possible with SRAM type IC memory card.
When writing programs to FLASH−EEPROM type IC memory card, first save the
program to disk, then using the [IC CARD PROGRAM MANAGER] option of the
NPST−GR software, write to the IC memory card.
next page

Method 1: Use the [IC CARD PROGRAM MANAGER] function in the NPST−GR
software, directly write the program that is saved on the disk to the IC
memory card. (For all types of IC memory card)
Procedure:
1. Select the [SAVE A PROGRAM TO DISK] option in the
[PROGRAM MANAGER] menu of the NPST−GR, or the
[COPY FILES FROM IC CARD (F & SRAM)] option in
the [IC CARD PROGRAM MANAGER] menu, and save
the program to floppy disk or hard disk.
2. From the [IC CARD PROGRAM MANAGER] menu of
the NPST−GR, select the [COPY FILE TO IC CARD]
option of the IC memory card type that is to be used.
− You can select more than one file and copy them at
one time.
− If you need the contents to be copied to the built−in
RAM, when the power is turned ON, change the name
of the program to AUTOEXEC. (* section 6.3.1.2)
Method 2: Directly write the program that is made by the NPST−GR software to the
IC memory card. (For the SRAM type IC memory card)
Procedure:
1. Select the [LOAD PROGRAM TO IC CARD (SRAM)]
option in the [IC CARD PROGRAM MANAGER] menu
of the NPST−GR software.

Method 3: Write a program on the RAM of the CPU into the IC memory card. (For
the SRAM type IC memory card)
By performing the following procedures, the data on the RAM of the CPU is written to the
IC memory card and named “AUTOEXEC.SPG”.
Procedure:
change to the online monitor mode.
option of the [PROGRAM MANAGER] and then press
the <ENTER> key.
3. Press the <F2> key to change the [LOAD COPY RAM
TO ROM].
6.3.1.2 Reading the Program
There are 4 methods of reading the program saved in the IC memory card.
Read the program on the IC memory card and directly load it into the
built−in RAM of the CPU when the power is turned ON.
Use the programming tool to read the program of the IC memory card and
directly load it into the built−in RAM of the CPU.
Use the [LOAD PROGRAM FROM IC CARD] option in the [IC CARD
PROGRAM MANAGER] menu of the NPST−GR, and select one of the
programs saved in the IC memory card and read it to the NPST−GR
(memory of personal computer).
Use the F14 (PGRD) instruction to read the program from the IC memory
card, and directly load it into the built−in RAM of the CPU.
next page

Method 1: Read the program on the IC memory card and directly load it into the
built−in RAM of the CPU when the power is turned ON.
By just turning ON the CPU, the device automatically reads the program
of the IC memory card and loads the program to the built−in RAM of the
CPU.
The program that is automatically read is the program named

“AUTOEXEC” and is the target of automatic reading.
Procedure:
1. While the power is turned OFF, set the program
memory selection (SW5) of the operation condition
switches on the CPU to the ON (using optional
memory) position, and set the IC memory card access
enable switch to ON position.

enable switch
2. Turn ON the CPU.
Method 2: Use the programming tool to read the program of the IC memory card and
directly load it into the built−in RAM of the CPU.
With simple operation of the programming tool, reads the program saved
on the IC memory card, and load it to the built−in RAM of the CPU.
The program read is the program named “AUTOEXEC.SPG”.
next page

Procedure:
change to the online monitor mode.
option of [PROGRAM MANAGER] menu and then
press the <ENTER> key.
3. Press the <F2> key to change the [COPY ROM TO
RAM] option.
Method 3: Use the [LOAD PROGRAM FROM IC CARD] option in the [IC CARD
PROGRAM MANAGER] menu of the NPST−GR, and select one of the
programs saved in the IC memory card and read it to the NPST−GR
(memory of personal computer).
Procedure:
1. Select the [LOAD PROGRAM FROM IC CARD] option
in the [IC CARD PROGRAM MANAGER] menu of the
NPST−GR software.
2. Select the desired file from the displayed file names.
3. Press the <F1> key to load the program.
When loading the program on the NPST−GR to the built−in RAM of the CPU, select the
[LOAD A PROGRAM TO PLC] option of the [PROGRAM MANAGER] menu.

Method 4: Use the F14 (PGRD) instruction to read the program from the IC memory
card and directly load it into the built−in RAM of the CPU.
IC memory
card
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
F14 (PGRD) instruction
By first saving the programs you desire on the IC memory card, you can use the F14
(PGRD) instruction in the program, to switch a program while in the RUN mode (while
in operation).
The following details the describe the program after executing F14 (PGRD) instruction.
The program will continue executing until the END instruction is executed.
The CPU enters the PROG. mode and the program is read from the IC
memory card and load to the built−in RAM of the CPU.
The CPU automatically switches to the RUN mode, and the new program
executes.
Program Example
With F14 (PGRD) instruction, specify a saved file name by the NPST−GR to call up the
program of from IC memory card.
F14 PGRD, DT 100
“STEP1”
For the program above, the contents (“STEP 1”) stored in DT100 is the file name used
to call up the program.
To store the program name to registers such as DT100, you can write it with
alphanumeric code using F0 (MV) or F1 (DMV) instruction, or you can write it with ASCII
conversion using F95 (ASC) instruction. For more details, refer to the programming
manual.
Note
There are dangers involved when switching programs while in the
RUN mode. Carefully read the section regarding the F14 (PGRD)
instruction in the programming manual.

6.3.2 For Use as Expansion Memory
6.3.2.1 Outline of Expansion Memory
The expansion memory area is an independent area from the internal memory of the
CPU that stores word data. Use the F12 (ICRD) and F13 (ICWT) instructions to read and
write data to this area. Below are some of the things that you can do by using the
expansion memory area.
As reading and writing is easily done using high−level instructions, you can to use
the expansion memory as external memory for the CPU.
Writing
Use the F13 (ICWT) instruction to load the word data stored in the data register
of the CPU to the IC memory card.
F0 MV, K 100, DT 9
F13 ICWT, DT 9, K 1, H3FFF
With the above program, after the constant K100 is stored in DT9, F13 (ICWT)
instruction is used to write one word of data from the beginning of DT9 (K100) to
the H3FFF address of the IC memory card. For details refer to the F13 (ICWT)
instruction of the programming manual.
H3FFF 1 word
Read from DT9

IC memory card
next page

Reading
Use the F12 (ICRD) instruction to load the word data stored on the IC memory card
to the data register of the CPU.
F12 ICRD, H3FFF, K 1, DT 7
The above program reads a one word data from the H3FFF address of the IC
memory card to DT7. For details refer to the F12 (ICRD) instruction of the
programming manual.
H3FFF 1 word
Stored in DT7
IC memory card
When dealing with many different data or other such applications, you can create
a table to store the different control data and easily switch between the data
according to the data type you are using.
IC memory
card
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Data 4
Create a data table in the IC memory card, such as outlined above, so that the data is
read to the CPU every time you switch data.

6.3.2.2 Configuration of Expansion Memory Area
Areas of the IC memory card that are not formatted can be used as expansion memory
area.
One word (two bytes) can be stored in one address. As the following example illustrates,
in a 512kB area, data of 262,143 words can be stored.
(512 × 1024) bytes
=262,143 words
2
In the expansion memory area, the addresses are numbered by word units and,
regardless of the size of the formatted area, the starting address is numbered as 0 (H0).
For example, the addresses for a 512kB (256 k words) area are from as H0 to H3FFFE.
Example: When a 512kB of SRAM type IC memory card is designated as

expansion memory (unformatted).
Address H0
Expansion memory area

512kB
(262,143 words)
H3FFFE


Chapter 7
Self−Diagnostic and Troubleshooting
7.1 Self−Diagnostic Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 − 3
7.1.1 Status Indicator LEDs on CPU . . . . . 7 − 3
7.1.2 Operation When an Error Occurs . . . 7 − 4
7.1.2.1 Allowing Duplicated Output . 7 − 4
7.1.2.2 Continuing After An Operation
Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 − 4
7.2 Troublesooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 − 5
7.2.1 If the ERROR LED Lights . . . . . . . . . . 7 − 5
7.2.2 If the ALARM LED Lights . . . . . . . . . . 7 − 7
7.2.3 If the LED (POWER) of Power Supply
Unit Does Not Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 − 7
7.2.4 If Outputting Does Not Occur as
Desired . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 − 8
7.2.5 If a Communication Error Appears
When Using NPST−GR . . . . . . . . . . 7 − 10
7.2.6 If a Protect Error Message
Appears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 − 11

7.1 Self−Diagnostic Function
7.1.1 Status Indicator LEDs on CPU
Condition LED status Description Program

execution
RUN PROG. TEST BREAK ERROR BATT. ALARM status
Normal ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Normal operation in RUN mode Operation
condition OFF ON Varies OFF OFF OFF OFF Normal operation in PROG. Stop
mode
Flashes OFF Varies OFF OFF OFF OFF Forcing ON/OFF in RUN mode Operation
OFF ON ON Varies Varies OFF OFF TEST/RUN mode (break Stop
condition)
ON OFF ON OFF Varies OFF OFF TEST/RUN mode (operating Operation
condition)
Abnormal OFF Varies Varies Varies ON Varies OFF When a self-diagnostic error Stop
condition occurs (stops)
ON OFF OFF OFF ON Varies OFF When a self-diagnostic error Operation
occurs (continues)
Varies Varies Varies Varies Varies ON OFF Backup battery error occurs Operation
Varies Varies Varies Varies Varies Varies ON When a watchdog timer error Stop
occurs
OFF Flashes Varies OFF Varies Varies OFF MEWNET-F slave station Stop
waiting error occurs
The FP3/FP10SH CPU has a self-diagnostic function which identifies errors and stops
operation if necessary.
When an error occurs, the status of the status indicator LEDs on the CPU vary, as shown
in the table above.

7.1.2 Operation When an Error Occurs
Normally, if an error occurs, operation of the FP3/FP10SH stops.

There are some instances in which operation continues even if an error occurs, such
as with a battery error.
The user may select whether operation is to be continued or stopped if a duplicate
output error or operation error occurs, by setting the system registers. You can set the
system registers with NPST−GR software.
Procedure:
1. Press the <ESC> key to display the [NPST MENU],
select the [SYSTEM REGISTER] option from the [PLC
CONFIGURATION] menu and press <ENTER> key.
2. In the [PLC CONFIGURATION] screen, press the <F8>
key and select the [ACT ON ERROR] option.
Register Item Descriotion
No.
20 DUPLICATE OUTPUT [DISE, ENAB]
21 OUTPUT UNIT FUSE BLOW [STOP, CONT]
22 INTELLIGENT UNIT ERROR [STOP, CONT]
23 I/O VERIFY ERROR [STOP, CONT]
24 W.D.T TIME OUT BY OPE JAM [STOP, CONT]
25 UNUSED
26 OPERATION ERROR [STOP, CONT]
27 REMOTE I/O SLAVE LINK ERROR [STOP, CONT]
28 I/O ERROR IN REMOTE I/O SLAVE [STOP, CONT]
29 UNUSED
4 BATTERY ERROR INDICATION [ENAB, DISA]
7.1.2.1 Allowing Duplicated Output
When you change system register 20 settings (“ENAB”) using the NPST−GR software,
duplicated output is not regarded as an error and the FP3/FP10SH continuse to
operate.
7.1.2.2 Continuing After An Operation Error
When you change system register 26 settings (“CONT”) using the NPST−GR software,
the FP3/FP10SH continues to operate. In this case, even if the FP3/FP10SH continues
to operate, this is regarded as an error.
This applies to system registers 21 through 28 as well.

7.2 Troublesooting
7.2 Troublesooting
7.2.1 If the ERROR LED Lights
<Condition>
The self−diagnostic error occurs.
<Procedure 1>
Replace the backup battery of the CPU when the BATT. LED is ON. (* section 8.1.1.2)
<Procedure 2>
Check the error code using the programming tool.
Using NPST-GR software

In the ONLINE mode, select “STATUS DISPLAY.” At the bottom of the “STATUS
DISPLAY” window, you can find the error code.
SLF DIAGN ERR CD (45) [OPERATION ERROR]
Error code Comments
Using FP programmer II Ver.2 (−) READ

Press the keys on the FP programmer II Ver.2 ACLR OP 1 1 0 ENT
as shown on the right.

When self-diagnostic error occurs, the screen OP− 110
FUNCTION ERR E45
shown on the right is displayed.
Error code is 1 to 9
<Condition>
There is a syntax error in the program.
<Procedure 1>
Change to PROG. mode and clear the error.
<Procedure 2>
Execute a total−check function to determine the location of the syntax error.
Refer to NPST−GR software manual for details about the total−check method.
next page

7.2 Troublesooting
Error code is 20 or higher

<Condition>
A self−diagnostic error other than a syntax error has occurred.
<Procedure 1>
Use the programming tool in PROG. mode to clear the error.

Press the <F3> key in the “STATUS DISPLAY” menu described on the previous page.
Error code 43 and higher can be cleared.
Using FP programmer II Ver.2

Press the keys as follows. Error code 43 and higher can be cleared.
(−) SHIFT (DELT)
ACLR OP 1 1 2 ENT
SC INST
In the PROG. mode, the power supply can be turned OFF and then ON again to clear
the error, but all of the contents of the operation memory except hold type data are
cleared.
An error can also be cleared by executing a self−diagnostic error set instruction F148
(ERR)/P148 (PERR).
For version 4.3 or earlier FP3 CPU, change to the PROG. mode and turn the power
OFF and ON to clear the error condition.
<Procedure 2>
Follow the procedures described in the table of error codes (* section Appendix F).
Note
When an operation error (error code 45) occurs, the address at
which the error occurred is stored in special data registers (FP3:
DT9017 and DT9018, FP10SH: DT90017 and DT90018). If this
happens, monitor the address at which the error occurred before
cancelling the error.

7.2 Troublesooting
7.2.2 If the ALARM LED Lights
<Condition>
The system watchdog timer has been activated and the operation of FP3/FP10SH has
been stopped.
<Procedure 1>
Set the mode selector of the FP3/FP10SH CPU from RUN to PROG. and turn the power
OFF and then ON.
− If the ALARM LED is turned ON again, there is probably an abnormality in the

FP3/FP10SH. Please contact your dealer.
− If the ERROR LED is turned ON, go to section 7.2.1.
<Procedure 2>
Set the mode selector from PROG. to RUN.
If the ALARM LED is turned ON, the program execution time is too long. Check the
program, referring the following:
− Check if instructions such as JP or LOOP are programmed in such a way that a scan
can never finish.
− Check that interrupt instructions are executed in succession.
7.2.3 If the LED (POWER) of Power Supply Unit Does Not Light
<Procedure 1>
Check wiring of power supply unit.
<Procedure 2>
For power supply unit (AFP3631 or AFP3638), check that the voltage selecting terminal is
set correctly (* section 2.6).
For use at 100 to 120 V AC, short the voltage selecting terminals with the short
circuiting bar.
next page

7.2 Troublesooting
<Procedure 3>
Check if the power supplied to the power supply unit is in the range of the rating (* section
2.6.1).
− If the capacity of internally supplied power (5 V) is insufficient, investigate

different unit combinations.
− If the capacity of externally supplied power (24 V) is insufficient, install a
separate 24 V DC power supply.
<Procedure 4>
Check if a fuse has blown.
If a fuse has blown, replace the fuse (* section 8.1.3).
<Procedure 5>
Disconnect the power supply wiring to the other devices if the power supplied to the power
supply unit is shared with them.
If the LED on the power supply unit turn ON at this moment, pepare another power supply
for other devices or increase the capacity of the power supply.
7.2.4 If Outputting Does Not Occur as Desired
Proceed from the check of the output side to the check of the input side.
Check of output condition <1>
Output indicator LEDs are ON
<Procedure 1>
Check the wiring of the loads.
<Procedure 2>
Check if the power is properly supplied to the loads.
− If the power is properly supplied to the load, there is probably an abnormality in the
load. Check the load again.
− If the power is not supplied to the load, there is probably an abnormality in the
FP3/FP10SH’s output circuit. Please contact your dealer.
next page

7.2 Troublesooting
Check of output condition <2>

Output indicator LEDs are OFF
<Procedure 1>
Monitor the output condition using a programming tool.
− If the output monitored is turned ON, there is probably a duplicated output error.
<Procedure 2>
Forcing ON the output using forcing I/O function.
− If the output indicator LED is turned ON, go to input condition check.

− If the output indicator LED remains OFF, there is probably an abnormality in the
output unit. Please contact your dealer.
Check of input condition <1>

Input indicator LEDs are OFF
<Procedure 1>
Check the wiring of the input devices.
<Procedure 2>
Check that the power is properly supplied to the input terminals.
− If the power is properly supplied to the input terminal, there is probably an abnormality
in the input unit. Please contact your dealer.
− If the power is not properly supplied to the input terminal, there is probably an
abnormality in the input device or input power supply. Check the input device and
input power supply.
Check of input condition <2>

Input indicator LEDs are ON
<Procedure>
Monitor the input condition using a programming tool.
− If the input monitored is OFF, there is probably an abnormality with the input unit.
Please contact your dealer.
− If the input monitored is ON, check the program again.
Also, check the leakage current at the input devices (e.g., two−wire type sensor) and
check the program again referring the following:
Check for the duplicated use of output. Check the program flow when a control
instruction such as MC or JP is used.
Check the settings of the I/O allocation.

7.2 Troublesooting
7.2.5 If a Communication Error Appears When Using NPST−GR
<Procedure 1>
Check if the baud rate and data length settings of the FP3/FP10SH and NPST−GR are the
same.
NPST-GR baud rate setting
1. Open [NPST MENU] by pressing the <ESC> key, then select “NPST
CONFIGURATION” to skip to the [NPST CONFIGURATION]
subwindow.
2. Select a baud rate (9600 or 19200).
3. Press the <F1> key and select “SAVE DISK? YES” to register this
change onto the disk.
FP3/FP10SH baud rate setting

Use the baud rate selector to enter the setting for the FP3/FP10SH. (* section
5.2.1)
Note
Depending on the personal computer, there are times
when baud rate of 19,200 bps or greater are not
supported. If problems occur, set both the personal
computer and FP3/FP10SH to 9,600 bps.
<Procedure 2>
Check the FP PC cable and RS232C adapter.
RS232C adapter needs to be customized to match your computer.
<Procedure 3>
Confirm the setting of the personal computer referring to the manual for your computer.
Set your personal computer’s RS232C parameter to asynchronous.

7.2 Troublesooting
7.2.6 If a Protect Error Message Appears

When ROM is installed in the FP3/FP10SH CPU
If the ROM is installed on the FP3/FP10SH CPU, the program cannot be modified and
a “protect error” occurs.
<Procedure 1>
Turn OFF the power of the FP3/FP10SH and set the memory selector of CPU to the RAM
position.
<Procedure 2>
Modify the program of the internal RAM using the programming tool.
<Procedure 3>
Save the modified program to the memory or master memory (* section 5.4.4) and start
operation again.
If the program memory is protected

<Procedure>
Set the program memory protection switch of the operation condition switches for CPU to
OFF (write enabled) position.
When a password is set for the FP3/FP10SH

<Procedure>
Enter a password in the [SET PLC PASSWORD] menu in NPST−GR software and select
“enable.”
1. Open [NPST MENU] by pressing the <ESC> key, and then select “PLC
CONFIGRATION” to skip to the [PLC CONFIGRATION] window. In the
[PLC CONFIGRATION] window, select “SET PLC PASSWORD.”
2. Enter the password and select enable (ENAB).

7.2 Troublesooting

Chapter 8
Maintenance
8.1 Replacement of Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 3
8.1.1 Replacement of Backup Battery . . . . 8 − 3
8.1.1.1 Lifetime of Backup Battery . 8 − 3
8.1.1.2 Replacement Method of
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 4
8.1.2 Battery of IC Memory Card . . . . . . . . . 8 − 6
8.1.2.1 Battery Lifetime . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 6
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 7
8.1.3 Replacement of Fuse for Power
Supply Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 8
Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 8
8.1.4 Removable Terminal Block for Input
and Output Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 9
8.1.5 Replacement of Relay for Output
Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 9
Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 9
8.1.6 Replacement of Fuse for Output
Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 11
Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 11
8.2 Preventive Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 12


8.1 Replacement of Spare Parts
8.1.1 Replacement of Backup Battery
8.1.1.1 Lifetime of Backup Battery
The battery lifetime may vary depending on type of CPU you use.
CPU type Battery lifetime (at 25 °C/77
C/77 °F)
F)
(Typical lifetime in actual use)
FP3 AFP3210C−F 17,000 hours or more
(approx. 34,000 hours)
AFP3211C−F, AFP3220C−F 10,000 hours or more
FP10SH AFP6211V3 CPU only 9,500 hours or more
When used 7,600 hours or more
expansion (approx. 44,000 hours)
memory
AFP6221V3 CPU only 4,800 hours or more
When used 4,300 hours or more
expansion (approx. 25,000 hours)
memory
The backup battery should be replaced periodically, to avoid overlooking a weakened

battery.
A drop in the battery voltage can be confirmed with special internal relays R9005 and
R9006, the ERROR LED and BATT. LED. Although the backup battery function does
not stop operation, be sure to replace new battery within a week.
Backup battery
Order number of backup battery with connector for FP3/FP10SH: AFP8801
Note
Never throw batteries into a fire, disassemble or charge the
battery in order to prevent accidents such as bursting, fire or
heat generation.

8.1.1.2 Replacement Method of Battery
When replacing the battery, be sure to keep power of CPU ON.

If the battery is to be replaced with the power OFF, apply power to the FP3/FP10SH CPU
for at least 30 minutes, and then turn the power supply OFF and replace it within 10
minutes.
Procedure:
1. Open the unit cover of CPU.
2. Pull the lead wire to remove the connector.
<FP3 CPU> Lead wire
Connector
Backup
battery
<FP10SH CPU>
Backup battery
Lead wire
Connector
3. Insert the new battery and connect the connector.

4. Close the unit cover making sure that lead wire is not
caught in the cover.
5. To cancel the error condition, perform either the
following operations:
− Turn the INITIALIZE/TEST switch ON.
− Turn the power OFF and then back ON.
next page

Note
Be aware that if you turn ON the initialize/test switch, the data
register of hold type and other contents of operation memory will
also be initialized. (For the FP10SH, by using the system register,
you can set it so that it does not clear the operation memory. For
more details, refer to the system register on programming
manual.)

8.1.2 Battery of IC Memory Card
8.1.2.1 Battery Lifetime
Type Order number Memory capacity Battery lifetime

SRAM type AIC31000 1 MB 2 years or more
IC memory card
The battery should be replaced periodically, to avoid overlooking a weakened battery.

A drop in the battery voltage can be confirmed with the error code K54 or K55 in special
data register DT90000 and the ERROR LED turns ON. The error codes can be
confirmed with the programming tool (NPST-GR software).
− Error code K54: Data in the IC memory card cannot guaranteed. Replace the
battery of the IC memory card as soon as possible.
− Error code K55: Data in the IC memory card is maintained but the voltage of
the battery for IC memory card lowers. Replace the battery of
the IC memory card.
Although the backup battery function does not stop operation, be sure to replace new
battery within a week.
For the FP10SH, the battery condition of the IC memory card can be judged using the
special internal relays R9101 and R9102.
R9101 R9102 Battery condition of IC memory card
OFF OFF No battery replacement required.
Battery replacement is necessary. The data in the IC memory card is
OFF ON
maintained.
ON OFF Battery replacement is necessary. The data in the IC memory card
ON ON cannot guaranteed.
Backup battery for IC memory card

Type Description
SRAM type IC memory card (AIC31000) Lithium battery CR2025 or equivalent

8.1.2.2 Replacement Method of Battery
The battery can be replaced while the power supply of FP10SH is turned ON.
Procedure:
1. Open the unit cover of CPU.
position. The IC memory card access LED turns OFF.
Eject button
IC memory card access LED
IC memory card access enable switch
IC memory card
3. Pull out the IC memory card.

4. Use the screwdriver supplied with the IC memory
card to remove the screw on the card side.
IC memory card
Battery
Cover
Screw
5. Remove the battery and insert the new battery.

6. Attach the cover and tighten the screw in place.
7. Insert the IC memory card to the slot for the card in
CPU until the eject button sticks out.
8. Set the IC memory card access enable switch to ON
position.
Note
If you are replacing the battery after turning OFF the power
supply of FP10SH, then steps 2 and 8 are unnecessary. Though
be sure to finish the replacement procedure within 10 minutes.

8.1.3 Replacement of Fuse for Power Supply Unit
8.1.3.1 Replacement Method of Fuse
Be sure to turn OFF the power to the FP3 and then replace fuse.
Fuse
Power supply unit
Fuse holder
Procedure:
1. Remove the fuse holder with a flat-head screwdriver.
2. Replace the fuse with a new one.
3. Attach the fuse holder by pressing it in.
Replacement fuse for power supply unit

Fuses are for the FP3 power supply unit only. Be sure to specify the appropriate order
number given below.
Description Order number
2A type (FP3 power supply unit: AFP3631, AFP3634) AFP88021
4A type (FP3 power supply unit: AFP3638) AFP88022
Note
Always have the power supply turned OFF while replacing a
fuse.

8.1.4 Removable Terminal Block for Input and Output Units
The removable terminal block is used on the terminal type input and output units.
The removable terminal block can be removed while it is still wired. Therefore, if a
malfunction or other error occurs, replacement of the unit and other maintenance
procedures can be carried out speedily.
Loosen the screws on both ends to remover the terminal block. Then pull out the
terminal block from the unit.
Attach the terminal block to the unit, and be sure to tighten the screws well.
Screw Input and Output units
Terminal block
8.1.5 Replacement of Relay for Output Unit
8.1.5.1 Replacement Method of Relay
The relay type output unit with relay socket has relay replacement possibility. If the relay
fails, you can replace only relay. Be sure to turn OFF the power the FP3 and then
remove the output unit from the backplane before replacing relay.
Procedure:
1. Remove the nylon rivet on the top and bottom of the
output unit.
next page

2. Insert a flat-head screwdriver into the side slot of the

unit and remove the front case by rotating the
screwdriver.
Nylon rivet
Output unit
Flat-head screwdriver
3. Pull the PC board out of the case.
PC board
Output unit
4. Remove the failed relay from the socket and insert a

new one.
5. Follow the above steps in reverse order to
reassemble the unit.
Replacement relay
Be sure to specify the appropriate order number given below.
Output unit order number Relay order number
AFP33203−F APC33125

8.1.6 Replacement of Fuse for Output Unit

Replacement fuse for output unit
Be sure to select the fuse referring to the table below.
Output unit Fuse
Type Order number Order number
Transistor output
p NPN 16 points AFP33483−F AFP88042
type PNP 16 points AFP33583−F
Triac output type 16 points AFP33703 AFP88032
8.1.6.1 Replacement Method of Fuse
Be sure to turn OFF the power the FP3/FP10SH and then remove the output unit from
the backplane before replacing fuses.
Procedure:
1. Remove the nylon rivet on the top and bottom of the
unit.
2. Insert a flat-head screwdriver into the side slot of the unit
and remove the front case by rotating the screwdriver.
Nylon rivet
Output unit
Flat-head screwdriver
3. Pull the PC board out of the case.
PC board
Output unit
4. Remove the failed fuse from the holder and insert a

new one.
5. Follow the above steps in reverse order to
reassemble the unit.

8.2 Preventive Maintenance
8.2 Preventive Maintenance

Although the FP3/FP10SH system has been designed in such a way to minimize
maintenance and offer troublefree operation, several maintenance aspects should be
taken into consideration.
If preventive maintenance is performed periodically, you will minimize the possibility of
system malfunctions.
Inspection item Inspection description Basis of judgement Reference

Power supply Check POWER LED on Normal if ON Section 2.6
u
unitt power supply unit
Power supply unit Periodic replacement
(approx. 20,000 hours
operation)
CPU display
p y Check RUN LED ON in RUN state Section 2.4,,
Check ERROR LED Normal if OFF 2.5 and
d 7.1
Check ALARM LED Normal if OFF
Check BATT. LED Normal if OFF
Input/output unit Check input/output Normal if ON during ON, Section 2.8
display display LED and OFF during OFF
Installation Backplane mounting Securely mounted Section 4.1
co dto
condition looseness
Looseness and/or play in
unit
Connection Looseness of terminal No looseness Section 4.1
co dto
condition screw
Proximity of connection in Pinched parallel
pinch terminal
Connector looseness Locked in
Connection condition of Connector section is not
expansion cable loose
Power supply Voltage between AFP3631 and AFP3638: Section 4.2
voltage of power terminals 85 to 132 V AC or 170
pp y unit
supply to 264 V AC
AFP3634: 16.8 to 28.8 V
DC
Power supply Voltage between Within the specified range Section 2.9 to
voltage terminals of each unit 2.11
for input/output
Ambient Ambient temperature 0 to 55 °C/32 to 131 °F Section 4.1
environment
i Ambient humidity 30 to 85 % RH
Operating condition No dust or corrosive gas
Backup
p battery
y Battey for CPU Regular replacement Section 8.1.1
Battery for IC memory Regular replacement Section 8.1.2
card
Fuse Fuse of power supply unit Regular replacement Section 8.1.3
Fuse of output unit Regular replacement Section 8.1.6

Appendix A
Performance Specifications
A.1 FP10SH Performance Specifications . . . . . . . . A − 3
A.2 FP3 Performance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . A − 6

Performance Specifications FP3/FP10SH
A −2 Matsushita Automation Controls

FP3/FP10SH Performance Specifications
A.1 FP10SH Performance Specifications

Item Descriptions
Controll−a using one max. 512 points
ble I/O backplane
and three
expansion
backplanes
I/O system
memory memory
Optional IC memory card (* Note 4) or EPROM/FROM (* Note 5)
memory
Program capacity approx. 30 k steps (Approx. 60 k or 120 k steps available by
installing optional expansion memory.)
instruc−
tions high-level 431 types
Operation basic from 40 ns per instruction from 100 ns per instruction
speed instructions
(typical high−level from 80 ns per instruction from 200 ns per instruction
value) instructions
relays (X)
output relays
(Y) (* Note 1)
(R)
(* Note 2)
timer/counter total 3,072 points
(* Note 2) (TM number of timer (T) and counter (C) can be changed.)
− down type ON-delay timer: 0.001 to 32.767 s, 0.01 to 327.67 s,
0.1 to 3276.7 s or 1 to 32,767 s
− down type preset counter: 1 to 32,767 counts
link relays (L) 10,240 points
(* Note 1, 2)
pulse relays 2,048 points
(P)
(* Note 1, 2)
alarm relays 2,048 points
(E)
(* Note 1, 2)
next page
Matsushita Automation Controls A −3

Item Descriptions
areas (DT) (* Note 2)
file registers 32,765 words
(FL) (* Note 2)
link data 8,448 words
registers (LD)
(* Note 2, 3)
set value area
(SV)
elapsed value
area (EV)
index 14 words (I0 to ID) (with bank switching, 224 words portions can
registers be used)
(I)
(DF and DF/)
Master control relay 256 points (when using the 90 k step expansion memory, up to a
points (MCR) total of 512 points can be used for the no. 1 and 2 programs)
Number of labels 256 points (when using the 90 k step expansion memory, up to a
(JP and LOOP) total of 512 points can be used for the no. 1 and 2 programs)
Number of step ladder 1,000 steps (can only be used for the no. 1 program)
(* Note 2)
Number of subroutine 100 subroutines (can only be used for the no. 1 program)
Number of interrupt 25 program (can only be used for the no. 1 program)
program
Comment input function available (either the IC memory card board or ROM operation
board are required)
Sampling trace function max. 1,000 samples (16 contacts and 3 words/sample)
MODEM capability
Self-diagnostic function watching dog timer, memory malfunction detection, I/O malfunction
detection, backup battery malfunction detection, program syntax
check, etc.
Other functions program edition during RUN, forced ON/OFF, interrupt input, test
run and constant scan
Memory CPU only min. 4,800 hours min. 9,500 hours
backup (typical : approx. 29,000 hours) (typical : approx. 57,000 hours)
time
(lithium when used min. 4,300 hours (* Note 6) min. 7,600 hours (* Note 6)
battery expansion (typical : approx. 25,000 hours) (typical : approx. 44,000 hours)
storage memory
time)
next page

Notes
(*4): In addition to the IC memory card, the IC memory card
board (AFP6209A) is required.
(*5): In addition to the ROM, the ROM operation board
(AFP6208) is required.
(*6): The value when the 90 k steps type expansion memory
board (AFP6205) is used.

A.2 FP3 Performance Specifications

Item Descriptions
Controll− using one max. 512 points
able I/O backplane
and two
expansion
backplanes
I/O system
memory memory
optional EPROM/EEPROM
memory
Program capacity max. 9,727 steps max. 15,871 steps
(* Note 1)
instruc−
tions high-level 237 types 241 types 241 types
Operation basic from 0.5 μs per instruction
speed instructions
(typical high−level varies from 10 μs to 100 μs
value) instructions
relays (X)
output relays
(Y)
(* Note 2)
(R)
(* Note 3)
timer/counter total 256 points
(C) (The numbers of timer (T) and counter (C) can be changed.)
(* Note 3) down type ON-delay timer: 0.01 to 327.67 s, 0.1 to 3276.7 s or
1 to 32767 s
down type preset counter: 1 to 32,767 counts
link relays (L) 1,024 points × 2 roots (2 PC links)
(* Note 2, 3)
next page

Item Descriptions
areas (DT)
(* Note 3)
File registers 0 to 8,192 words 8,192 to 22,525
(FL) words
(* Note 1, 3)
link data 128 words × 2 roots (2 PC links)
registers (LD)
(* Note 3, 4)
set value area
(SV)
elapsed value
area (EV)
index 2 words
registers
(IX, IY)
(DF and DF/)
Master control relay 64 points
points (MCR)
Number of labels 256 labels
(JP and LOOP)
Number of step ladder 1,000 stages
(* Note 3)
Number of subroutine 100 subroutines
Number of interrupt 25 programs
program
Comment input function not available available not available
(* Note 5)
Sampling trace function not available available available
(* Note 6)
MODEM capability
Self-diagnostic function watching dog timer, memory malfunction detection, I/O
malfunction detection, backup battery malfunction detection,
program syntax check, etc.
Other functions program edition during RUN (* Note 7), forced ON/OFF, interrupt
input, test run, constant scan and machine language program
option
Memory backup time AFP3210C−F : min. 17,000 hours
(lithium battery storage (typical value : approx. 34,000 hours)
time)
AFP3211C−F, AFP3220C−F : min. 10,000 hours
(typical value : approx. 22,000
hours)
next page

Notes
(*1): The capacity will differ depending on the system register
settings.
(*5): Max. 2,730 points. Up to 12 characters per 1 comment.
(*6): Can perform sampling up to a maximum of 1,000
samples (4,000 words) for data of 16 contacts and 3
words.
(*7): During the ladder symbol input of NPST−GR, program
edits during RUN cannot be performed.

Appendix B
Table of System Registers
B.1 System Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B − 3
B.2 Content of System Register Settings . . . . . . . . B − 6
B.3 Table of System Registers (for FP3) . . . . . . B − 10
B.4 Table of System Registers (for FP10SH) . . B − 16

B.4.1 Operation of DF Instruction Between
MC and MCE Instructions . . . . . . . B − 22
B −2 Matsushita Automation Controls

B.1 System Registers

System registers are used to set values (parameters) which determine operation
ranges and functions used. Set values based on the use and specifications of your
program. There is no need to set system registers for functions which will not be used.
Types of system register
Allocation of user memory (System registers 0 and 1)
These registers set the size of the program area and file register area,
allowing the user memory area to be configured for the environment
used. The size of the memory area will vary depending on the CPU type.
Allocation of timers and counters (System register 5)
The number of timers and counters is set by specifying the starting
counter number.
Hold/non-hold type settings (System registers 6 to 18)
When these registers are set to “hold type”, the values in the relays and
data memory will be retained even if the system is switched to PROG.
mode or the power is turned OFF. If set to “non-hold type”, the values will
be cleared to “0”.
Operation mode settings for errors (System registers 4 and 20 to
28)
Set the operation mode effective when errors such as duplicated use of
output and operation error occur.
Timers settings (System registers 29 to 34)
Set time-out error detection time and the constant scan time.
MEWNET-F (remote I/O) operation settings (System registers 35 and
36)
These registers are used to select whether or not to wait for a slave
station connection when the remote I/O is started, and the remote I/O
update timing.
MEWNET−P/−W PC link settings (System registers 40 to 45, 46 and
50 to 55)
These settings are for using link relays and link registers for
MEWNET−P/−W PC link communication.
Note that the initial setting is “no PC link communication”.
MEWNET−H PC link settings (System register 49)
Set the processing capacity per scan for the PC link communication of
the MEWNET−H link system.
Communication port settings (System registers 410 to 418)
Set these registers when the tool port or COM (RS232C) port is to be
used for communication. The registers can only be set using NPST-GR.
Matsushita Automation Controls B −3

Checking and changing system register settings

If you are going to use a value which is already set (the value which appears when read),
there is no need to write it again.
Procedure:
1. Set the mode selector of the FP3/FP10SH CPU to
PROG.
2. Select the “SYSTEM REGISTER” in “PLC
CONFIGURATION” option from the NPST menu.
3. Select the function to be set in the the “SYSTEM
REGISTER” in “PLC CONFIGURATION” screen. The
value set in the selected system register will appear.
4. To change a set value, write the new value as
indicated in the system register table.
5. After setting, press <F1> key and type <Y> key to
save the revised settings to the FP3/FP10SH CPU.
Using FP programmer II Ver.2

Procedure:
1. Set the mode selector of the FP3/FP10SH CPU to
PROG.
2. Press the keys on the FP programmer II Ver.2, as
shown below.
(−)
ACLR 5 0 ENT
OP
3. Specify the register number (e.g. No.26) for the

parameter to be set and read the parameter.
The value set in the selected register (e.g. No.26) will
be displayed.
READ
2 6
Β
4. To change the set value, press the <CLR (clear)> key

and write the new value as indicated in the system
register table using decimal (K) or hexdecimal (H)
constant.
Note
Be aware that the FP programmer II Ver.2 cannot make settings
at the FP10SH system register.

Precautions for system register setting

Sytem register settings are effective from the time they are set.
However, modem connection settings become effective when the power is turned OFF
and ON.
When the initialized operation is performed, all set system register values will be
initialized.

B.2 Content of System Register Settings

Allocation of user memory (system registers 0 and 1)
The configuration of user memory of FP3 CPU is as follows:
Area for system 512 words
(fixed) A
registers
(set using system register 0)
Area for sequence
program
Users memory capacity
Area for machine B
(set using system register 1)
language program
Area for file C
registers
Be sure to set the A and B (system registers 0 and 1) as even numbers.

The area remaining in A after 512 words are subtracted is the sequence program area
that can actually be used.
The file register area C is the area that remains after A and B have been subtracted from
the user memory capacity.
Note
You cannot change the program capacity for FP10SH with the
system register settings.
FP3 (10 K)
Users memory capacity : 10 K words
Setting range of A : 2 K to 10 K words (default value: 8 K)
Setting range of B : 0 to 8 K words (default value: 0)
Allocate so that A + B ≦ 10.
Allocation example: The values of C when B = 0.
A Area for sequence program Area for file registers (C)
(1024×A−512)
2 1,535 steps 8,189 words
10 9,727 steps 0 words

Setting example for each area

When not using the machine language program area
Refer to the tables on the previous page.
When using the machine language program area
Area for machine language Area for machine language

B B
program program
2 2,048 words 14 14,336 words
4 4,096 words 16 16,384 words
6 6,144 words 18 18,432 words
8 7,679 words 20 20,480 words
10 10,240 words 22 22,528 words
12 12,288 words
For example, for the FP3 (16K steps type), when the area for the sequence program
(A) is set to 10K words, the area for the machine language program (B) can be set up
to 6K words.
In this situation, the file register can be used up to 8,189 words.
Setting the number of timers and counters (system register 5)

Timers and counters share the same area. If the method of dividing the area is changed,
the number of timers and counters will also change.
Type Total point Default value of Timer Counter
numbers system register 5
FP3 256 points 200 200 points 56 points
(No. 0 to 199) (No. 200 to 255)
FP10SH 3,072 points 3000 3000 points 72 points
(No. 0 to 2999) (No. 3000 to 3071)
0 MIN (0): All counter
Timer Setting value < n

Counter size increases
Setting
Setting value > n
value: n
Counter Timer size increases
Last number MAX (1024): All timer

For normal situations, set the system registers 5 and 6 to the same value. This sets the
timer to a non-hold type and counter to a hold type.
By setting system register 5 to “0,” the whole area becomes the counter. Also, by setting
it to the value 1 higher than the last number (i.e. 256 for the FP3), the whole area
becomes the timer.

Hold type area starting address (system registers 6 to 13)

Set each relay and register to a hold type or non-hold type.
Non-hold Setting value < n

type Hold type size increases
Setting
Setting value < n
value: n
Hold type Non-hold type size increases
For normal situations, set the system registers 5 and 6 to the same value. This sets the
timer to a non-hold type and counter to a hold type.
By setting this value to the first number, the whole area becomes hold type. Also, by
setting it to the value 1 higher than the last number (i.e. 2048 for the FP3 data register),
the whole area becomes non-hold type.
The relays and registers for links not specified in the send area of system registers 40
to 55 are non-hold type regardless of what is set here.
For the FP10SH, the index registers can be set to hold type or non−hold type.
The register numbers and settings are related as shown below.
Bank number Setting for I0 to ID Bank number Setting for I0 to ID
Bank 0 0 to 13 Bank 8 112 to 125
Bank 1 14 to 27 Bank 9 126 to 139
Bank 2 28 to 41 Bank A 140 to 153
Bank 3 42 to 45 Bank B 154 to 167
Bank 4 56 to 69 Bank C 168 to 181
Bank 5 70 to 83 Bank D 182 to 195
Bank 6 84 to 97 Bank E 196 to 209
Bank 7 98 to 111 Bank F 210 to 223

Default value of hold type area setting

Type FP3 FP10SH
Area
Timer All non−hold type
Counter All hold type
Internal relay Non−hold type: 60 words Non−hold type: 500 words
(WR0 to WR59) (WR0 to WR499)
Hold type: 38 words Hold type: 387 words
(WR60 to WR97) (WR500 to WR886)
Data register All hold type
File register All hold type
Link relay for MEWNET−W/P All hold type
Link register for MEWNET−W/P All hold type
Link relay for MEWNET−H All hold type
Link register for MEWNET−H All hold type
Index register for FP10SH All hold type
MEWNET−W/−P PC link setting

For PC link (W/P) 0: System register 40 to 45
For PC link (W/P) 1: System register 50 to 55
Regarding the link relays and link data registers, specify the range for communication
and divide it up for sending and receiving.
Starting No. Receiving

for sending area
Range for sending Sending

Range for communication
area
Receiving
area
The default settings have the range for communication (system register 40, 41, 50, and
51) set to 0 so that PC link communication is not possible.
If the range for sending (system register 43, 45, 53, and 55) is set to 0, the range for
communication will all be for receiving.
The link relay and link data register ranges not used for communication, can each be
used as internal relays and data registers.

B.3 Table of System Registers (for FP3)

Item Address Name of system register Default Description
value
Allocation 0 Sequence program area 8K FP3 (10 K): 2 to 10 K words * See
of user capacity setting words (K2 to K10) page
memory (K8) FP3 (16 K): 2 to 16 K words B − 6
(K2 to K16)
1 Machine language 0 word FP3 (10 K): 0 to 8 K words
program area capacity (K0) (K0 to K8)
setting FP3 (16 K): 0 to 14 K words
(K0 to K14)
2 Comment capacity setting 3 (K3) Use default value 3 (K3)
Action 4 Battery error alarm Enabled Enabled: When a battery problem
on error (* Note) (K0) (K0) occurs, a self-diagnostic
error is issued and the
ERROR LED lights.
(BATT. LED lights.)
Disabled: When a battery problem
(K1) occurs, a self-diagnostic
error is not issued and the
ERROR LED does not
light. (BATT. LED lights.)
Hold/ 5 Counter starting address 200 0 to 256 Set the system * See
Non-hold (setting the number of (K200) (K0 to registers 5 and page
timers and counters) K256) 6 to the same B −7
value.
l and
d
6 Hold area starting address 200 0 to 256
B −8
setting for timer/counter (K200) (K0 to
K256)
7 Hold area starting address 60 (K60) 0 to 98 (K0 to K98)
setting for internal relays
(in word units)
setting for data registers
9 Hold area starting address 0 (K0) FP3 (10 K): 0 to 8189
setting for file registers (K0 to K8189)
FP3 (16 K): 0 to 22525
(K0 to K22525)
setting for MEWNET−W/−P
link relays (for PC link 0)
Notes
The number in the parentheses of default value and
description columns shows the setting value when the
FP programmer II Ver.2 is operated.
The system register 4 is available for FP3 with CPU version
4.4 or later.
next page
B − 10 Matsushita Automation Controls


value
Hold/ 11 Hold area starting address 64 (K64) 64 to 128 (K64 to K128) * See
Non-hold setting for MEWNET−W/−P page
link relays (for PC link 1) B −8
link data registers (for PC
link 0)
13 Hold area starting address 128 128 to 256 (K128 to K256)
setting for MEWNET−W/−P (K128)
link 1)
14 Hold or non-hold setting Non-hold Hold (K0)/non-hold (K1)
for step ladder process (K1)
Action 20 Disable or enable setting Disable Disable (K0)/enable (K1)
on error for duplicated output (K0)
21 Operation setting when Stop Stop (K0)/continuation (K1)
I/O error occurs (K0)
22 Operation settings when Stop Stop (K0)/continuation (K1)
an intelligent unit error is (K0)
occurs
an I/O verification error is (K0)
occurs
an operation error occurs (K0)
communication error (K0)
occurs in the MEWNET-F
(remote I/O) system
error occurs in the slave (K0)
station of the MEWNET-F
system
Note
The number in the parentheses of default value and description
columns shows the setting value when the FP programmer II
Ver.2 is operated.
Matsushita Automation Controls B − 11


value
Time set- 31 Multi-frame 6500 ms 10.0 ms to 81900.0 ms
ting communication time (K2600) (K4 to K32760)
settings in the computer Use of default setting (6500 ms) is
link function recommended.
In the FP programmer II Ver.2,
setting time can be obtained using
the formula “Set time” = “Set value”
(K4 to K32760) × 2.5 (ms)
32 Communication time 2000 ms 10.0 ms to 81900.0 ms
setting for the F145 (K800) (K4 to K32760)
(SEND)/P145 (PSEND), Use of default setting (2000 ms) is
F146 (RECV)/P146 recommended.
(PRECV), F152 In the FP programmer II Ver.2,
(RMRD)/P152 (PRMRD) and setting time can be obtained using
F153 (RMWT)/ P153 the formula “Set time” = “Set value”
(PRMWT) instructions (K4 to K32760) × 2.5 (ms)
33 Program block-editing 10000 μs 800.0 ms to 52428.0 ms
time in the RUN mode (K5000) Use of default setting (10000 μs) is
(FP3 CPU Ver.3.0 or later) recommended.
In the NPST−GR, setting range:
2000 to 131070 μs
− setting range:2000 to 65534 μs
(K1000 to K32767)
− setting range:65536 to 131070 μs
(H8000 to HFFFF)
Set this system register using an
even number.
enter the set value (equal to the
value divided by 2).
34 Constant scan time 0: Normal 2.5 ms to 637.5 ms (K1 to K255):
setting scan Scans once each specified time
(FP3 CPU Ver.4.4 or later) (K0) interval.
0 (K0): Normal scan
setting time can be obtained using
the formula “Set time” = “Set value”
(K1 to K255) × 2.5 (ms)
Note
Ver.2 is operated.


value
Remote 35 Operation mode setting Enabled Enabled: CPU starts operation
I/O when the MEWNET-F (wait for (K1) after all the slave stations
control system is used connec- are recognized.
tion) Disabled: CPU starts operation
(K1) (K0) without waiting for slave
station connections
Only effective when registering
remote I/O allocation.
36 Data updating mode Scan Scan asynchronous mode (K1)/
settings for MEWNET-F synchro- Scan synchronous mode (K0)
system nous
(K0)
PC link 0 40 PC link 0 Size of link 0 (K0) 0 to 64 words (K0 to K64) * See
setting settings for relays page
MEWNET−W/ used for B −9
MEWNET−P PC link
41 li k system
link t Size of link 0 (K0) 0 to 128 words (K0 to K128)
data
registers
used for
PC link
42 Send area 0 (K0) 0 to 63 (K0 to K63)
starting
address of
link relay
43 Size of link 0 (K0) 0 to 64 words (K0 to K64)
relays
used for
send area
starting
address of
link data
register
data
registers
used for
send area
Note
Ver.2 is operated.


value
PC link 0 46 PC link 0 and 1 allocation Normal Normal allocation (K0):
setting setting for MEWNET−W/ allocation (PC link 0 for the link unit with a
MEWNET−P link system (K0) smaller slot number and PC link 1
(FP3 CPU Ver.4.4 or later) for one with a larger slot number)
Reverse allocation (K1):
(PC link 1 for the link unit with a
smaller slot number and PC link 0
for one with a larger slot number)
MEW- 49 Processing capacity 0 (K0) 0 (K0): All data in a scan
NET−H setting for PC link of 1 to 65535 (K1 to K65535):
setting MEWNET−H link system Setting processing capacity per
scan can be obtained using the
formula “Capacity” = “Set value” ×
256 bytes
PC link 1 50 PC link 1 Size of link 0 (K0) 0 to 64 words (K0 to K64) * See
MEWNET−P PC link
51 li k system
link t Size of link 0 (K0) 0 to 128 words (K0 to K128)
data
registers
used for
PC link
starting
address of
link relay
relays
used for
send area
54 Send area 128 128 to 255 (K128 to K255)
starting (K128)
address of
link data
register
data
registers
used for
send area
Note
Ver.2 is operated.


value
Tool port 410 Unit number setting for 1 (K1) 1 to 32 (unit no. 1 to 32)
setting tool port (when
connecting C-NET)
(FP3 CPU Ver.4.4 or later)
411 Communication format Commu- Character bits: 7 bits/8 bits
setting for tool port nication MODEM communication: Enabled/
(FP3 CPU Ver.4.4 or later) format Disabled
(charac- When connecting a MODEM, set
ter bit): 8 the unit number to 1 with system
bits register 410.
MODEM
commu-
nication:
Disabled
Notes
The number in the parentheses of default value and
description columns shows the setting value when the FP
programmer II Ver.2 is operated.
System registers 410 and 411 should be set using NPST−GR
Ver.3 or later. They cannnot be changed using FP programmer
II Ver.2.

B.4 Table of System Registers (for FP10SH)

value
Action 4 Battery error alarm Enabled Enabled: When a battery problem
on error occurs, a self-diagnostic
error is issued and the
ERROR LED lights.
Disabled: When a battery problem
occurs, a self-diagnostic
error is not issued and the
ERROR LED does not
light. (BATT. LED lights.)
Memory area Internal Cleared Cleared: When the initialize/
contents relay (R) test switch is set to
setting
tti att Link relay Cleared INITIALIZE position
iti
INITIALIZE (L) while in the PROG.
position mode you can
mode,
Timers/ Cleared specify the type of
Counters memory to be
(T, C, SV, cleared.
EV) Not cleared: When the initialize/
Data Cleared test switch is set to
register INITIALIZE position
(DT) while in the PROG.
mode you
mode, o can
Link data Cleared
specify the type of
register
memory to be not
(LD)
cleared.
File Cleared
register
(FL)
Index Cleared
register (I)
Error alarm Cleared
relay (E)
Differential type 0 0 (conventional): Holds preceded
instructions setting (conven- result in the MC and MCE
between MC and MCE tional) instruction set
instructions 1 (new): Disregards preceded result
in the MC and MCE instruction set
(See section B.4.1)
TM instruction operation 0 0 (conventional): Scan synchronous
setting (conven- 1 (new): Scan asynchronous
tional)
Index modifier check Enabled Enabled: Checks for overflow of the
setting index modifier area, and
performs normal
processing.
Disabled: Performs processing
without checking for
overflow of the index
modifier area.


value
Hold/ 5 Counter starting address 3000 0 to 3072 Set the system * See
Non-hold (setting the number of registers 5 and page
timers and counters) 6 to the same B −7
6 Hold area starting address 3000 0 to 3072 value.
l to
setting for timer/counter B −9
setting for internal relays
(in word units)
setting for data registers
setting for file registers
link 0)
link 1)
14 Hold or non-hold setting Non-hold Hold/non-hold
for step ladder process
setting for MEWNET−H
link relays
setting for MEWNET−H
link data registers
setting for index register
Action 20 Disable or enable setting Disable Disable/enable
on error for duplicated output
21 Operation settings when Stop Stop/continuation
MEWNET−TR master unit
error occurs
an intelligent unit error
occurs
an I/O verification error
occurs
24 Operation settings when a Stop Stop/continuation
system watching dog Set the time−out time for watching
timer error occurs dog timer with system register 30.


value
Action 26 Operation settings when Stop Stop/continuation
on error an operation error occurs
communication error
occurs in the MEWNET-F
(remote I/O) system
error occurs in the slave
station of the MEWNET-F
system
Time 29 Operation time setting for 300 0 to 65535 (0 to 52428 μs)
setting peripheral tasks (240 μs) The setting for this system register
is effective in the RUN mode only.
In the PROG. mode and “0” setting,
the allowable duration of time used
for peripheral tasks is set at
52428 μs.
Setting time can be obtained using
the formula
“Set time” = “Set value” × 0.8 (μs)
30 Time−out time setting of 1000 4 to 6400 (0.4 to 640 ms)
system watching dog (100 ms) Setting time can be obtained using
timer the formula
“Set time” =“Set value” × 0.1 (ms)
31 Multi-frame 2600 4 to 32767 (0.01 to 81.9175 s)
communication time (6.5 s) Use of default setting (6.5 s) is
settings in the computer recommended.
link function and Setting time can be obtained using
communication time the formula
setting for data sending “Set time” =“Set value” × 2.5 (ms)
buffer
32 Communication time 4000 4 to 32767 (0.01 to 81.9175 s)
setting for the F145 (10 s) Use of default setting (10 s) is
(SEND)/P145 (PSEND), recommended.
F146 (RECV)/P146 Setting time can be obtained using
(PRECV), F152 the formula
(RMRD)/P152 (PRMRD) and “Set time” =“Set value” × 2.5 (ms)
F153 (RMWT)/ P153
(PRMWT) instructions
33 Effective time setting for 65535 1000 to 65535 ( 2.5 to 163.8375 s)
monitoring (163.8375 s) Use of default setting (163.8375 s)
is recommended.
the formula
34 Constant scan time 0: Normal 1 to 64000 (0.1 to 6400 ms):
setting scan Scans once each specified time
interval.
0: Normal scan
the formula


value
Remote 35 Operation mode setting Enabled Enabled: CPU starts operation
I/O when the MEWNET-F (wait for after all the slave stations
control system is used connec- are recognized.
tion) Disabled: CPU starts operation
without waiting for slave
station connections
Only effective when registering
remote I/O allocation.
36 Data updating mode Scan Scan synchronous mode/
settings for MEWNET-F synchro- Scan asynchronous mode
system nous
PC link 0 40 PC link 0 Size of link 0 0 to 64 words * See
−P link PC link
41 system
t Size of link 0 0 to 128 words
data
registers
used for
PC link
42 Send area 0 0 to 63
starting
address of
link relay
43 Size of link 0 0 to 64 words
relays
used for
send area
starting
address of
link data
register
data
registers
used for
send area
46 PC link 0 and 1 allocation Normal Normal allocation:
setting for MEWNET−W/−P alloca- (PC link 0 for the link unit with a
link system tion smaller slot number and PC link 1
Reverse allocation:
(PC link 1 for the link unit with a
smaller slot number and PC link 0
Note
System register 46 should be set using NPST−GR Ver.4 or later.


value
MEWNET 49 Processing capacity 4 0: All data in a scan
−H setting for PC link of (1024 1 to 65535: Setting processing
setting MEWNET−H link system bytes per capacity per scan can be obtained
scan) using the formula “Capacity” = “Set
value” × 256 bytes
PC link 1 50 PC link 1 Size of link 0 0 to 64 words * See
−P link PC link
51 system
t Size of link 0 0 to 128 words
data
registers
used for
PC link
starting
address of
link relay
relays
used for
send area
54 Send area 128 128 to 255
starting
address of
link data
register
data
registers
used for
send area
General 412 Communication method Comput- COMPUTER LNK: computer link
(COM) setting for COM (RS232C) er link mode (when
port port connecting
setting C-NET)
GENERAL: serial data
communication mode
(general port)
Note
System register 412 should be set using NPST−GR Ver.4.0 or
later.


value
General 414 Baud rate setting for the 0 (19200 When the operation condition
(COM) tool port bps) switches (DIP switch) SW1 on the
port rear of the CPU is OFF, the baud
setting rate setting is effective.
0: 19200 bps 5: 19200 bps
1: 1200 bps 6: 38400 bps
2: 2400 bps 7: 57600 bps
3: 4800 bps 8: 115200 bps
4: 9600 bps
General 417 Starting address setting 0 0 to 10240 For details
commu- for data received of serial about its
nication data communication usage, refer to
setting mode the F144
(TRNS)/P144
418 Buffer capacity setting for 1024 0 to 1024 words (PTRNS)
data received of serial instructions on
data communication programming
mode manual.
Note
System registers 414, 417 and 418 should be set using NPST−GR
Ver.4.0 or later.

B.4.1 Operation of DF Instruction Between MC and MCE Instructions
When a leading edge detection instruction (DF instruction) is used with the MC and
MCE instructions, the derivative output may change as follows depending on the trigger
of MC instruction and input timing of DF instruction. Take care regarding this point.
X0
MC 0
X1 Y10
DF
MCE 0
Example 1
When system register 4 sets 0 (conventional)
Time chart 1
X0
X1
Y10
Previous execution The trigger X1 for the DF instruction has not changed
of DF instruction since the time of the previous execution, thus derivative
output is not obtained.
Time chart 2
X0
X1
Y10
Previous execution The trigger X1 for the DF instruction has changed from
of DF instruction OFF to ON since the time of the previous execution,
thus derivative output is obtained.

Example 2
When system register 4 sets 1 (new)
Time chart 1
X0
X1
Y10
Previous execution The derivative output is obtained without relation to

of DF instruction condition of trigger X1 of the time of previous execution.
Time chart 2
X0
X1
Y10
Previous execution The derivative output is obtained without relation to

of DF instruction condition of trigger X1 of the time of previous execution.


Appendix C
Table of Relays, Memory Areas and
Constants
C.1 Relays, Memory Areas and Constants
for FP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C − 3
C.2 Relays, Memory Areas and Constants

for FP10SH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C − 6
C.3 Relay Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C − 9

C −2 Matsushita Automation Controls

C.1 Relays, Memory Areas and Constants for FP3

Item Numbering Function
Relays External input X 2,048 points Turn ON/OFF based on external
relay (X0 to X127F) input.
External Y 2,048 points Externally outputs ON/OFF state.
output relay (Y0 to Y127F)
Internal relay R 1,568 points Relay which turns ON/OFF only
(* Note 1) (R0 to R97F) within program.
Link relay L 2,048 points This relay is a shared relay used
(* Note 1) (L0 to L127F) for MEWNET link system.
Timer T 256 points
p If a TM instruction has timed out,,
(* Notes 1 and 2) (T to T199/
(T0 T / C200
C the
h contact with
i h the
h same number
b
to C255) turns ON.
Counter C If a CT instruction has counted up,
p,
(* Notes 1 and 2) the
h contact with
i h the
h same number
b
turns ON.
Special R 176 points Relay which turns ON/OFF based
internal relay (R9000 to R910F) on specific conditions and is used
as a flag (* Appendix D).
Memory External input WX 128 words Code for specifying 16 external
areas relay (WX0 to WX127) input points as one word (16 bits) of
data.
External WY 128 words Code for specifying 16 external
output relay (WY0 to WY127) output points as one word (16 bits)
of data.
Internal relay WR 98 words Code for specifying 16 internal
(WR0 to WR97) relay points as one word (16 bits) of
data.
Link relay WL 128 words Code for specifying 16 link relay
(WL0 to WL127) points as one word (16 bits) of
data.
Data register DT 2,048 words Data memory used in program.
(* Note 1) (DT0 to DT2047) Data is handled in 16-bit units (one
word).
Link data LD 256 words This is a shared data memory
register (LD0 to LD255) which is used within the MEWNET
(* Note 1) link system. Data is handled in
16-bit units (one word).
Timer/Counter SV 256 words Data memory for storing a target
set value area (SV0 to SV255) value of a timer and an initial value
(* Note 1) of a counter. Stores by timer/counter
number.
next page
Matsushita Automation Controls C −3


Control Master control 64 points
instructi relay points (MCR)
on point
i t Number of labels 256 points
(JP and LOOP)
Number of step 1,000 stages
ladder
(* Note 4)
Number of 100 subroutines
subroutine
Number of 25 programs
interrupt program
Memory Timer/Counter EV 256 words Data memory for storing the
areas elapsed value (EV0 to EV255) elapsed value during operation of a
area (* Note 1) timer/counter. Stores by timer/
counter number.
File register FL FP3 ((16 K):
) Data memoryy used in program.
p g
(* Notes 1 and 3) 8 189 to
8,189 t 2,2525
2 2525 D t is
Data i handled
h dl d in
i 16-bit
16 bit units
it (one
(
words (FL0 to word).
FL22524)
FP3 (10 K):
0 to 8,189 words
(FL0 to FL8188)
Special data DT 256 words Data memory for storing specific
register (DT9000 to data. Various settings and error
DT9255) codes are stored (* Appendix E).
Index register IX 2 words (IX, IY) Register can be used as an
IY address of memory area and
constants modifier.
Constant Decimal K K−32768 to K32767 (for 16-bit operation)
constants
t t K−2147483648 to K2147483647 (for 32-bit operation)
Hexadecimal H H0 to HFFFF (for 16-bit operation)
constants
t t H0 to HFFFFFFFF (for 32-bit operation)
Notes
(*1): There are two unit types, the hold type that saves the condi-
tions that exist just before turning the power OFF or changing
form the RUN mode to PROG. mode, and the non-hold type
that resets them. The selection of hold type and non-hold type
can be change by the setting of system register (* section
B.1).
(*2): The points for the timer and counter can be changed by the
setting of system register 5. The numbers given in the table
are numbers when system register 5 is at its default setting.
For more details, refer to page B − 7.

(*3): The size of the file register varies depending on the settings of
system registers 0 and 1. For details, refer to page B − 6.
(*4): Hold or non-hold type can be set.

C.2 Relays, Memory Areas and Constants for FP10SH

Relays External input X 8,192 points Turn ON/OFF based on external
relay (X0 to X511F) input.
External Y 8,192 points Externally outputs ON/OFF state.
output relay (Y0 to Y511F)
Internal relay R 14,192 points Relay which turns ON/OFF only
(* Note 1) (R0 to R886F) within program.
Link relay L 10,240 points This relay is a shared relay used
(* Note 1) (L0 to L639F) for MEWNET link system.
Timer T 3,072
, points
p If a TM instruction has timed out,,
(* Notes 1 and 2) (T to T2999/
(T0 T / the
h contact with
i h the
h same number
b
C3000 to C3071) turns ON.
Counter C If a CT instruction has counted up,
p,
(* Notes 1 and 2) the
h contact with
i h the
h same number
b
turns ON.
Pulse relay P 2,048 points This relay is used to turn ON only
(P0 to P127F) for one scan duration programmed
with the OT" and OT# instructions.
Error alarm E 2,048 points This relay is used to store
relay (E0 to E2047) occurrence of abnormalities.
Its history is recorded in exclusive
buffer (special data registers
starting from DT90400).
Program this relay so that it is
turned ON at the time of
abnormality.
Special R 176 points Relay which turns ON/OFF based
internal relay (R9000 to R910F) on specific conditions and is used
as a flag (* Appendix D).
Memory External input WX 512 words Code for specifying 16 external
areas relay (WX0 to WX511) input points as one word (16 bits) of
data.
External WY 512 words Code for specifying 16 external
output relay (WY0 to WY511) output points as one word (16 bits)
of data.
Internal relay WR 887 words Code for specifying 16 internal
(WR0 to WR886) relay points as one word (16 bits) of
data.
Link relay WL 640 words Code for specifying 16 link relay
(WL0 to WL639) points as one word (16 bits) of
data.
Data register DT 10,240 words Data memory used in program.
(* Note 1) (DT0 to DT10239) Data is handled in 16-bit units (one
word).
next page


Memory Link data LD 8,448 words This is a shared data memory which is
areas register (LD0 to LD8447) used within the MEWNET link system.
(* Note 1) Data is handled in 16-bit units (one
word).
Timer/Counter SV 3,072 words Data memory for storing a target value
set value area (SV0 to SV3071) of a timer and an initial value of a
(* Note 1) counter. Stores by timer/counter number.
Timer/Counter EV 3,072 words Data memory for storing the elapsed
elapsed value (EV0 to EV3071) value during operation of a
area (* Note 1) timer/counter. Stores by timer/ counter
number.
File register FL 32,765 words Data memoryy used in program.
p g Data is
(* Note 1) (FL0 to
t FL32764) handled
h dl d in
i 16-bit
16 bit units
it (one
( word).
d)
Special data DT 512 words Data memory for storing specific data.
register (DT90000 to Various settings and error codes are
DT90511) stored (* Appendix E).
Index register I 14 words ×16 Register can be used as an address of
banks (I0 to ID) memory area and constants modifier.
Control Master control 256 points (when using the 90k step expansion memory,
instruc- relay points (MCR) up to a total of 512 points can be used for the 1st and 2nd
tion programs)
point
i t Number of labels 256 points (when using the 90k step expansion memory,
(JP and LOOP) up to a total of 512 points can be used for the 1st and 2nd
programs)
Number of step 1,000 steps (can only be used for the 1st program)
ladder (* Note 3)
Number of 100 subroutines (can only be used for the 1st program)
subroutine
Number of 25 program (can only be used for the 1st program)
interrupt program
Constant Decimal K K−32768 to K32767 (for 16-bit operation)
constants
(integer type) K−2147483648 to K2147483647 (for 32-bit operation)
Hexadecimal H H0 to HFFFF (for 16-bit operation)
constants
t t H0 to HFFFFFFFF (for 32-bit operation)
Decimal f f1.175494×10−38 to f3.402823×1038
constants
(monorefined
real number)
Notes
(*1): There are two unit types, the hold type that saves the conditions
that exist just before turning the power OFF or changing form the
RUN mode to PROG. mode, and the non-hold type that resets

them. The selection of hold type and non-hold type can be

change by the setting of system register (* section B.1).
(*2): The points for the timer and counter can be changed by the
setting of system register 5. The numbers given in the table
are numbers when system register 5 is at its default setting.
For more details, refer to page B − 7.
(*3): Hold or non-hold type can be set.

C.3 Relay Numbers
C.3 Relay Numbers

External input relays (X), External output relays (Y), Internal relays (R), Link relays
(L) and Pulse relays (P)
Since these relays are handled in units of 16 points, they are expressed as a
combination of decimal and hexadecimal numbers as shown below.
1,2,3･･･
Decimal number
0,1,2･･･9,A,B･･･F
Hexadecimal number
The maximum value that can be selected varies with each relay.
<Example> External input relay (X)

X0, X1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XF
X10, X11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X1F
X20, X21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X2F
X1270, X1271 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X127F
Timers (T) and Counters (C)

The addresses for timer contacts (T) and counter contacts (C) are correspond to the TM
(timer) and CT (counter) instruction numbers and expressed in decimals as shown
below.
0, 1, 2 …
Decimal number
T0, T1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T199
C200, C201 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C255
Counters and timers share the same area. The division of the area can be changed with
system register 5. (The table and example are when settings are the default values.)
Error alarm relays (E)

The addresses for error alarm relays (E) are represented in only decimals.
E0, E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2047

C.3 Relay Numbers
External input relay (X) and External output relay (Y)

Only relays with numbers actually allocated to input contacts can be used as external
input relay (X).
Only relays with numbers actually allocated to output contacts can output as external
output relay (Y). The external output relays (Y) which are not allocated can be used as
internal relays.
Allocation of numbers is determined by the combination of input and output units used
as shown in the example below.
<Example>
0 1 2 3 4 (Slot No.)
16 points type
16 points type
Power supply
output unit
input unit
CPU
unit
Y10 to Y1F
X0 to XF
The 16 points external input relays X0 through XF are allotted for the 16-point type input
unit for slot 0, and the 16 points external output relays Y10 through Y1F are allotted for
the 16-point type output unit for slot 1.
The 16 points X10 through X1F cannot be used in this such combination.
Combining input and output, 2,048 points can be used for the FP3 and 8,192 points for
the FP10SH.
Relation of WX,WY, WR and WL to X, Y, R and L

WX, WY, WR, WL correspond respecitively to groups of 16 external input (X) points, 16
external output (Y) points, 16 internal relay (R) points and 16 link relay (L) points.
<Example> FP3 word external input relay (WX)
Each relay is composed of 16 external inputs (X) as shown below.
When the state of an external input (X) changes, the content of WX also changes.
The error alarm relays (E) cannot be handled in units of words.
C − 10 Matsushita Automation Controls

Appendix D
Table of Special Internal Relays
D −2 Matsushita Automation Controls

The special internal relays turn ON and OFF under special conditions. The ON and OFF
states are not output externally. Writing is not possible with a programming tool or an
instruction.
Address Name Description
R9000 Self-diagnostic error Turns ON when a self-diagnostic error occurs.
flag The self-diagnostic error code is stored in:
− FP3: DT9000
− FP10SH: DT90000
R9001 Not used
R9002 MEWNET−TR master Turns ON when a communication error occurs in the
error flag MEWNET−TR master unit. The slot, where the
erroneous MEWNET−TR master unit is installed, can be
checked using:
− FP3: DT9002 and DT9003
− FP10SH: DT90002 and DT90003
R9003 Intelligent unit error Turns ON when an error occurs in an intelligent unit. The
flag slot number, where the erroneous intelligent unit is
installed, can be checked using:
− FP3: DT9006 and DT9007
− FP10SH: DT90006 and DT90007
R9004 I/O verification error Turns ON when an I/O verification error occurs.
flag The slot number of the I/O unit where the verification
error was occurred is stored in:
− FP3: DT9010 and DT9011
− FP10SH: DT90010 and DT90011
R9005 Backup battery error Turns ON for an instant when a backup battery error
flag (non-hold) occurs.
R9006 Backup battery error Turns ON and keeps the ON state when a backup
flag (hold) battery error occurs. To reset R9006,
− turn the power to the FP3/FP10SH OFF and then
turn it ON,
− initialize the FP3/FP10SH, after removing the cause
of error.
R9007 Operation error flag Turns ON and keeps the ON state when an operation
(hold) error occurs. The address where the error occurred is
stored in:
− FP3: DT9017
− FP10SH: DT90017
(indicates the first operation error which occurred).
R9008 Operation error flag Turns ON for an instant when an operation error occurs.
(non-hold) The address where the operation error occurred is
stored in:
− FP3: DT9018
− FP10SH: DT90018
The contents change each time a new error occurs.
Matsushita Automation Controls D −3


R9009 Carry flag Turns ON for an instant,
− when an overflow or underflow occurs.
− when “1” is set by one of the shift instructions.
R900A > flag Turns ON for an instant when the compared results
become larger in the comparison instructions “F60
(CMP)/P60 (PCMP), F61 (DCMP)/P61 (PDCMP), F62
(WIN)/P62 (PWIN) or F63 (DWIN)/P63 (PDWIN).”
R900B = flag Turns ON for an instant,
− when the compared results are equal in the
comparison instructions.
− when the calculated results become 0 in the
arithmetic instructions.
R900C < flag Turns ON for an instant when the compared results
become smaller in the comparison instructions “F60
(CMP)/ P60 (PCMP), F61 (DCMP)/P61 (PDCMP), F62
(WIN)/P62 (PWIN) or F63 (DWIN)/P63 (PDWIN).”
R900D Auxiliary timer Turns ON when the set time elapses (set value reaches
contact 0) in the timing operation of the F137 (STMR)/F183
(DSTM) auxiliary timer instruction.
The R900D turns OFF when the trigger for auxiliary
timer instruction turns OFF.
R900E Tool port error flag Turns ON when communication error at tool port is
(Available PLC: occurred.
FP10SH)
R900F Constant scan error Turns ON when scan time exceeds the time specified in
flag system register 34 during constant scan execution.
R9010 Always ON relay Always ON.
R9011 Always OFF relay Always OFF.
R9012 Scan pulse relay Turns ON and OFF alternately at each scan
R9013 Initial ON pulse Turns ON only at the first scan in the operation. Turns
relay OFF from the second scan and maintains the OFF state.
R9014 Initial OFF pulse Turns OFF only at the first scan in the operation. Turns
relay ON from the second scan and maintains the ON state.
R9015 Step ladder initial Turns ON for an instant only in the first scan of the
ON pulse relay process the moment the step ladder process is opened.
R9016 Not used
R9017 Not used
R9018 0.01 s clock pulse Repeats ON/OFF operations in 0.01 s
relay cycles.
(ON : OFF = 0.005 s : 0.005 s) 0.01 s
R9019 0.02 s clock pulse Repeats ON/OFF operations in 0.02 s
relay cycles.
(ON : OFF = 0.01 s : 0.01 s) 0.02 s
R901A 0.1 s clock pulse Repeats ON/OFF operations in 0.1 s
relay cycles.
(ON : OFF = 0.05 s : 0.05 s) 0.1 s


R901B 0.2 s clock pulse Repeats ON/OFF operations in 0.2 s
relay cycles.
(ON : OFF = 0.1 s : 0.1 s) 0.2 s
R901C 1 s clock pulse relay Repeats ON/OFF operations in 1 s
cycles.
(ON : OFF = 0.5 s : 0.5 s) 1s
R901D 2 s clock pulse relay Repeats ON/OFF operations in 2 s
cycles.
(ON : OFF = 1 s : 1 s) 2s
R901E 1 min clock pulse Repeats ON/OFF operations in 1 min
relay cycles.
(ON : OFF = 30 s : 30 s) 1 min
R901F Not used
R9020 RUN mode flag Turns OFF while the mode selector is set to PROG.
mode.
Turns ON while the mode selector is set to RUN.
R9021 Test RUN mode flag Turns ON while the initialize/test switch of the CPU is set
to TEST and mode selector is set to test RUN.
Turns OFF during the normal RUN mode.
R9022 Break flag Turns ON while the BRK instruction is executing or the
step run is executing.
R9023 Break enable flag Turns ON while the BRK instruction is enabled in the
test RUN mode.
R9024 Output update Turns ON while the output update is enabled in the test
enable flag in the RUN mode.
test RUN mode
R9025 Single instruction Turns ON while the single instruction execution is
flag selected in the test RUN mode.
R9026 Message flag Turns ON while the F149 (MSG)/P149 (PMSG)
instruction is executed.
R9027 Remote mode flag Turns ON while the mode selector is set to REMOTE.
R9028 Break clear flag Turns ON when the break operation is cleared.
R9029 Forcing flag Turns ON during forced ON/OFF operation for I/O relay
and timer/counter contacts.
R902A Interrupt flag Turns ON while the interrupt trigger is enabled by the
ICTL instruction.
R902B Interrupt error flag Turns ON when an interrupt error occurs.
R902C Sampling point flag Turns OFF during instructed sampling.
Turns ON while sampling is triggered by the periodical
interrupt.
R902D Sampling trace end Turns ON when the sampling trace ends.
flag
R902E Sampling trigger Turns ON when the trigger of the F156 (STRG)/P156
flag (PSTGR) instruction is turned ON.
R902F Sampling enable Turns ON when the starting point of sampling is
flag specified.


R9030 F145 (SEND)/P145 Monitors if FP3/FP10SH is in the F145 (SEND)/P145
(PSEND) and F146 (PSEND) and F146 (RECV)/P146 (PRECV) instructions
(RECV)/P146 executable condition as follows:
(PRECV) instruction − OFF: None of the above mentioned instructions can
executing flag be executed. (i.e., one of the above
instructions is being executed.)
− ON: One of the above mentioned instructions can
be executed.
R9031 F145 (SEND)/P145 Monitors if an abnormality has been detected during the
(PSEND) and F146 execution of the F145 (SEND)/ P145 (PSEND) and F146
(RECV)/P146 (RECV)/P146 (PRECV) instructions as follows:
(PRECV) instruction − OFF: No abnormality detected.
end flag − ON: An abnormality detected. (communication
error)
The error code is stored in:
− FP3: DT9039
− FP10SH: DT90039
R9032 COM port mode flag Monitors the mode of the COM port as:
(Available PLC: − ON: Serial data communication mode
FP10SH) − OFF: Computer link mode
R9033 F147 (PR) Turns ON while a F147 (PR) instruction is executed.
instruction flag
R9034 Editing in RUN Turns ON while editing a program in the RUN mode.
mode flag
R9035 F152 (RMRD)/P152 Monitors if FP3/FP10SH is in the F152 (RMRD)/P152
(PRMRD) and F153 (PRMRD) and F153 (RMWT)/P153 (PRMWT)
(RMWT)/P153 instructions executable condition as follows:
(PRMWT) − OFF: None of the above mentioned instructions can
instruction be executed. (i.e., one of the above
execution flag instructions is being executed.)
− ON: One of the above mentioned instructions can
be executed.
R9036 F152 (RMRD)/P152 Monitors if an abnormality has been detected during the
(PRMRD) and F153 execution of the F152 (RMRD)/P152 (PRMRD) and
(RMWT)/P153 F153 (RMWT)/P153 (PRMWT) instructions as follows:
(PRMWT) − OFF: No abnormality detected.
instruction end flag − ON: An abnormality detected. (access error)
The error code is stored in:
− FP3: DT9036
− FP10SH: DT90036
R9037 COM port Turns ON when the serial data communication error
communication occurs using COM port.
error flag Turns OFF when data is being sent by the F144 (TRNS)
(Available PLC: instruction.
FP10SH)


R9038 COM port receive Turns ON when a terminator is received during the serial
flag data communicating. (by the F144 (TRNS) instruction)
(Available PLC:
FP10SH)
R9039 COM port send flag Turns ON while data is not send during the serial data
(Available PLC: communicating. (by the F144 (TRNS) instruction)
FP10SH) Turns OFF while data is being sent during the serial data
communicating. (by the F144 (TRNS) instruction)
R903A Not used
R903B Not used
R903C Not used
R903D Not used
R903E Not used
R903F Not used
R9050 MEWNET−W/−P link When using MEWNET-W link unit or MEWNET−P link unit:
transmission error − turns ON when transmission error occurs at link 1.
flag [W/P LINK 1] − turns ON when there is an error in the link area settings.
(Available PLC:
FP10SH)
(Available PLC:
FP10SH)
R9055 MEWNET−H link When using MEWNET−H link unit:
transmission error − turns ON when trannsmission error occurs at H link 1.
flag [H LINK 1] − turns ON when there is an error in the link area settings.
(FP3 CPU Ver.4.3 or
later)
(FP3 CPU Ver.4.3 or
later)
(FP3 CPU Ver.4.3 or
later)


R9058 Remote I/O When using remote I/O system (MEWNET-F):
transmission error − turns ON when transmission error occurs on master 1.
flag (master 1) − turns ON when there is an error in the settings.
R9059 Remote I/O When using remote I/O system (MEWNET-F):
R905A Remote I/O When using remote I/O system (MEWNET-F):
R905B Remote I/O When using remote I/O system (MEWNET-F):
R905C Not used
R905D Not used
R905E Not used
R905F Not used


R9060 MEWNET−W/ Unit Turns ON when unit No. 1 is communicating properly in
−P PC link No.1 the PC link mode.
transmission Turns OFF when operation is stopped, when an error is
assurance occurring, or when not in the PC link mode.
R9061 relay
l [for
[f PC Unit Turns ON when unit No. 2 is communicating properly in
link 0(W/P)] No.2 the PC link mode.
Turns OFF when operation is stopped, when an error is
occurring, or when not in the PC link mode.
R9062 Unit Turns ON when unit No. 3 is communicating properly in
No.3 the PC link mode.
R906A Unit Turns ON when unit No. 11 is communicating properly in


R906B MEWNET−W/ Unit Turns ON when unit No. 12 is communicating properly in
R906C relay
l [for
[f PC Unit Turns ON when unit No. 13 is communicating properly in
link 0(W/P)] No.13 the PC link mode.
R906D Unit Turns ON when unit No. 14 is communicating properly in
R906E Unit Turns ON when unit No. 15 is communicating properly in
R906F Unit Turns ON when unit No. 16 is communicating properly in
D − 10 Matsushita Automation Controls


R9070 MEWNET−W/ Unit Turns ON when unit No. 1 is in the RUN mode.
−P PC link No.1 Turns OFF when unit No. 1 is in the PROG. mode.
R9071 operation
ti Unit Turns ON when unit No. 2 is in the RUN mode.
mode relay No.2 Turns OFF when unit No. 2 is in the PROG. mode.
[for PC link
R9072 0(W/P)] Unit Turns ON when unit No. 3 is in the RUN mode.
No.3 Turns OFF when unit No. 3 is in the PROG. mode.
R9073 Unit Turns ON when unit No. 4 is in the RUN mode.
R907A Unit Turns ON when unit No. 11 is in the RUN mode.
R907B Unit Turns ON when unit No. 12 is in the RUN mode.
R907C Unit Turns ON when unit No. 13 is in the RUN mode.
R907D Unit Turns ON when unit No. 14 is in the RUN mode.
R907E Unit Turns ON when unit No. 15 is in the RUN mode.
R907F Unit Turns ON when unit No. 16 is in the RUN mode.
R9080 MEWNET−W/ Unit Turns ON when unit No. 1 is communicating probably in
relay [for PC
R9081 Unit Turns ON when unit No. 2 is communicating probably in
link 1 (W/P)]
Matsushita Automation Controls D − 11


R9083 MEWNET−W/ Unit Turns ON when unit No. 4 is communicating probably in
relay [for PC
link 1 (W/P)]
R9089 Unit Turns ON when unit No. 10 is communicating probably
No.10 in the PC link mode.
R908A Unit Turns ON when unit No. 11 is communicating probably in
R908B Unit Turns ON when unit No. 12 is communicating probably
R908C Unit Turns ON when unit No. 13 is communicating probably
R908D Unit Turns ON when unit No. 14 is communicating probably


R908E MEWNET−W/ Unit Turns ON when unit No. 15 is communicating probably
−P PC link No.15 in the PC link mode.
relay [for PC
R908F Unit Turns ON when unit No. 16 is communicating probably
link 1 (W/P)]
R9090 MEWNET-W/ Unit Turns ON when unit No. 1 is in the RUN mode.
−P PC link No.1 Turns OFF when unit No. 1 is in the PROG. mode.
R9091 operation
ti Unit Turns ON when unit No. 2 is in the RUN mode.
mode relay No.2 Turns OFF when unit No. 2 is in the PROG. mode.
[for PC link 1
R9092 (W/P)] Unit Turns ON when unit No. 3 is in the RUN mode.
R909A Unit Turns ON when unit No. 11 is in the RUN mode.
No.11 Turns OFF when unit No.11 is in the PROG. mode.
R909B Unit Turns ON when unit No. 12 is in the RUN mode.
R909C Unit Turns ON when unit No. 13 is in the RUN mode.
R909D Unit Turns ON when unit No. 14 is in the RUN mode.
R909E Unit Turns ON when unit No. 15 is in the RUN mode.
R909F Unit Turns ON when unit No. 16 is in the RUN mode.
Matsushita Automation Controls D − 13


R9100 IC memory card Monitors whether the IC memory card is installed or not:
installation flag − ON: IC memory card is installed.
(Available PLC: − OFF: IC memory card is not installed.
FP10SH)
R9101 IC memory card Monitors the voltage drop condition for the IC memory
backup battery flag 1 card as:
(* Note) − ON: Data in the IC memory card cannot be
(Available PLC: guaranteed.
FP10SH) − OFF: Data in the IC memory card can be
maintained.
R9102 IC memory card Monitors the voltage drop condition for the IC memory
backup battery flag 2 card as:
(* Note) − ON: Battery replacement is required.
(Available PLC: − OFF: Battery replacement is not required.
FP10SH)
R9103 IC memory card Monitors the protective condition of the IC memory card
protect switch flag as:
(Available PLC: − ON: Switch is not in the write−protected (WP)
FP10SH) position
− OFF: Switch is in the write−protected (WP) position
R9104 IC memory card Monitors the condition of the IC memory card access
access switch flag enable switch as:
(Available PLC: − ON: The access enable switch is in the ON
FP10SH) position (Access enabled).
− OFF: The access enable switch is in the OFF
position (Access disabled).
R9105 Not used
through
R910F
Note
The IC memory card backup battery condition can be judged
using internal relays R9101 and R9102 as follows:
R9101 R9102 IC memory card condition

OFF OFF Not battery replacement required.
OFF ON Replace backup battery.
The data in the IC memory card is maintained.
ON ON The IC memory card has lost its data.
Replace backup battery.

Appendix E
Table of Special Data Registers
E −2 Matsushita Automation Controls

The special data registers are one-word (16-bit) memory areas which store specific
information. With the exception of registers for which “Writing is possible” is indicated
in the “Description” column, these registers cannot be written to.
Address
Name Description
FP3 FP10SH
DT9000 DT90000 Self-diagnostic error The self-diagnostic error code is stored here when a
code self-diagnostic error occurs. Monitor the error code
using decimal display. See Appendix F.
DT9001 DT90001 Not used
DT9002 DT90002 Erroneous The slot number, where an erroneous unit is installed,
MEWNET−TR master can be monitored here. “1” (ON) is set in the bit
unit (slot No. 0 to 15) position corresponding to the slot number when an
erroneous MEWNET−TR master unit is detected.
Bit position 15 · · 12 11 · · 8 7 · · 4 3 · · 0
Slot number 15 · · 12 11 · · 8 7 · · 4 3 · · 0
DT9003 DT90003 Erroneous DT9002/DT90002
MEWNET−TR master
Bit position 15 · · 12 11 · · 8 7 · · 4 3 · · 0
unit (slot No. 16 to 31)
Slot number 31 · · 28 27 · · 24 23 · · 20 19 · · 16
DT9003/DT90003
1: error 0: normal
DT9006 DT90006 Abnormal intelligent When an error condition is detected in an intelligent
unit (slot No. 0 to 15) unit, the bit corresponding to the slot of the unit will be
set to ON. Monitor using binary display.
Bit position 15 · · 12 11 · · 8 7 · · 4 3 · · 0
Slot number 15 · · 12 11 · · 8 7 · · 4 3 · · 0
DT9006/DT90006
DT9007 DT90007 Abnormal intelligent
unit (slot No. 16 to 31) Bit position 15 · · 12 11 · · 8 7 · · 4 3 · · 0
Slot number 31 · · 28 27 · · 24 23 · · 20 19 · · 16
DT9007/DT90007
1: abnormal intelligent unit 0: normal intelliget unit

DT9010 DT90010 I/O verify error unit When the state of installation of an I/O unit has
(slot No. 0 to 15) changed since the power was turned ON, the bit
corresponding to the slot of the unit will be set to ON.
Monitor using binary display.
Bit position 15 · · 12 11 · · 8 7 · · 4 3 · · 0
Slot number 15 · · 12 11 · · 8 7 · · 4 3 · · 0
DT9011 DT90011 I/O verify error unit DT9010/DT90010
(slot No. 16 to 31)
Bit position 15 · · 12 11 · · 8 7 · · 4 3 · · 0
Slot number 31 · · 28 27 · · 24 23 · · 20 19 · · 16
DT9011/DT90011
1: error 0: normal
Matsushita Automation Controls E −3

Address
Name Description
FP3 FP10SH
DT9014 DT90014 Auxiliary register for One shift-out hexadecimal digit is stored in bit
operation positions 0 to 3 when an F105 (BSR)/P105 (PBSR)
or F106 (BSL)/P106 (PBSL) instruction is executed.
DT9015 DT90015 Auxiliary register for The divided remainder (16-bit) is stored in DT9015/
DT9016 DT90016 operation DT90015 when an F32 (%)/P32 (P%) or F52 (B%)/
P52 (PB%) instruction is executed.
The divided remainder (32-bit) is stored DT9015 and
DT9016/DT90015 and DT90016 when an F33 (D%)
/P33 (PD%) or F53 (DB%)/P53 (PDB%) instruction is
executed.
DT9017 DT90017 Operation error After commencing operation, the address where the
address (hold) first operation error occurred is stored. Monitor the
address using decimal display.
DT9018 DT90018 Operation error The address where a operation error occurred is
address (non-hold) stored. Each time an error occurs, the new address
overwrites the previous address. At the beginning of
scan, the address is 0. Monitor the address using
decimal display.
DT9019 DT90019 2.5 ms ring counter The data stored here is increased by one every 2.5
ms. (H0 to HFFFF)
Difference between the values of the two points
(absolute value) × 2.5 ms = Elapsed time between
the two points.
DT9020 Maximum value of The last address of sequence program area set in
program (for FP3) system register 0 is stored.
DT90020 Display of program The program capacity is stored in decimal.
capacity (for FP10SH) <Example>
K30: approx. 30 K steps
K60: approx. 60 K steps (with memory expansion)
DT9021 DT90021 Maximum value of file The maximum (last) address of the file registers
(* Note) (* Note) register available are stored in:
− FP3: DT9021
− FP10SH: DT90021
Note
Used by the system.

Address
Name Description
FP3 FP10SH
DT9022 DT90022 Scan time (current The current scan time is stored Scan time display
value) here. Scan time is calculated is only possible in
using the formula: RUN mode, and
Scan time (ms) = stored data shows the
(decimal) × 0.1 operation cycle
<Example> time. The
K50 indicates 5 ms. maximum and
DT9023 DT90023 Scan time (minimum The minimum scan time is stored minimumi i values
l
value) here. Scan time is calculated are cleared when
using the formula: each the mode is
Scan time (ms) = stored data switched
(decimal) × 0.1 between RUN
mode and
<Example>
PROG. mode.
K50 indicates 5 ms.
DT9024 DT90024 Scan time (maximum The maximum scan time is
value) stored here. Scan time is
calculated using the formula:
Scan time (ms) = stored data
(decimal) × 0.1
<Example>
K125 indicates 12.5 ms.
DT9025 DT90025 Mask condition The mask conditions of interrupt unit initiated
(* Note) (* Note) monitoring register for interrupts using ICTL instruction can be monitored
interrupt unit initiated here. Monitor using binary display.
interrupts Bit position 15 · · 12 11 · · 8 7 · · 4 3 · · 0
(INT 0 to INT 15)
INT program 15 · · 12 11 · · 8 7 · · 4 3 · · 0
DT9025/DT90025
0: interrupt disabled (masked)

1: interrupt enabled (unmasked)
DT9026 DT90026 Mask condition The mask conditions of intelligent unit initiated
monitoring register for interrupts using ICTL instruction can be monitored
intelligent unit initiated here. Monitor using binary display.
interrupts Bit position 15 · · 12 11 · · 8 7 · · 4 3 · · 0
(INT 16 to INT 32)
INT program 23 · · 20 19 · · 16
DT9026/DT90026
0: interrupt disabled (masked)

1: interrupt enabled (unmasked)
DT9027 DT90027 Periodical interrupt The value set by ICTL instruction is stored.
(* Note) (* Note) interval (INT24) − K0: periodical interrupt is not used
− K1 to K3000: 10 ms to 30 s
DT9028 DT90028 Sample trace interval The value registered using NPST-GR is stored.
(* Note) (* Note) − K0: sampling triggered by F155 (SMPL)/P155
(PSMPL) instruction
− K1 to K3000 (× 10 ms): 10 ms to 30 s
Note
Used by the system.

Address
Name Description
FP3 FP10SH
DT9029 DT90029 Break address The address (K constant) of a break in a test run is
(* Note) (* Note) stored.
DT9030 DT90030 Message 0 The contents of the specified message are stored in
(* Note) (* Note) these special
p data registers
g when an F149
DT9031 DT90031 Message 1 (MSG)/P149 (PMSG) instruction is executed.
(* Note) (* Note)
DT9032 DT90032 Message 2
(* Note) (* Note)
(* Note) (* Note)
(* Note) (* Note)
(* Note) (* Note)
DT9036 DT90036 F152 (RMRD)/P152 The error code is stored here if an F152
(PRMRD) and F153 (RMRD)/P152 (PRMRD) or F153 (RMWT)/P153
(RMWT)/P153 (PRMWT) instruction was executed abnormally.
(PRMWT) instructions When the instruction was successfully executed “0” is
end code stored.
− Other than K0: error code is stored.
Refer to the description for the F152 (RMRD)/P152
(PRMRD) and F153 (RMWT)/P153 (PRMWT)
instructions and the MEWNET-F (REMOTE I/O)
SYSTEM manual.
Abnormal unit display If an abnormal unit is installed to the backplane, the
slot number of that unit will be stored. Monitor using
decimal display.
DT9037 DT90037 Work 1 for F96 (SRC)/ The number of found data is stored here when an F96
P96 (PSRC) (SRC)/P96 (PSRC) instruction is executed.
instructions
DT9038 DT90038 Work 2 for F96 The data position, found in the first place counting
(SRC)/P96 (PSRC) from the first 16-bit area, is stored here when an F96
instructions (SRC)/P96 (PSRC) instruction is executed.
DT9039 DT90039 F145 (SEND)/P145 The error code is stored here if an F145 (SEND)/
(PSEND) and F146 P145 (PSEND) or F146 (RECV)/P146 (PRECV)
(RECV)/P146 (PRECV) instruction was executed abnormally.
instructions end code − K0: instruction was successfully executed.
− Other than K0: error code is stored.
Refer to the description for the F145 (SEND)/P145
(PSEND) and F146 (RECV)/P146 (PRECV)
instructions and the manual of MEWNET link system.
Note
Used by the system.

Address
Name Description
FP3 FP10SH
DT9053 DT90053 Clock/calendar Hour and minute data of the clock/calendar are
monitor (hour/minute) stored here. This data is read-only data; it cannot be
overwritten.
Higher 8 bits Lower 8 bits
Hour data Minute data

H00 to H23 (BCD) H00 to H59 (BCD)
DT9054 DT90054 Clock/calendar The year, month, day, hour, minute, second, and
monitor and setting day-of-the-week data for the calendar timer is stored.
(minute/second) The built-in calendar timer will operate correctly
through the year 2099 and supports leap years. The
calendar timer can be set (the time set) by writing a
DT9055 DT90055 Clock/calendar value using a programming tool or a program that
monitor and setting uses the F0 (MV) transfer instruction.
(day/hour) Higher 8 bits Lower 8 bits
DT9056 DT90056 Clock/calendar

monitor and setting DT9054/ Minute Second
DT90054 H00 to H59 (BCD) H00 to H59 (BCD)
(year/month)
DT9055/ Day Hour
DT90055 H01 to H31 (BCD) H00 to H23 (BCD)
DT9057 DT90057 Clock/calendar DT9056/ Year Month
monitor and setting DT90056 H00 to H99 (BCD) H01 to H12 (BCD)
(day-of-the-week) DT9057/ Day-of-the-week
DT90057 H00 to H06 (BCD)

Address
Name Description
FP3 FP10SH
DT9058 DT90058 Clock/calendar time The clock/calendar is adjusted as follows.
(* Note) (* Note) setting and 30s When setting the clock/calendar by program that
correction uses F0 (MV) instructions
By setting the the highest bit of DT9058/DT90058 to
1, the time becomes that written to DT9054 to
DT9057/DT90054 to DT90057 by F0 (MV)
instruction. After the time is set, DT9058/DT90058 is
cleared to 0. (Cannot be performed with any
instruction other than F0 (MV) instruction.)
<EXAMPLE>
Set the time to 12:00:00 on the 5th day when the X0
turns ON.
X0
( DF ) 1
. . Inputs 0
1 [ F0 MV, H 0, DT9054 ]
minutes and 0
seconds
[ F0 MV, H 512, DT9055 ] . . Inputs 12th
hour 5th day
[ F0 MV, H8000, DT9058 ] . . Sets the time
Note
If you changed the values of DT9054 to
DT9057/DT90054 to DT90057 with the data
monitor functions of NPST-GR software or FP
programmer II, the time will be set when the
new values are written. Therefore, it is
unnecessary to write to DT9058/DT90058.
When the correcting times less than 30 seconds
By setting the lowest bit of DT9058/DT90058 to 1, the
value will be moved up or down and become exactly
0 seconds. After the correction is completed,
DT9058/DT90058 is cleared to 0.
<EXAMPLE>
Correct to 0 seconds with X0 turns ON
X0
( DF ) 1
Correct to 0
1 [ F0 MV, H 0, DT9058 ] second.
At the time of correction, if between 0 and 29

seconds, it will be moved down, and if the between
30 and 59 seconds, it will be moved up. In the
example above, if the time was 5 minutes 29
seconds, it will become 5 minutes 0 second; and, if
the time was 5 minutes 35 seconds, it will become 6
minutes 0 second.
Note
Used by the system.

Address
Name Description
FP3 FP10SH
DT9059 DT90059 Communication error The error code (decimal) is stored when
(* Note) (* Note) code communication error occurs.
for RS232C port for tool port

DT9060 DT90060 Step ladder process Indicates the startup condition of the step ladder
(0 to 15) process.
p
DT9061 DT90061 Step ladder process Wh the
When h process starts up, theh bit
bi corresponding
di to
(16 to 31) the process number turns ON.
display
DT9062 DT90062 Step ladder process
<Example>
(32 to 47)
Bit position
iti 15 · · 12 11 · · 8 7 · · 4 3 · · 0
Process number 15 · · 12 11 · · 8 7 · · 4 3 · · 0
(48 to 63)
DT9060/DT90060 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
DT9064 DT90064 Step ladder process 0: not-executing
(64 to 79) 1: executing
Since bit position 0 of DT9060/DT90060 is “1”, step
(80 to 95)
ladder process 0 is executing.
executing
DT9066 DT90066 Step ladder process A programming tool can be used to write data.
(96 to 111)
(112 to 127)
(128 to 143)
(144 to 159)
(160 to 175)
(176 to 191)
(192 to 207)
(208 to 223)
(224 to 239)
(240 to 255)
(256 to 271)
(272 to 287)
Note
Used by the system.

Address
Name Description
FP3 FP10SH
(288 to 303) process.
p
bi corresponding
di to
display
<Example>
(320 to 335)
Bit position
iti 15 · · 12 11 · · 8 7 · · 4 3 · · 0
(336 to 351) Process number 335 · ·332 331 · ·328 327 · ·324 323 · ·320
DT9080/DT90080 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
DT9082 DT90082 Step ladder process 0: not-executing,
(352 to 367)
1: executing
(368 to 383) Since bit position 0 of DT9080/DT90080 is “1”, step
ladder process 320 is executing.
executing
(384 to 399)
(400 to 415)
(416 to 431)
(432 to 447)
(448 to 463)
(464 to 479)
(480 to 495)
(496 to 511)
(512 to 527)
(528 to 543)
(544 to 559)
(560 to 575)
(576 to 591)
(592 to 607)
(608 to 623)
(624 to 639)
E − 10 Matsushita Automation Controls

Address
Name Description
FP3 FP10SH
(640 to 655) process.
p
bi corresponding
di to
display
<Example>
(672 to 687)
Bit position 15 · · 12 11 · · 8 7 · · 4 3 · · 0
Process number 655 · ·652 651 · ·648 647 · ·644 643 · ·640
(688 to 703) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
DT9100/DT90100
DT9104 DT90104 Step ladder process 0: not-executing,
(704 to 719) 1: executing
DT9105 DT90105 Step ladder process Since bit position 0 of DT9100/DT90100 is “1”, step
(720 to 735) ladder process 640 is executing.
(736 to 751)
(752 to 767)
(768 to 783)
(784 to 799)
(800 to 815)
(816 to 831)
(832 to 847)
(848 to 863)
(864 to 879)
(880 to 895)
(896 to 911)
(912 to 927)
(928 to 943)
(944 to 959)
(960 to 975)
(976 to 991)
(992 to 999)
(Higher byte: not used)
Matsushita Automation Controls E − 11

Address
Name Description
FP3 FP10SH
DT9126 DT90126 Forced ON/OFF This displays the number of a unit that has executed
(* Note) (* Note) operating station forced ON/OFF operation.
monitor
DT9127 DT90127 MEWNET-F system The number of times, which MEWNET−F remote I/O
(* Note) (* Note) remote I/O service service was performed by each master, is stored.
time Higher 8 bits Lower 8 bits
For master 2 For master 1

DT9128 DT90128 The number of times, which MEWNET−F remote I/O
(* Note) (* Note) service was performed by each master, is stored.

DT9131 DT90131 MEWNET-F (remote The contents displayed by DT9132 to DT9135/
I/O) slave stations DT90132 to DT90135 will change depending on the
abnormality checking contents of stored in DT9131/DT90131. Use the
(for selecting the programming tools to write the settings for what you
display contents and want to display (this can also be done with the F0
master of DT9132 to (MV) move instruction).
DT9135/DT90132 to Set the code specifying the display contents (H0 or
DT90135) H1) in the higher 8 bits and set the code specifying
the display master (H0 to H3) in the lower 8 bits.
DT9131/
DT90131
Display master
H0: Master 1
H1: Master 2
H2: Master 3
H3: Master 4
Display contents
H0: Abnormal slave station
H1: I/O verify abnormal slave station
Slave station where momentary
power outage is occurring
Note
Used by the system.

Address
Name Description
FP3 FP10SH
DT9132 DT90132 MEWNET-F (remote The bit corresponding to the station number of the
DT9133 DT90133 I/O) error slave station MEWNET-F where an error is occurring is set to ON.
number - current Monitor using binary display.
condition (when Bit position 15 · · 12 11 · · 8 7 · · 4 3 · · 0
DT9131/DT90131 is Slave station no.16 · · 13 12 · · 9 8 · · 5 4 · · 1
H0, H1, H2 or H3) DT9132/DT90132
Bit position 15 · · 12 11 · · 8 7 · · 4 3 · · 0
Slave station no.32 · · 29 28 · · 25 24 · · 21 20 · · 17
DT9133/DT90133
1: Error slave station
0: Normal slave station
MEWNET-F (remote When the installed condition of a MEWNET-F slave
I/O) I/O verify error station set unit has changed since the power was
slave station number turned ON, the bit corresponding to that slave station
(when DT9131/ number will be set to ON. Monitor using binary
DT90131 is H100, display.
H101, H102 or H103) Bit position 15 · · 12 11 · · 8 7 · · 4 3 · · 0
Slave station no.16 · · 13 12 · · 9 8 · · 5 4 · · 1
DT9132/DT90132
Bit position 15 · · 12 11 · · 8 7 · · 4 3 · · 0
Slave station no.32 · · 29 28 · · 25 24 · · 21 20 · · 17
DT9133/DT90133

DT9134 DT90134 MEWNET-F (remote The bit corresponding to the slave station number of
DT9135 DT90135 I/O) error slave station the MEWNET-F where an error is occurring will be set
number - record (when to ON. Monitor using binary display.
DT9131/DT90131 is Bit position 15 · · 12 11 · · 8 7 · · 4 3 · · 0
H0, H1, H2 or H3) Slave station no.16 · · 13 12 · · 9 8 · · 5 4 · · 1
DT9134/DT90134
Bit position 15 · · 12 11 · · 8 7 · · 4 3 · · 0
Slave station no.32 · · 29 28 · · 25 24 · · 21 20 · · 17
DT9135/DT90135

MEWNET-F (remote If a momentary power outage at an MEWNET-F slave
I/O) voltage dip slave station set, the bit corresponding to that slave station
station number (when number will be set to ON. Monitor using binary
DT9131/DT90131 is display.
H100, H101, H102 or Bit position 15 · · 12 11 · · 8 7 · · 4 3 · · 0
H103) Slave station no.16 · · 13 12 · · 9 8 · · 5 4 · · 1
DT9134/DT90134
Bit position 15 · · 12 11 · · 8 7 · · 4 3 · · 0
Slave station no.32 · · 29 28 · · 25 24 · · 21 20 · · 17
DT9135/DT90135


Address
Name Description
FP3 FP10SH
DT9136 DT90136 Error code of Displays the error conditions for 8 types of errors
DT9137 DT90137 MEWNET-F using 1 byte.
(remote I/O) system
1: Abnormal condition
0: Normal condition
Communication error
Transmission error
Illegal unit error
Terminal station error
Slot number error
I/O mapping error
Voltage dip error
Abnormal I/O unit error
DT9136/DT90136

DT9137/DT90137

DT9140 DT90140 MEWNET-W/-P PC The number of times the receiving operation is
(* Note 1) (* Note 1) link status [PC
[ link 0 performed (counted using ring counter).
DT9141 DT90141 (W/P)] (
(* Note
N 2)) The current interval between two receiving
(* Note 1) (* Note 1) operations: value in the register × 2.5ms
DT9142 DT90142 The minimum interval between two receiving
DT9143 DT90143 The maximum interval between two receiving
DT9144 DT90144 The number of times the sending operation is
(* Note 1) (* Note 1) performed (counted using ring counter).
DT9145 DT90145 The current interval between two sending operations:
(* Note 1) (* Note 1) value in the register × 2.5ms
DT9146 DT90146 The minimum interval between two sending
DT9147 DT90147 The maximum interval between two sending
Notes
(*1): Used by the system.
(*2): When system register 46 = K0, First: PC link 0, second: PC link 1
When system register 46 = K1, First: PC link 1, second: PC link 0

Address
Name Description
FP3 FP10SH
DT9148 DT90148 MEWNET-W/-P PC The number of times the receiving operation is
(* Note 1) (* Note 1) link status [PC
[ link 1 performed (counted using ring counter).
DT9149 DT90149 (W/P)] (* ( Note
N 2)) The current interval between two receiving
DT9150 DT90150 The minimum interval between two receiving
DT9151 DT90151 The maximum interval between two receiving
DT9152 DT90152 The number of times the sending operation is
(* Note 1) (* Note 1) performed (counted using ring counter).
DT9153 DT90153 The current interval between two sending operations:
(* Note 1) (* Note 1) value in the register × 2.5ms
DT9154 DT90154 The minimum interval between two sending
DT9155 DT90155 The maximum interval between two sending
DT9156 DT90156 MEWNET-W/-P PC Area used for measurement of receiving interval.
link status [PC link 0
DT9157 DT90157 (W/P)] (* Note 2) Area used for measurement of sending interval.
DT9158 DT90158 MEWNET-W/-P PC Area used for measurement of receiving interval.
link status [PC link 1
DT9159 DT90159 (W/P)] (* Note 2) Area used for measurement of sending interval.
DT9160 DT90160 Link unit No. Stores the unit No. of link 1
[W/P link 1]
DT9161 DT90161 Error flag [W/P link 1] Stores the error flag of link 1
[W/P link 2]
[W/P link 3]
Notes
(*1): Used by the system.
(*2): When system register 46 = K0, First: PC link 0, second: PC link 1
When system register 46 = K1, First: PC link 1, second: PC link 0

Address
Name Description
FP3 FP10SH
DT9170 DT90170 MEWNET-W/-P link Station number, where the send area address for the
status [[W/P link 1]] PC link is overlapped with this station, is stored here.
DT9171 DT90171 Test result in the optical transmission path test mode
for MEWNET−P link system is stored here.
DT9172 DT90172 Counts how many times a token is lost.
DT9173 DT90173 Counts how many times two or more tokens are
detected.
DT9174 DT90174 Counts how many times a signal is lost.
DT9175 DT90175 Counts how many times a synchronous abnormality
is detected.
DT9176 DT90176 Send NACK
DT9178 DT90178 Send WACK
DT9180 DT90180 Send answer
DT9182 DT90182 Unidentified command
DT9183 DT90183 Counts how many times a parity error is detected.
DT9184 DT90184 Counts how many times an end code error is
detected.
DT9185 DT90185 Format error
DT9186 DT90186 Not support error
DT9187 DT90187 Self-diagnostic result
DT9188 DT90188 Counts how many times loop change is detected.
DT9189 DT90189 Counts how many times link error is detected.
DT9190 DT90190 Counts how many times main loop break is detected.
DT9191 DT90191 Counts how many times sub loop break is detected.
DT9192 DT90192 Loop reconstructing condition
DT9193 DT90193 Loop operation mode
DT9194 DT90194 Loop input status
DT9195 DT90195 MEWNET−H link The link status for the MEWNET−H link unit is
status/link unit number monitored as:
in the H link 1 position Higher 8 bits Lower 8 bits
DT9195/DT90195
Link status for Unit number of

system use the network
DT9196/DT90196


Address Name
Description
FP3 FP10SH
DT9197/DT90197

detected.
is detected.
detected.

Address
Name Description
FP3 FP10SH
detected.
is detected.
detected.
DT9255 DT90255 Monitoring TOOL port Station number (range: H1 to H32) set for FP10SH
(Not used) station number TOOL (RS232C) port is stored here in the BCD
(Available PLC: expression.
FP10SH)
DT9256 DT90256 Monitoring COM port Station number (range: H1 to H32) set for FP10SH
(Not used) station number COM (RS232C) port is stored here in the BCD
(Available PLC: expression.
FP10SH)
DT9257 DT90257 Operation error An operation error program block number is stored
(Not used) program number here when an operation error is detected.
(hold) Program block number
(Available PLC: − H1: In the first program block
FP10SH) − H2: In the 2nd program block

Address
Name Description
FP3 FP10SH
DT9258 DT90258 Operation error The program block number for the latest operation
(Not used) program number error is stored here each time an operation error is
(non−hold) detected.
(Available PLC: Program block number
FP10SH) − H1: In the first program block
− H2: In the 2nd program block
DT9259 DT90259 Break occurrence The program block number where the BRK
(Not used) program number instruction occurred is stored here.
(Available PLC: Program block number
FP10SH) − H1: In the first program block
− H2: In the 2nd program block
DT9260 DT90260 Type of IC memory Type of IC memory card is monitored here as:
(Not used) card installed − H5: Flash−EEPROM type IC memory card
(Available PLC: − H6: SRAM type IC memory card
FP10SH) − H506: Flash−EEPROM/SRAM mixed type IC
memory card
− H6: No archival information is stored
− H6: No data is written
− Other than above: Erroneous condition
(* Error code E56)
DT9261 DT90261 Capacity of IC memory The capacity of IC memory card is stored in units of
(Not used) card 1 KB. If Flash−EEPROM/SRAM mixed type IC memory
(Available PLC: card is used, SRAM capacity is stored.
FP10SH)
DT9262 DT90262 Capacity of IC memory The capacity of IC memory card is stored in units of
(Not used) card 2 KB. If Flash−EEPROM/SRAM mixed type IC memory
(Available PLC: card is used, flash−EEPROM capacity is stored.
FP10SH)
DT9265 DT90265 FP10SH free compile Free capacity of FP10SH compile memory is stored
(Not used) memory capacity here. If 120 k steps memory expansion is used, the
(Available PLC: capacity of the 1st program block number is stored.
FP10SH)
DT9266 DT90266 FP10SH free compile Free capacity of FP10SH program block 2 compile
(Not used) memory capacity for memory is stored here.
program block 2
(Available PLC:
FP10SH)
(Not used) (Not used)
DT9268 DT90268 Index register bank The current value of index register bank is stored
(Not used) (current value) here.
(Available PLC:
FP10SH)
DT9269 DT90269 Index register bank The shelter number of index register bank is stored
(Not used) (shelter number) here.
(Available PLC:
FP10SH)

Address
Name Description
FP3 FP10SH
(Not used) (Not used)
DT9400 DT90400 Number of the error The total of the error alarm relay which went ON is
(Not used) alarm relay which went stored here. (Max. 500)
ON To reset all data in the error alarm buffer, use an RST
(Available PLC: instruction and DT90400.
FP10SH) X1
( DF ) R DT90400
DT9401 DT90401 First error alarm relay The first error alarm relay number which went ON is
(Not used) which went ON stored.
(Available PLC: The error has been reset by executing a RST
FP10SH) instruction.
Example 1: Using RST instruction
Specify the stored
error alarm relay
X1 E12 number (E12)
( DF ) R
Example 2: Using RST instruction and DT90401

X1
( DF ) R DT90401
DT9402 DT90402 Second error alarm The error alarm relay number which went ON is
(Not used) relay which went ON stored.
(Available PLC: To reset the specified error alarm relay, ues an RST
Relay number
DT9403 DT90403 Third error alarm relay (E12) to rest
(Not used) which went ON X1 E12
(Available PLC: ( DF ) R
FP10SH)
DT9404 DT90404 Fourth error alarm
(Not used) relay which went ON
(Available PLC:
FP10SH)
DT9405 DT90405 Fifth error alarm relay
(Not used) which went ON
(Available PLC:
FP10SH)
DT9406 DT90406 Sixth error alarm relay
(Available PLC:
FP10SH)
DT9407 DT90407 Seventh error alarm
(Available PLC:
FP10SH)

Address
Name Description
FP3 FP10SH
DT9408 DT90408 Eighth error alarm The error alarm relay number which went ON is
(Not used) relay which went ON stored.
(Available PLC: To reset the specified error alarm relay, ues an RST
Relay number
DT9409 DT90409 Ninth error alarm relay (E12) to rest
(Not used) which went ON X1 E12
(Available PLC: ( DF ) R
FP10SH)
DT9410 DT90410 Tenth error alarm relay
(Available PLC:
FP10SH)
DT9411 DT90411 Eleventh error alarm
(Available PLC:
FP10SH)
DT9412 DT90412 Twelfth error alarm
(Available PLC:
FP10SH)
DT9413 DT90413 Thirteenth error alarm
(Available PLC:
FP10SH)
DT9414 DT90414 Fourteenth error alarm
(Available PLC:
FP10SH)
DT9415 DT90415 Fifteenth error alarm
(Available PLC:
FP10SH)
DT9416 DT90416 Sixteenth error alarm
(Available PLC:
FP10SH)
DT9417 DT90417 Seventeenth error
(Not used) alarm relay which went
ON
(Available PLC:
FP10SH)
DT9418 DT90418 Eighteenth error alarm
(Available PLC:
FP10SH)
DT9419 DT90419 Nineteenth error alarm
(Available PLC:
FP10SH)

Address
Name Description
FP3 FP10SH
DT9420 DT90420 Time at which the first The minute and second data at which the first error
(Not used) error alarm relay alarm relay in DT90401 went ON is stored.
(DT90401) went ON
(for minute and
second data)
(Available PLC:
FP10SH)
DT9421 DT90421 Time at which the first The day and hour data at which the first error alarm
(Not used) error alarm relay relay in DT90401 went ON is stored.
(DT90401) went ON
(for day and hour data)
(Available PLC:
FP10SH)
DT9422 DT90422 Time at which the first The year and month data at which the first error alarm
(Not used) error alarm relay relay in DT90401 went ON is stored.
(DT90401) went ON
(for year and month
data)
(Available PLC:
FP10SH)

Appendix F
Table of Error Codes
F.1 Confirmation of Error When the Error LED
Turns ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F − 3
F.1.1 Confirmation Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F − 3
F.1.2 Self-Diagnostic Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F − 3
F.1.3 Syntax Check Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F − 4
F.2 Table of Syntax Check Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F − 5
F.3 Table of Self-Diagnostic Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F − 7
F.4 Table of Communication Check Error . . . . . . F − 13

F −2 Matsushita Automation Controls

F.1 Confirmation of Error When the Error LED Turns ON

When the “ERROR LED” on the CPU turns ON, a self-diagnostic error or syntax
check error has occurred. Confirm the contents of the error and take the appropriate
steps.
F.1.1 Confirmation Method

Procedure:
1. Use the programming tool to call up the error code.
− Using NPST-GR software:
By executing the “STATUS DISPLAY”, the error code and content of
error are displayed.
− Using FP programmer II Ver.2
With the syntax check error, the error code and message is displayed by
simply connecting the unit.
With the self−diagnostic error, press the following keys.
(−) READ
ACLR 1 1 0 ENT
OP
Then the self−diagnostic error code will be displayed.

2. Check the error contents in the table of error codes
of sections F.2 to F.4 using the error code ascertained
above.
F.1.2 Self-Diagnostic Error
This error occurs when the CPU’s self-diagnostic function detects the occurrence of an
abnormality in the system. The self-diagnostic function monitors the watching dog timer,
memory abnormal detection, I/O abnormal detection, and other devices.
When a self-diagnostic error occurs
∆ The CPU’s ERROR LED turns ON.
∆ The operation of the CPU might stop depending on the
content of error and the system register setting.
∆ The error codes will be stored in the special data register
DT9000 for FP3 and DT90000 for FP10SH.
next page
Matsushita Automation Controls F −3

Clearing the self-diagnostic error

∆ Using NPST-GR software:
At the “STATUS DISPLAY”, press the <F3> (error clear) key.
Error codes 43 and higher can be cleared.
∆ Using FP programmer II Ver.2:
Press the keys as shown below. Error codes 43 and higher
can be cleared.
(−) SHIFT
ACLR 1 1 2 ENT WRT
OP SC
∆ You can use the initialize/test switch of CPU to clear an error.

However, this will also clear the contents of operation
memory.
∆ Errors can also be cleared by turning OFF and ON the power
while in the PROG. mode. However, the contents of
operation memory, not stored with the hold type data, will
also be cleared.
∆ The error can also be cleared depending on the
self-diagnostic error set instruction F148 (ERR).
Steps to take for self-diagnostic error
The steps to be taken will differ depending on the error contents. For more
details, use the error code obtained above and consult the table of
self-diagnostic error codes (* section F.3).
F.1.3 Syntax Check Error
This is an error detected by the total check function when there is a syntax error or
incorrect setting written in the program. When the mode selector of CPU is switched to
the RUN mode, the total check function automatically activates and eliminates the
possibility of incorrect operation from syntax errors in the program.
When a syntax check error is detected
ERROR LED turns ON.
Operation will not begin even after switching to the RUN mode.
Clearing a syntax check error
By changing to the PROG. mode, the error will clear and the ERROR LED
will turn OFF.
Steps to take for syntax error
Change to the PROG. mode, and then execute the total check function
while online mode with the programming tool connected. This will call up the
content of error and the address where the error occurred.
Correct the program while referring to the content of error.

F.2 Table of Syntax Check Error

Error Name of error Operation Description and steps to take
code status
E1 Syntax error Stops A program with a syntax error has been written.
Change to PROG. mode and correct the error.
E2 Duplicated Stops Two or more OT(Out) instructions and KP(Keep)
(* Note) output error instructions are programmed using the same
relay.
Change to PROG. mode and correct the program
so that one relay is not used for two or more OT
instructions and KP instructions. Or, set the
duplicated output to “enable (K1)” in system
register 20. (* sections B.3 and B.4)
E3 Not paired Stops For instructions which must be used in a pair such
error as jump (JP and LBL), one instruction is either
missing or in an incorrect position.
Change to PROG. mode and enter the two
instructions which must be used in a pair in the
correct positions.
E4 Parameter Stops An instruction has been written which does not
mismatch agree with system register settings. For example,
error the number setting in a program does not agree
with the timer/counter range setting.
Change to PROG. mode, check the system
register settings, and change so that the settings
and the instruction agree.
E5 Program area Stops An instruction which must be written to a specific
(* Note) error area (main program area or subprogram area) has
been written to a different area (for example, a
subroutine SUB to RET is placed before an ED
instruction).
Change to PROG. mode and enter the instruction
into the correct area.
E6 Compile Stops The program stored in the FP10SH is too large to
memory full compile in the program memory.
error
(Available Change to PROG. mode and reduce the total
PLC: FP10SH) number of steps for the program.
Note
This error is also detected if you attempt to execute a rewrite
containing a syntax error during RUN. In this case, nothing will
be written to the CPU and operation will continue.


code status
E7 High-level Stops In the program, high-level instructions, which
instruction execute in every scan and at the leading edge of
type error the trigger, are programmed to be triggered by
one contact [e.g., F0 (MV) and P0 (PMV) are
programmed using the same trigger continuously].
Correct the program so that the high-level
instructions executed in every scan and only
at the leading edge are triggered separately.
E8 High-level Stops There is an incorrect operand in an instruction
instruction which requires a specific combination operands
operand error (for example, the operands must all be of a certain
type).
Enter the correct combination of operands.
E9 No program Stops Program may be damaged.
error Try to send the program again using
(Available NPST-GR.
PLC: FP10SH)
E10 Rewrite Continues When inputting with the ladder symbol mode of
during RUN NPST-GR, a deletion, addition or change of order
syntax error of an instruction (ED, LBL, SUB, RET, INT, IRET,
SSTP, and STPE) that cannot perform a rewrite
during RUN is being attempted. Nothing is written
to the CPU.

F.3 Table of Self-Diagnostic Error

code status
E20 CPU error Stops Probably a hardware abnormality.
E21 RAM error Stops Probably an abnormality in the internal RAM.
E22 Please contact your dealer.
E23
E24
E25
E26 User’s ROM Stops ROM is not installed.
error There may be a problem with the installed ROM.
− ROM contents are damaged
− Program size stored on the ROM is larger than
the capacity of the ROM
Check the contents of the ROM
E27 Intelligent unit Stops Intelligent units installed exceed the limitations
installation (i.e., 4 or more link units)
error
Turn OFF the power and re-configure
intelligent units referring to the hardware
manual.
E28 System Stops Probably an abnormality in the system register.
register error Check the system register setting or initialize
the system registers.
E29 System bus Stops Please contact your dealer.
time out error
(Available
PLC: FP3)
E30 Interrupt error Stops Probably a hardware abnormality.
0 Please contact your dealer.
E31 Interrupt error Stops An interrupt occurred without an interrupt request.
1 A hardware problem or error due to noise is
possible.
Turn OFF the power and check the noise
conditions.
E32 Interrupt error Stops An interrupt occurred without an interrupt request.
2 A hardware problem or error due to noise is
possible.
Turn OFF the power and check the noise
conditions.
There is no interrupt program for an interrupt
which occurred.
Check the number of the interrupt program
and change it to agree with the interrupt
request.


code status
E33 Multi-CPU data CPU2 stops Occurs when a FP3 or FP10SH is used as CPU2
unmatch error for a multi-CPU system.
(CPU2 only)
E34 I/O status Stops An abnormal unit is installed.
error
Check the contents of special data register
(FP3: DT9036, FP10SH: DT90036) and locate
the abnormal unit.
Then turn OFF the power and replace the unit
with a new one.
E35 MEWNET-F Stops A unit, which cannot be installed on the slave
(remote I/O) station of the MEWNET-F link system, is installed
slave illegal on the slave station.
unit error Remove the illegal unit from the slave station.
E36 MEWNET-F Stops The number of slots or I/O points used for
limitation MEWNET-F exceeds the limitation.
error Re-configure the system so that the number of
slots and I/O points is within the specified
range.
E37 MEWNET-F Stops I/O overlap or I/O setting that is over the range is
I/O mapping detected in the allocated I/O and MEWNET-F I/O
error map.
Re-configure the I/O map correctly.
E38 MEWNET-F Stops I/O mapping for MEWNET-F I/O terminal boards,
slave I/O remote I/O terminal units and I/O link unit is not
mapping correct.
error Re-configure the I/O map for slave stations
according to the I/O points of the slave
stations.
E39 IC memory Stops When reading in the program from the IC memory
card read card (due to automatic reading because of the dip
error switch 3 setting or program switching due to F14
(Available (PGRD) instruction ):
PLC: FP10SH) − IC memory card is not installed.
− There is no program file or it is damaged.
− Writing is disabled.
− There is an abnormality in the AUTOEXEC.SPG
file.
− Program size stored on the card is larger than
the capacity of the unit.
Install a IC memory card that has the program
properly recorded and execute the read once
again.


code status
E40 MEWNET-TR Selectable Erroneous MEWNET-TR master unit is detected.
communica− (using Check the contents of special data registers
tion error system (FP3: DT9002 and DT9003, FP10SH: DT90002
register 21) and DT90003) and locate the output unit with
blown fuse or the erroneous MEWNET-TR
master unit. Then replace the fuse or check the
unit.
Selection of operation status using
system register 21:
− to continue execution, set K1 (CONT)
− to stop execution, set K0 (STOP)
E41 Intelligent unit Selectable An abnormality in an intelligent unit.
error (using Check the contents of special data registers
system (FP3: DT9006 and DT9007, FP10SH: DT90006
register 22) and DT90007) and locate the abnormal
intelligent unit. Then check the unit referring to
its manual.
system register 22:
E42 I/O unit verify Selectable I/O unit wiring condition has changed compared to
error (using that at time of power-up.
system Check the contents of special data registers
register 23) (FP3: DT9010 and DT9011, FP10SH: DT90010
and DT90011) and locate the erroneous unit.
Then check the unit and correct the wiring.
system register 23:
E43 System Selectable Scan time required for program execution exceeds
watching dog (using the setting of the system watching dog timer.
timer error system Check the program and modify it so that
(Available register 24) FP10SH can execute a scan within the specified
PLC: FP10SH) time.
system register 24:


code status
E45 Operation Selectable Operation became impossible when a high-level
error (using instruction was executed.
system Check the contents of special data registers
register 26) (FP3: DT9017 and DT9018, FP10SH: DT90017
and DT90018) to find the program address
where the operation error occurred. Then
correct the program referring to the description
of the instruction.
Refer to the programming manual.
system register 26:
E46 MEWNET-F Selectable A communication abnormally was caused by a
communica- (using transmission cable or during the power-down of a
tion error system slave station.
register 27) Check the contents of special data registers
(FP3: DT9131 to DT9137, FP10SH: DT90131 to
DT90137) and locate the abnormal slave
station.
The recover the slave condition referring to the
MEWNET-F (REMOTE I/O) SYSTEM manual.
system register 27:
E47 MEWNET-F Selectable In the unit on the slave station, an abnormality
attribute error (using such as:
system − missing unit
register 28) − abnormal intelligent unit was detected.
Check the contents of special data registers
(FP3: DT9131 to DT9137, FP10SH: DT90131 to
DT90137) and locate the abnormal slave
station.
The recover the slave condition referring to the
MEWNET-F (REMOTE I/O) SYSTEM manual.
system register 28:
F − 10 Matsushita Automation Controls


code status
E50 Backup Continues The voltage of the backup battery lowered or the
battery error backup battery of CPU is not installed.
(The BATT. Check the installation of the backup battery
LED turns and then replace battery if necessary.
ON.)
By setting the system register 4 in K0
(NO), you can disregard this error.
However, the BATT. LED turns ON.
E51 MEWNET-F Continues Terminal station settings were not properly

terminal performed.
station error Check stations at both ends of the
communication path, and set them in the
terminal station using the dip switches.
E52 MEWNET-F I/O Continues Set the INITIALIZE/TEST selector to the
update INITIALIZE position while keeping the mode
synchronous selector in the RUN position. If the same error
error occurs after this, please contact your dealer.
E53 Multi-CPU Continues Abnormality was detected when the multi-CPU
registration system was used.
error Please contact your dealer.
(CPU2 only)
E54 IC memory Continues The contents of the IC memory card cannot be
card backup guaranteed since the voltage of the backup battery
battery error for the FP10SH IC memory card lowered.
(The BATT. Replace the backup battery of the FP10SH IC
LED does not memory card.
turn ON)
(Available By setting the system register 4 in K0
PLC: FP10SH) (NO), you can disregard this error.
E55 IC memory Continues The voltage of the backup battery for FP10SH IC
card backup memory card lowers.
battery error Replace the backup battery of the FP10SH IC
(The BATT. memory card.
LED does not
turn ON) By setting the system register 4 in K0
(Available (NO), you can disregard this error.
PLC: FP10SH)
E56 Incompatible Continues The IC memory card installed is not compatible with
IC memory FP10SH.
card error Replace the IC memory card compatible with
(Available FP10SH.
PLC: FP10SH)
E68 Rewrite during Continues When inputting with the boolean ladder mode,
RUN error editing of an instruction (ED, SUB, RET, INT,
IRET, SSTP, and STPE) that cannot perform a
rewrite during RUN is being attempted. Nothing is
written to the CPU.
Matsushita Automation Controls F − 11


code status
E100 Self- Stops The self-diagnostic error specified by the F148
to diagnostic (ERR)/P148 (PERR) instruction is occurred.
E199 y
error set by Take steps to clear the error condition
E200 F148 (ERR)// Continues according to the specification you chose.
to P148 (PERR)
E299 instruction

F.4 Table of Communication Check Error

code status
E63 Programmable Stops Transfer was attempted in the RUN mode.
controller Switch the mode and execute once again.
error mode
E64 No ROM/RAM Stops An abnormality occurred when loading RAM to
error ROM. There may be a problem with the ROM or
IC memory card.
− When loading, the specified contents exceeded
the capacity (256 KB).
− Write error occurs.
− ROM or IC memory card is not installed.
− ROM or IC memory card does not conform to
specifications.
Check the contents of the ROM or IC memory
card.
E65 Protect error Stops Transfer was attempted during ROM operation or
when the protect switch was ON.
Switch the mode and execute once again.
Matsushita Automation Controls F − 13


Appendix G
Table of Instructions
G.1 Table of Basic Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G − 3
G.2 Table of High-Level Instructions . . . . . . . . . . G − 17

G −2 Matsushita Automation Controls

G.1 Table of Basic Instructions

Name Boolean Symbol Description Steps Availability
FP3 FP10SH
Basic sequence instructions

Start ST Begins a logic operation 1 (2) A A
X,Y,R,T,C,L,P,E
with a Form A (normally (* Note 1)
open) contact.
Start not ST/ Begins a logic operation 1 (2) A A
X,Y,R,T,C,L,P,E
with a Form B (normally (* Note 1)
closed) contact.
Out OT Y,R,L,E Outputs the operated result 1 (2) A A
to the specified output. (* Note 1)
Not / Inverts the operated result 1 A A

up to this instruction.
AND AN Connects a Form A 1 (2) A A
X,Y,R,T,C,L,P,E
(normally open) contact (* Note 1)
serially.
AND not AN/ Connects a Form B 1(2) A A
X,Y,R,T,C,L,P,E
(normally closed) contact (* Note 1)
serially.
OR OR Connects a Form A 1 (2) A A
X,Y,R,T,C,L,P,E (normally open) contact in (* Note 1)
parallel.
OR not OR/ Connects a Form B 1 (2) A A
X,Y,R,T,C,L,P,E (normally closed) contact in (* Note 1)
parallel.
Leading ST↑ Begins a logic operation 2 N/A A
edge start X,Y,R,T,C,L,P,E only for one scan when the (* Note 2)
↑
leading edge of the trigger
is detected.
Trailing edge ST↓ Begins a logic operation 2 N/A A
start X,Y,R,T,C,L,P,E only for one scan when the (* Note 2)
↓
trailing edge of the trigger is
detected.
Notes
A: Available, N/A: Not available
(*1): In the FP10SH, when using X1280, Y1280, R1120, L1280, T256,
C256 or anything beyond for the ST, ST/, OT, AN, AN/, OR and
OR/ instructions, the number of steps is shown in
parentheses. Also, in the FP10SH, when a relay number has
an index modifier, the number of steps is shown in
parentheses.
Matsushita Automation Controls G −3

(*2): This instruction should be input using NPST−GR Ver.4.0 or

later.


FP3 FP10SH
Leading AN↑ Connects a Form A 2 N/A A

edge AND (normally open) contact (* Note 1)
X,Y,R,T,C,L,P,E
↑
serially only for one scan
when the leading edge of
the trigger is detected.
Trailing edge AN↓ Connects a Form A 2 N/A A
AND (normally open) contact (* Note 1)
X,Y,R,T,C,L,P,E
↓ serially only for one scan
when the trailing edge of
Leading OR↑ Connects a Form A 2 N/A A
edge OR (normally open) contact in (* Note 1)
X,Y,R,T,C,L,P,E parallel only for one scan
↑
when the leading edge of
Trailing edge OR↓ Connects a Form A 2 N/A A
OR (normally open) contact in (* Note 1)
X,Y,R,T,C,L,P,E parallel only for one scan
↓
when the trailing edge of
Leading OT↑ Outputs the operated result 2 N/A A
edge out to the specified output only (* Note 1)
P
↑ for one scan when leading
edge of the trigger is
detected. (for pulse relay)
Trailing OT↓ Outputs the operated result 2 N/A A
edge out to the specified output only (* Note 1)
P
↓ for one scan when trailing
edge of the trigger is
detected. (for pulse relay)
Alternative ALT Inverts the output condition 3 N/A A
out Y,R,L,E (ON/OFF) each time the (* Note 1)
A
is detected.
AND stack ANS Connects the multiple 1 A A
instruction blocks serially.
OR stack ORS Connects the multiple 1 A A

instruction blocks in
parallel.
Notes
later.


FP3 FP10SH
Push stack PSHS Stores the operated result 1 A A

up to this instruction.
Read stack RDS Reads the operated result 1 A A
stored by the PSHS
instruction.
Pop stack POPS Reads and clears the 1 A A
operated result stored by
the PSHS instruction.
Leading DF Turns ON the contact for 1 A A
edge only one scan when the
（DF ）
differential leading edge of the trigger
is detected.
Trailing edge DF/ Turns ON the contact for 1 A A
differential only one scan when the
（DF/ ）
trailing edge of the trigger is
detected.
Leading DFI Turns ON the contact for 1 N/A A
edge only one scan when the (* Note 1)
differential （DFI ）
(initial is detected. The leading
execution edge detection is possible
type) on the first scan.
Set SET Y,R,L,E Output is set to and held at 3 A A
<S>
ON. (* Note 2)
Reset RST Y,R,L,E Output is set to and held at 3 A A

<R>
OFF. (* Note 2)
Keep KP Set Outputs at set trigger and 1 A A

KP
Reset holds until reset trigger
turns ON.
No operation NOP ・ No operation. 1 A A
Notes
later.
(*2): This instruction is available for FP3 CPU Ver.3.1 or later.


FP3 FP10SH
Basic function instructions
ON-delay TML After set value “n” (* Note 3 (4) N/A A
timer 1) × 0.001 seconds, timer (* Note 2) (* Note 3)
contact “a” is set to ON.
TMR After set value “n” (* Note 3 (4) A A
1) × 0.01 seconds, timer (* Note 2)
T n
a
TMX After set value “n” (* Note 3 (4) A A
1) × 0.1 seconds, timer (* Note 2)
TMY After set value “n” (* Note 4 (5) A A
1) × 1 second, timer (* Note 2)
Auxiliary F137 After set value “S” × 0.01 5 A A
timer (STMR) Y,R,L,E seconds, the specified (* Note 5)
F137 STMR, S, D
output (* Note 4) and
R900D are set to ON.
Counter CT Count
CT Decrements from the 4 (3) A A
Reset n preset value “n” (* Note 1). (* Note 2)
UP/DOWN F118 UP/DOWN

F118 UDC Increments or decrements 5 A A
counter (UDC) Count from the preset value “S”
Reset
S
based on up/down input.
D
Notes
(*1): The set value “n” can be specified by the set value area
number using FP3/FP10SH CPU Ver.4.4 or later.
The set value “n” should be input using NPST−GR Ver.3.1 or
later and FP programmer II (AFP1114V2).
(*2): When timer 256 or higher, or counter 255 or lower, is used, the
number of steps is the number in parentheses. Also, when a
timer number or counter number has an index modifier, the
number of steps is the number in parentheses.
later.
(*4): An OT instruction can be input after an auxiliary timer
instruction using FP3/FP10SH CPU Ver.4.0 or later.
This instruction should be input using NPST−GR Ver.2.3 or


FP3 FP10SH
Shift register SR Data
SR WR n Shifts one bit of 16-bit 1 (2) A A
Shift [word internal relay (WR)] (* Note 1)
data to the left.
Reset
Left/right F119 L/R

F119 LRSR Shifts one bit of 16-bit data 5 A A
shift register (LRSR) Data range specified by “D1”
D1
Shift
and “D2” to the left or to
D2 the right.
Reset
Control instructions
Master MC Starts the master control 2 A A
control relay （MC n） program.
Master control area
Master MCE Ends the master control 2 A A
control relay （MCE n） program.
end
Jump JP （JP n） The program jumps to the 2 (3) A A
label instruction and (* Note 2)
n）
Label LBL （LBL
continues from there. 1
Auxiliary F19 The program jumps to the 3 A A
jump F19 SJP S
label instruction specified
Label LBL （LBL n） by “S” and continues from 1
there.
Loop LOOP The program jumps to the 4 (5) A A
（LBL n） label instruction and (* Note 2)
Label LBL continues from there (the 1
LOOP n, S
number of jumps is set in
“S”).
Break BRK Stops program execution 1 A A
（BRK ）
when the predetermined
trigger turns ON in the
TEST/RUN mode only.
Notes
A: Available
(*1): In the FP10SH, when internal relay WR240 or higher is used,
the number of steps is the number in parentheses. Also, in the
FP10SH, when the specified internal relay number (word
address) has an index modifier, the number of steps is the
number in parentheses.
(*2): In the FP10SH, when the number “n” in a jump or loop
instruction has an index modifier, the number of steps is the
number in parentheses.


FP3 FP10SH
End ED The operation of program is 1 A A
（ED ） ended. Indicates the end of
a main program.
Conditional CNDE The operation of program is 1 A A
end （CNDE ）
ended when the trigger
turns ON.
Step ladder instructions
Start step SSTP The start of program “n” for 3 A A
（SSTP n） process control.
Next step NSTL Start the specified process 3 A A

（
“n” and clear the process (* Note 1)
NSTL n） currently started. (Scan
execution type)
NSTP Start the specified process 3 A A
（
“n” and clear the process
NSTP n） currently started. (Pulse
execution type)
Clear step CSTP （CSTP n）
Resets the specified 3 A A
process.
Clear SCLR Resets multiple processes 5 N/A A
multiple SCLR n1, n2 specified by “n1” and “n2.” (* Note 2)
steps
Step end STPE End of step ladder area. 1 A A
（STPE ）
Subroutine instructions
Subroutine CALL Executes the specified 2 (3) A A
call subroutine. When returning (* Note 3) (* Note 2)
（CALL n）
to the main program,
outputs in the subroutine
program are maintained.
Notes
It should be input using NPST−GR Ver.2.3 or later and FP
programmer II (AFP1114V2).
later.
(*3): When the number “n” of a subroutine program has an index
modifier, the number of steps is the number in parentheses.


FP3 FP10SH
Output OFF FCAL Executes the specified 4 N/A A
type subroutine. When returning (* Note 1)
subroutine （FCAL n）
to the main program, all
call outputs in the subroutine
program are set to OFF.
Subroutine SUB （SUB n）
Indicates the start of the 1 A A
entry subroutine program.
Subroutine RET （
Ends the subroutine 1 A A
return RET ） program.
Interrupt instructions
Interrupt INT Indicates the start of the 1 A A
（INT n） interrupt program.
Interrupt IRET （IRET ） Ends the interrupt program. 1 A A

return
Interrupt ICTL Select interrupt 5 A A
control （DF） ICTL S1, S2 enable/disable or clear in
“S1” and “S2” and execute.
Notes
later.
G − 10 Matsushita Automation Controls


FP3 FP10SH
Data compare instructions
16-bit data ST= Begins a logic operation by 5 A A
compare = S1, S2 comparing two 16-bit data (* Note 1)
(Start) in the comparative
condition “S1=S2.”
ST<> Begins a logic operation by 5 A A
< > S1, S2 comparing two 16-bit data (* Note 1)
in the comparative
condition “S1≠S2.”
ST> Begins a logic operation by 5 A A
> S1, S2 comparing two 16-bit data (* Note 1)
in the comparative
condition “S1>S2.”
ST>= Begins a logic operation by 5 A A
> = S1, S2 comparing two 16-bit data (* Note 1)
in the comparative
condition “S1≧S2.”
ST< Begins a logic operation by 5 A A
< S1, S2 comparing two 16-bit data (* Note 1)
in the comparative
condition “S1<S2.”
ST<= Begins a logic operation by 5 A A
< = S1, S2 comparing two 16-bit data (* Note 1)
in the comparative
condition “S1≦S2.”
Notes
A: Available
The instruction should be input using NPST−GR Ver.3.1 or
Matsushita Automation Controls G − 11


FP3 FP10SH
16-bit data AN= Connects a Form A 5 A A
compare (normally open) contact (* Note 1)
(AND) = S1, S2 serially by comparing two
16-bit data in the
comparative condition
“S1=S2.”
AN<> Connects a Form A 5 A A
< > S1, S2 serially by comparing two
16-bit data in the
“S1≠S2.”
AN> Connects a Form A 5 A A
> S1, S2 serially by comparing two
16-bit data in the
“S1>S2.”
AN>= Connects a Form A 5 A A
> = S1, S2 serially by comparing two
16-bit data in the
“S1≧S2.”
AN< Connects a Form A 5 A A
< S1, S2 serially by comparing two
16-bit data in the
“S1<S2.”
AN<= Connects a Form A 5 A A
< = S1, S2 serially by comparing two
16-bit data in the
“S1≦S2.”
Notes
A: Available


FP3 FP10SH
16-bit data OR= Connects a Form A 5 A A
compare (normally open) contact in (* Note 1)
(OR) = S1, S2
parallel by comparing two
16-bit data in the
“S1=S2.”
OR<> Connects a Form A 5 A A
(normally open) contact in (* Note 1)
< > S1, S2
16-bit data in the
“S1≠S2.”
OR> Connects a Form A 5 A A
> S1, S2
16-bit data in the
“S1>S2.”
OR>= Connects a Form A 5 A A
> = S1, S2
16-bit data in the
“S1≧S2.”
OR< Connects a Form A 5 A A
< S1, S2
16-bit data in the
“S1<S2.”
OR<= Connects a Form A 5 A A
< = S1, S2 parallel by comparing two
16-bit data in the
“S1≦S2.”
Notes
A: Available


FP3 FP10SH
32-bit data STD= Begins a logic operation by 9 A A
compare comparing two 32-bit data (* Note 1)
(Start) D= S1, S2 in the comparative
condition “(S1+1, S1)=
(S2+1, S2).”
STD<> Begins a logic operation by 9 A A
D< > S1, S2
comparing two 32-bit data (* Note 1)
in the comparative
condition “(S1+1, S1)≠
(S2+1, S2).”
STD> Begins a logic operation by 9 A A
D> S1, S2
in the comparative
condition “(S1+1, S1)>
(S2+1, S2).”
STD>= Begins a logic operation by 9 A A
D> = S1, S2
in the comparative
condition “(S1+1, S1)≧
(S2+1, S2).”
STD< Begins a logic operation by 9 A A
D< S1, S2
in the comparative
condition “(S1+1, S1)<
(S2+1, S2).”
STD<= Begins a logic operation by 9 A A
D< = S1, S2
in the comparative
condition “(S1+1, S1)≦
(S2+1, S2).”
Notes
A: Available


FP3 FP10SH
32-bit data AND= Connects a Form A 9 A A
compare (normally open) contact (* Note 1)
(AND) D= S1, S2 serially by comparing two
32-bit data in the
“(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2).”
AND<> Connects a Form A 9 A A
D< > S1, S2 serially by comparing two
32-bit data in the
“(S1+1, S1)≠(S2+1, S2).”
AND> Connects a Form A 9 A A
D> S1, S2 serially by comparing two
32-bit data in the
“(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2).”
AND>= Connects a Form A 9 A A
D> = S1, S2 serially by comparing two
32-bit data in the
“(S1+1, S1)≧(S2+1, S2).”
AND< Connects a Form A 9 A A
D< S1, S2 serially by comparing two
32-bit data in the
“(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2).”
AND<= Connects a Form A 9 A A
D< = S1, S2 serially by comparing two
32-bit data in the
“(S1+1, S1)≦(S2+1, S2).”
Notes
A: Available


FP3 FP10SH
32-bit data ORD= Connects a Form A 9 A A
compare (normally open) contact in (* Note 1)
(OR) D= S1, S2
32-bit data in the
“(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2).”
ORD<> Connects a Form A 9 A A
D< > S1, S2

32-bit data in the
“(S1+1, S1)≠(S2+1, S2).”
ORD> Connects a Form A 9 A A
D> S1, S2
32-bit data in the
“(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2).”
ORD>= Connects a Form A 9 A A
D> = S1, S2
32-bit data in the
“(S1+1, S1)≧(S2+1, S2).”
ORD< Connects a Form A 9 A A
D< S1, S2
32-bit data in the
“(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2).”
ORD<= Connects a Form A 9 A A
D< = S1, S2 parallel by comparing two
32-bit data in the
“(S1+1, S1)≦(S2+1, S2).”
Notes
A: Available

G.2 Table of High-Level Instructions

The high-level instructions for FP3/FP10SH are expressed by the prefixes “F” or “P” with
numbers. For most of the high-level instructions, “F” and “P” types are available. The
differences between the two types are explained as follows:
− Instructions with the prefix “F” are executed in every scan while its trigger is in
the ON.
− Instructions with the prefix “P” are executed only when the leading edge of its
trigger is detected.
Number Name Boolean Operand Description Steps Availability
FP3 FP10SH
Data transfer instructions
F0 16-bit data MV S, D (S) → (D) 5 A A
P0 move PMV
F1 32-bit data DMV S, D (S+1, S) → (D+1, D) 7 A A
P1 move PDMV
F2 16-bit data MV/ S, D (S) → (D) 5 A A
P2 invert and PMV/
move
F3 32-bit data DMV/ S, D (S+1, S) → (D+1, D) 7 A A
P3 invert and PDMV/
move
F5 Bit data move BTM S, n, D The specified one bit in 7 A A
P5 PBTM “S” is transferred to the
specified one bit in “D.”
The bit is specified by
“n.”
F6 Hexadecimal DGT S, n, D The specified one digit 7 A A
P6 digit (4-bit) PDGT in “S” is transferred to
data move the specified one digit in
“D.” The digit is
specified by “n.”
F7 Two 16-bit MV2 S1, S2, (S1) → (D), (S2) → 7 N/A A
P7 data move PMV2 D (D+1) (* Note 1)
F8 Two 32-bit DMV2 S1, S2, (S1+1, S1) → (D+1, D), 11 N/A A
P8 data move PDMV2 D (S2+1, S2) → (D+3, (* Note 1)
D+2)
F10 Block move BKMV S1, S2, The data between “S1” 7 A A
P10 PBKMV D and “S2” is transferred to
the area starting at “D.”
Notes

(*1): The instruction for FP10SH should be input using NPST−GR

Ver.4.0 or later.


FP3 FP10SH
F11 Block copy COPY S, D1, The data of “S” is 7 A A
P11 PCOPY D2 transferred to the all
area between “D1” and
“D2.”
F12 Data read ICRD S1, S2, The data stored in the 11 N/A A
P12 from IC PICRD D expansion memory of
memory card the IC memory card
specified by “S1” and
“S2” are transferred to
the area starting at “D.”
F13 Data write to ICWT S1, S2, The data specified by 11 N/A A
P13 IC memory PICWT D “S1” and “S2” are
card transferred to the IC
memory card expansion
memory area starting at
“D.”
F14 Program read PGRD S The program specified 3 N/A A
P14 from IC PPGRD using “S” is transferred
memory card into the FP10SH CPU
from IC memory card
and executes it.
F15 16-bit data XCH D1, D2 (D1) → (D2), (D2) → 5 A A
P15 exchange PXCH (D1)
F16 32-bit data DXCH D1, D2 (D1+1, D1) → (D2+1, 5 A A
P16 exchange PDXCH D2)
(D2+1, D2) → (D1+1,
D1)
F17 Higher/lower SWAP D The higher byte and 3 A A
P17 byte in 16-bit PSWAP lower byte of “D” are
data exchanged.
exchange
F18 16-bit data BXCH D1, D2, Exchange the data 7 N/A A
P18 block PBXCH D3 between “D1” and “D2” (* Note 1)
exchange with the data specified
by “D3.”
Control instruction
F19 Auxiliary SJP S The program jumps to 3 A A
jump the label instruction
specified by “S” and
continues from there.
Notes
Ver.4.0 or later.


FP3 FP10SH
Binary arithmetic instructions
F20 16-bit data + S, D (D) + (S) → (D) 5 A A
P20 addition P+
F21 32-bit data D+ S, D (D +1, D) + (S+1, S) → 7 A A
P21 addition PD+ (D+1, D)
F22 16-bit data + S1, S2, (S1) + (S2) → (D) 7 A A
P22 addition P+ D
F23 32-bit data D+ S1, S2, (S1+1, S1) + (S2+1, S2) 11 A A
P23 addition PD+ D → (D+1, D)
F25 16-bit data − S, D (D) − (S) → (D) 5 A A
P25 subtraction P−
F26 32-bit data D− S, D (D+1, D) − (S+1, S) → 7 A A
P26 subtraction PD− (D+1, D)
F27 16-bit data − S1, S2, (S1) − (S2) → (D) 7 A A
P27 subtraction P− D
F28 32-bit data D− S1, S2, (S1+1, S1) − (S2+1, S2) 11 A A
P28 subtraction PD− D → (D+1, D)
F30 16-bit data * S1, S2, (S1) × (S2) → (D+1, D) 7 A A
P30 multiplication P* D
F31 32-bit data D* S1, S2, (S1+1, S1) × (S2+1, 11 A A
P31 multiplication PD* D S2) → (D+3, D+2, D+1,
D)
F32 16-bit data % S1, S2, (S1) ÷ (S2) → 7 A A
P32 division P% D quotient (D)
remainder (DT9015 for
FP3 or DT90015 for
FP10SH)
F33 32-bit data D% S1, S2, [(S1+1, S1) ÷ (S2+1, 11 A A
P33 division PD% D S2) → quotient (D+1, D)
remainder (DT9016,
DT9015 for FP3 or
DT90016, DT90015 for
FP10SH)]
F34 16-bit data *W S1, S2, (S1) × (S2) → (D) 7 N/A A
P34 multiplication P*W D (* Note 1)
(result in 16
bits)
F35 16-bit data +1 D (D) + 1 → (D) 3 A A
P35 increment P+1
Notes
Ver.4.0 or later.


FP3 FP10SH
F36 32-bit data D+1 D (D+1, D) + 1 → (D+1, D) 3 A A
P36 increment PD+1
F37 16-bit data −1 D (D) − 1 → (D) 3 A A
P37 decrement P−1
F38 32-bit data D−1 D (D+1, D) − 1 → (D+1, D) 3 A A
P38 decrement PD−1
F39 32-bit data D*D S1, S2, (S1+1, S1) × (S2+1, 11 N/A A
P39 multiplication PD*D D S2) → (D+1, D) (* Note 1)
(result in 32
bits)
BCD arithmetic instructions
F40 4-digit BCD B+ S, D (D) + (S) → (D) 5 A A
P40 data addition PB+
F41 8-digit BCD DB+ S, D (D+1, D) + (S+1, S) → 7 A A
P41 data addition PDB+ (D+1, D)
F42 4-digit BCD B+ S1, S2, (S1) + (S2) → (D) 7 A A
P42 data addition PB+ D
F43 8-digit BCD DB+ S1, S2, (S1+1, S1) + (S2+1, S2) 11 A A
P43 data addition PDB+ D → (D+1, D)
F45 4-digit BCD B− S, D (D) − (S) → (D) 5 A A
P45 data PB−
subtraction
F46 8-digit BCD DB− S, D (D+1, D) − (S+1, S) → 7 A A
P46 data PDB− (D+1, D)
subtraction
F47 4-digit BCD B− S1, S2, (S1) − (S2) → (D) 7 A A
P47 data PB− D
subtraction
F48 8-digit BCD DB− S1, S2, (S1+1, S1) − (S2+1, S2) 11 A A
P48 data PDB− D → (D+1, D)
subtraction
F50 4-digit BCD B* S1, S2, (S1) × (S2) → (D+1, D) 7 A A
P50 data PB* D
multiplication
F51 8-digit BCD DB* S1, S2, (S1+1, S1) × (S2+1, 11 A A
P51 data PDB* D S2) → (D+3, D+2, D+1,
multiplication D)
Notes
Ver.4.0 or later.


FP3 FP10SH
F52 4-digit BCD B% S1, S2, (S1) ÷ (S2) → 7 A A
P52 data division PB% D quotient (D)
remainder (DT9015 for
FP3 or DT90015 for
FP10SH)
F53 8-digit BCD DB% S1, S2, (S1+1, S1) ÷ (S2+1, S2) 11 A A
P53 data division PDB% D → quotient (D+1, D)
remainder (DT9016,
DT9015 for FP3 or
DT90016, DT90015 for
FP10SH)
F55 4-digit BCD B+1 D (D) + 1 → (D) 3 A A
P55 data PB+1
increment
F56 8-digit BCD DB+1 D (D+1, D) + 1 → (D+1, D) 3 A A
P56 data PDB+1
increment
F57 4-digit BCD B−1 D (D) − 1 → (D) 3 A A
P57 data PB−1
decrement
F58 8-digit BCD DB−1 D (D+1, D) − 1 → (D+1, D) 3 A A
P58 data PDB−1
decrement
Data compare instructions
F60 16-bit data CMP S1, S2 (S1) > (S2) → 5 A A
P60 compare PCMP R900A: ON
(S1) = (S2) →
R900B: ON
(S1) < (S2) →
R900C: ON
F61 32-bit data DCMP S1, S2 (S1+1, S1) > (S2+1, S2) 9 A A
P61 compare PDCMP → R900A: ON
(S1+1, S1) = (S2+1,
S2) → R900B: ON
(S1+1, S1) < (S2+1, S2)
→ R900C: ON
F62 16-bit data WIN S1, S2, (S1) > (S3) → 7 A A
P62 band PWIN S3 R900A: ON
compare (S2) ≦ (S1) ≦ (S3) →
R900B: ON
(S1) < (S2) →
R900C: ON
Note
A: Available


FP3 FP10SH
F63 32-bit data DWIN S1, S2, (S1+1, S1) > (S3+1, S3) 13 A A
P63 band PDWIN S3 → R900A: ON
compare (S2+1, S2) ≦ (S1+1,
S1) ≦ (S3+1, S3)
→ R900B: ON
(S1+1, S1) < (S2+1, S2)
→ R900C: ON
F64 Block data BCMP S1, S2, Compares the two 7 A A
P64 compare PBCMP S3 blocks begining with (* Note 1)
“S2” and “S3” to see if
they are equal.
Logic operation instructions
F65 16-bit data WAN S1, S2, (S1) ∧ (S2) → (D) 7 A A
P65 AND PWAN D
F66 16-bit data WOR S1, S2, (S1) ∨ (S2) → (D) 7 A A
P66 OR PWOR D
F67 16-bit data XOR S1, S2, {(S1) ∧ (S2)} ∨ 7 A A
P67 exclusive OR PXOR D {(S1) ∧ (S2)} → (D)
F68 16-bit data XNR S1, S2, {(S1) ∧ (S2)} ∨ 7 A A
P68 exclusive PXNR D {(S1) ∧ (S2)} → (D)
NOR
F69 16-bit data WUNI S1, S2, ([S1] ∧ [S3]) ∨ ([S2] ∧ 9 N/A A
P69 unite PWUNI S3, D [S3]) → (D) (* Note 2)
When (S3) is H0, (S2)
→ (D)
When (S3) is HFFFF,
(S1) → (D)
Data conversion instructions
F70 Block check BCC S1, S2, Creates the code for 9 A A
P70 code PBCC S3, D checking the data (* Note 3)
calculation specified by “S2” and
“S3” and stores it in “D.”
The calculation method
is specified by “S1.”
Notes
(*1): The instruction for FP3 is available for FP3 CPU Ver.4.0 or
later. This instruction for FP3 should be input using NPST−GR
Ver.2.3 or later and FP programmer II (AFP1114V2).
Ver.4.0 or later.
(*3): The instruction for FP3 is available for FP3 CPU Ver.3.1 or later.


FP3 FP10SH
F71 Hexadecimal HEXA S1, S2, Converts the 7 A A
P71 data → ASCII PHEXA D hexadecimal data (* Note 1)
code specified by “S1” and
“S2” to ASCII code and
stores it in “D.”
Example: HABCD →
H 42 41 44 43
B A D C
F72 ASCII code → AHEX S1, S2, Converts the ASCII 7 A A
P72 Hexadecimal PAHEX D code specified by “S1” (* Note 1)
data and “S2” to
hexadecimal data and
stores it in “D.”
Example: H 44 43 42 41
→ HABCD D C B A
F73 4-digit BCD BCDA S1, S2, Converts the four digits 7 A A
P73 data → ASCII PBCDA D of BCD data specified (* Note 1)
code by “S1” and “S2” to
ASCII code and stores it
in “D.”
Example:
H1234 → H 32 31 34 33
2 1 4 3
F74 ASCII code → ABCD S1, S2, Converts the ASCII 9 A A
P74 4-digit BCD PABCD D code specified by “S1” (* Note 1)
data and “S2” to four digits of
BCD data and stores it
in “D.”
Example:
H 34 33 32 31 → H3412
4 3 2 1
F75 16-bit binary BINA S1, S2, Converts the 16 bits of 7 A A
P75 data → ASCII PBINA D binary data specified by (* Note 1)
code “S1” to ASCII code and
stores it in “D” (area of
“S2” bytes).
Example: K−100 →
H 30 30 31 2D 20 20
0 0 1 −
Notes
A: Available


FP3 FP10SH
F76 ASCII code → ABIN S1, S2, Converts the ASCII 7 A A
P76 16-bit binary PABIN D code specified by “S1” (* Note 1)
data and “S2” to 16 bits of
binary data and stores it
in “D.”
Example:
H 30 30 31 2D 20 20→
0 0 1 −
K−100
F77 32-bit binary DBIA S1, S2, Converts the 32 bits of 11 A A
P77 data → ASCII PDBIA D binary data (S1+1, S1) (* Note 1)
code to ASCII code and
stores it in (D+1, D).
F78 ASCII code → DABI S1, S2, Converts the ASCII 11 A A
P78 32-bit binary PDABI D code specified by “S1” (* Note 1)
data and “S2” to 32 bits of
in (D+1, D).
F80 16-bit binary BCD S, D Converts the 16 bits of 5 A A
P80 data → 4-digit PBCD binary data specified by
BCD data “S” to four digits of BCD
data and stores it in “D.”
Example: K100 → H100
F81 4-digit BCD BIN S, D Converts the four digits 5 A A
P81 data → 16-bit PBIN of BCD data specified
binary data by “S” to 16 bits of
in “D.”
Example: H100 → K100
F82 32-bit binary DBCD S, D Converts the 32 bits of 7 A A
P82 data → 8-digit PDBCD binary data specified by
BCD data (S+1, S) to eight digits
of BCD data and stores
it in (D+1, D).
F83 8-digit BCD DBIN S, D Converts the eight digits 7 A A
P83 data → 32-bit PDBIN of BCD data specified by
binary data (S+1, S) to 32 bits of
in (D+1, D).
F84 16-bit data INV D Inverts each bit of data 3 A A
P84 invert PINV of “D.”
(complement
of 1)
Notes
A: Available


FP3 FP10SH
F85 16-bit data NEG D Inverts each bit of data 3 A A
P85 complement PNEG of “D” and adds 1
of 2 (inverts the sign).
F86 32-bit data DNEG D Inverts each bit of data 3 A A
P86 complement PDNEG of (D+1, D) and adds 1
of 2 (inverts the sign).
F87 16-bit data ABS D Gives the absolute 3 A A
P87 absolute PABS value of the data of “D.”
F88 32-bit data DABS D Gives the absolute 3 A A
P88 absolute PDABS value of the data of
(D+1, D).
F89 16-bit data EXT D Extends the 16 bits of 3 A A
P89 sign PEXT data in “D” to 32 bits in
extension (D+1, D).
F90 Decode DECO S, n, D Decodes part of the 7 A A
P90 PDECO data of “S” and stores it
in “D.” The part is
F91 7-segment SEGT S, D Converts the data of “S” 5 A A
P91 decode PSEGT for use in a 7-segment
display and stores it in
(D+1, D).
F92 Encode ENCO S, n, D Encodes part of the 7 A A
P92 PENCO data of “S” and stores it
in “D.” The part is
F93 16-bit data UNIT S, n, D The least significant 7 A A
P93 combine PUNIT digit of each of the “n”
words of data begining
at “S” are stored (united)
in order in “D.”
F94 16-bit data DIST S, n, D Each of the digits of the 7 A A
P94 distribute PDIST data of “S” are stored in
(distributed to) the least
significant digits of the
areas beginning at “D.”
F95 Character → ASC S, D Twelve characters of 15 A A
P95 ASCII code PASC the character constants
of “S” are converted to
ASCII code and stored
in “D” to “D+5.”
Note
A: Available


FP3 FP10SH
F96 16-bit table SRC S1, S2, The data of “S1” is 7 A A
P96 data search PSRC S3 searched for in the
areas in the range “S2”
to “S3” and the result is
stored in DT9037 and
DT9038 for FP3 and
DT90037 and DT90038
for FP10SH.
F97 32-bit table DSRC S1, S2, The data of (S1+1, S1) 11 N/A A
P97 data search PDSRC S3, S4 is searched for in the (* Note 1)
32-bit data designated
by “S3”, beginning from
“S2”, and the result is
stored in DT90037 and
DT90038.
Data shift instructions
F98 Data table CMPR D1, D2, Transfer “D2” to “D3.” 7 A A
P98 shift-out and PCMPR D3 Any parts of the data (* Note 2)
compress between “D1” and “D2”
that are 0 are
compressed, and shifted
in order toward “D2.”
F99 Data table CMPW S, D1, Transfer “S” to “D1”. Any 7 A A
P99 shift-in and PCMPW D2 parts of the data (* Note 2)
compress between “D1” and “D2”
that are 0 are
compressed, and shifted
in order toward “D2.”
F100 Right shift of SHR D, n Shifts the “n” bits of “D” 5 A A
P100 multiple bits PSHR to the right.
(n bits) in a
16-bit data
F101 Left shift of SHL D, n Shifts the “n” bits of “D” 5 A A
P101 multiple bits PSHL to the left.
(n bits) in a
16-bit data
F102 Right shift of DSHR D, n Shifts the “n” bits of the 5 N/A A
P102 n bits in a PDSHR 32-bit data area (* Note 1)
32-bit data specified by (D+1, D) to
the right.
Notes
Ver.4.0 or later.


FP3 FP10SH
F103 Left shift of n DSHL D, n Shifts the “n” bits of the 5 N/A A
P103 bits in a PDSHL 32-bit data area (* Note 1)
32-bit data specified by (D+1, D) to
the left.
F105 Right shift of BSR D Shifts the one digit of 3 A A
P105 one PBSR data of “D” to the right.
hexadecimal
digit (4-bit)
F106 Left shift of BSL D Shifts the one digit of 3 A A
P106 one PBSL data of “D” to the left.
hexadecimal
digit (4-bit)
F108 Right shift of BITR D1, D2, Shifts the “n” bits of data 7 N/A A
P108 multiple bits PBITR n range by “D1” and “D2” (* Note 1)
(n bits) to the right.
F109 Left shift of BITL D1, D2, Shifts the “n” bits of data 7 N/A A
P109 multiple bits PBITL n range by “D1” and “D2” (* Note 1)
(n bits) to the left.
F110 Right shift of WSHR D1, D2 Shifts the one word of 5 A A
P110 one word PWSHR the areas by “D1” and
(16-bit) “D2” to the right.
F111 Left shift of WSHL D1, D2 Shifts the one word of 5 A A
P111 one word PWSHL the areas by “D1” and
(16-bit) “D2” to the left.
F112 Right shift of WBSR D1, D2 Shifts the one digit of 5 A A
P112 one PWBSR the areas by “D1” and
hexadecimal “D2” to the right.
digit (4-bit)
F113 Left shift of WBSL D1, D2 Shifts the one digit of 5 A A
P113 one PWBSL the areas by “D1” and
hexadecimal “D2” to the left.
digit (4-bit)
FIFO instructions
F115 FIFO buffer FIFT n, D The “n” words beginning 5 A A
P115 define PFIFT from “D” are defined in
the buffer.
F116 Data read FIFR S, D The oldest data 5 A A
P116 from FIFO PFIFR beginning from “S” that
buffer was written to the buffer
is read and stored in “D.”
Notes
Ver.4.0 or later.


FP3 FP10SH
F117 Data write FIFW S, D The data of “S” is written 5 A A
P117 into FIFO PFIFW to the buffer starting
buffer from “D.”
Basic function instructions
F118 UP/DOWN UDC S, D Counts up or down from 5 A A
counter the value preset in “S”
and stores the elapsed
value in “D.”
F119 Left/right shift LRSR D1, D2 Shifts one bit to the left 5 A A
register or right with the area
between “D1” and “D2”
as the register.
Data rotate instructions
F120 16-bit data ROR D, n Rotate the “n” bits in 5 A A
P120 right rotate PROR data of “D” to the right.
F121 16-bit data ROL D, n Rotate the “n” bits in 5 A A
P121 left rotate PROL data of “D” to the left.
F122 16-bit data RCR D, n Rotate the “n” bits in 5 A A
P122 right rotate PRCR 17-bit area consisting of
with carry “D” plus the carry flag
flag (R9009) (R9009) data to the
data right.
F123 16-bit data RCL D, n Rotate the “n” bits in 5 A A
P123 left rotate PRCL 17-bit area consisting of
with carry “D” plus the carry flag
flag (R9009) (R9009) data to the left.
data
F125 32-bit data DROR D, n Rotate the number of 5 N/A A
P125 right rotate PDROR bits specified by “n” of (* Note 1)
the double words data
(32 bits) specified by
(D+1, D) to the right.
F126 32-bit data DROL D, n Rotate the number of 5 N/A A
P126 left rotate PDROL bits specified by “n” of (* Note 1)
the double words data
(32 bits) specified by
(D+1, D) to the left.
Notes
Ver.4.0 or later.


FP3 FP10SH
F127 32-bit data DRCR D, n Rotate the number of 5 N/A A
P127 right rotate PDRCR bits specified by “n” of (* Note 1)
with carry the double words data
flag (R9009) (32 bits) specified by
data (D+1, D) to the right
together with carry flag
(R9009) data.
F128 32-bit data DRCL D, n Rotate the number of 5 N/A A
P128 left rotate PDRCL bits specified by “n” of (* Note 1)
with carry the double words data
flag (R9009) (32 bits) specified by
data (D+1, D) to the left
together with carry flag
(R9009) data.
Bit manipulation instructions
F130 16-bit data BTS D, n Set the value of bit 5 A A
P130 bit set PBTS position “n” of the data
of “D” to 1.
F131 16-bit data BTR D, n Set the value of bit 5 A A
P131 bit reset PBTR position “n” of the data
of “D” to 0.
F132 16-bit data BTI D, n Invert the value of bit 5 A A
P132 bit invert PBTI position “n” of the data
of “D.”
F133 16-bit data BTT D, n Test the value of bit 5 A A
P133 bit test PBTT position “n” of the data
of “D” and output the
result to R900B.
F135 Number of BCU S, D Store the number of ON 5 A A
P135 ON (1) bits in PBCU bits in the data of “S” in
16-bit data “D.”
F136 Number of DBCU S, D Store the number of ON 7 A A
P136 ON (1) bits in PDBCU bits in the data of (S+1,
32-bit data S) in “D.”
Notes
Ver.4.0 or later.


FP3 FP10SH
Basic function instruction
F137 Auxiliary STMR S, D Turn ON the specified 5 A A
timer output (* Note 1) and (* Note 2)
R900D after 0.01 sec. ×
set value.
Special instructions
F138 Hours, HMSS S, D Converts the hour, 5 A A
P138 minutes and PHMSS minute and second data (* Note 3)
seconds data of (S+1, S) to seconds
to seconds data, and the converted
data data is stored in (D+1,
D).
F139 Seconds data SHMS S, D Converts the seconds 5 A A
P139 to hours, PSHMS data of (S+1, S) to hour, (* Note 3)
minutes and minute and second data,
seconds data and the converted data
is stored in (D+1, D).
F140 Carry flag STC Turns ON the carry flag 1 A A
P140 (R9009) set PSTC (R9009).
F141 Carry flag CLC Turns OFF the carry 1 A A
P141 (R9009) reset PCLC flag (R9009).
F142 Watching dog WDT S The time (allowable 3 N/A A
P142 timer update PWDT scan time for the
system) of watching dog
timer is changed to “S”
× 0.1 (ms) only for that
scan.
F143 Partial I/O IORF D1, D2 Updates the I/O from 5 A A
P143 update PIORF the number specified by
“D1” to the number
specified by “D2.”
Notes
(*1): In FP3/FP10SH CPU Ver.4.0 or later, an OT instruction can be
entered after an auxiliary timer instruction. This instruction
should be input using NPST−GR Ver.2.3 or later and FP
programmer II (AFP1114V2).


FP3 FP10SH
F144 Serial data TRNS S, n The COM port receive 5 N/A A
P144 communica- PTRNS flag (R9038) is set to (* Note 1)
tion control OFF to enable reception.
Beginning at “S”, “n”
bytes of the data
registers are sent from
the COM port.
F145 Data send SEND S1, S2, Sends the data to 9 A A
P145 PSEND D, N another station in the
network (MEWNET).
F146 Data receive RECV S1, S2, Receives the data to 9 A A
P146 PRECV N, D another station in the
network (MEWNET).
F147 Printout PR S, D Converts the ASCII 5 A A
code data in the area
starting with “S” for
printing, and outputs it
to the word external
output relay WY
specified by “D.”
F148 Self-diagnos- ERR n Stores the 3 A A
P148 tic error set PERR (n: K100 self-diagnostic error (* Note 2) (* Note 2)
to K299) number “n” in (DT9000
for FP3 or DT90000 for
FP10SH), turns R9000
ON, and turns ON the
ERROR LED.
F149 Message MSG S Displays the character 13 A A
P149 display PMSG constant of “S” in the
connected programming
tool.
F150 Data read READ S1, S2, Reads the data from the 9 A A
P150 from PREAD n, D intelligent unit.
intelligent
unit
F151 Data write WRT S1, S2, Writes the data into the 9 A A
P151 into PWRT n, D intelligent unit.
intelligent
unit
Notes
Ver.4.0 or later.
(*2): In FP3/FP10SH CPU Ver.4.4 or later, a self-diagnosis error can
be cleared by executing the instruction with K0 specified for n.


FP3 FP10SH
F152 Data read RMRD S1, S2, Reads the data from the 9 A A
P152 from PRMRD n, D intelligent unit at the
MEWNET-F MEWNET-F (remote
slave station I/O) slave station.
F153 Data write RMWT S1, S2, Writes the data into the 9 A A
P153 into PRMWT n, D intelligent unit at the
MEWNET-F MEWNET-F (remote
slave station I/O) slave station.
F154 Machine MCAL n The machine language 3 A N/A
P154 language PMCAL program is called.
program call
F155 Sampling SMPL Starts sampling data. 1 A A
P155 PSMPL
F156 Sampling STRG When the trigger of this 1 A A
P156 trigger PSTRG instruction turns ON, the
sampling trace stops.
F157 Time addition CADD S1, S2, The time after (S2+1, 9 A A
P157 PCADD D S2) elapses from the
time of (S1+2, S1+1,
S1) is stored in (D+2,
D+1, D).
F158 Time CSUB S1, S2, The time that results 9 A A
P158 substruction PCSUB D from subtracting (S2+1,
S2) from the time
(S1+2, S1+1, S1) is
stored in (D+2, D+1, D).
BIN arithmetic instruction
F160 Double word DSQR S, D √(S) → (D) 7 A A
P160 (32-bit) data PDSQR
square root
Basic function instruction
F183 Auxiliary DSTM S, D Turn ON the specified 7 N/A A
timer (32-bit) output and R900D after (* Note 1)
0.01 sec. × set value.
Notes
(*1): The instruction for FP10SH is available for FP10SH CPU
Ver.3.1 or later and this instruction for FP10SH should be input
using NPST−GR Ver.4.0 or later.


FP3 FP10SH
Data transfer instructions
F190 Three 16-bit MV3 S1, S2, (S1) → (D), (S2) → 10 N/A A
P190 data move PMV3 S3, D (D+1), (S3) → (D+2) (* Note 1)
F191 Three 32-bit DMV3 S1, S2, (S1+1, S1) → (D+1, D), 16 N/A A
P191 data move PDMV3 S3, D (S2+1, S2) → (D+3, (* Note 1)
D+2), (S3+1, S3) →
(D+5, D+4)
Logic operation instructions
F215 32-bit data DAND S1, S2, (S1+1, S1) ∧ (S2+1, 12 N/A A
P215 AND PDAND D S2) → (D+1, D) (* Note 1)
F216 32-bit data DOR S1, S2, (S1+1, S1) ∨ (S2+1, 12 N/A A
P216 OR PDOR D S2) → (D+1, D) (* Note 1)
F217 32-bit data DXOR S1, S2, {(S1+1, S1) ∧ (S2+1, 12 N/A A
P217 XOR PDXOR D S2)} ∨ {(S1+1, S1) ∧ (* Note 1)
(S2+1, S2)} → (D+1, D)
F218 32-bit data DXNR S1, S2, {(S1+1, S1) ∧ (S2+1, 12 N/A A
P218 XNR PDXNR D S2)} ∨ {(S1+1, S1) ∧ (* Note 1)
(S2+1, S2)} → (D+1, D)
F219 Double word DUNI S1, S2, {(S1+1, S1) ∧ (S3+1, 16 N/A A
P219 (32-bit) data PDUNI S3, D S3)} ∨ {(S2+1, S2) ∧ (* Note 1)
unites (S3+1, S3)} → (D+1, D)
Data conversion instructions
F235 16-bit binary GRY S, D Converts the 16-bit 6 N/A A
P235 data → Gray PGRY binary data of “S” to (* Note 1)
code gray codes, and the
conversion converted result is
stored in the “D.”
F236 32-bit binary DGRY S, D Converts the 32-bit 8 N/A A
P236 data → Gray PDGRY binary data of (S+1, S) (* Note 1)
code to gray code, and the
conversion converted data is stored
in the (D+1, D).
F237 16-bit gray GBIN S, D Converts the gray 6 N/A A
P237 code → PGBIN codes of “S” to binary (* Note 1)
binary data data, and the converted
conversion result is stored in the
“D.”
Notes
Ver.4.0 or later.


FP3 FP10SH
F238 32-bit gray DGBIN S, D Converts the gray code 8 N/A A
P238 code → PDGBIN of (S+1, S) to binary (* Note 1)
binary data data,and the converted
conversion result is stored in the
(D+1, D).
F240 Bit line to bit COLM S1, S2, The values of bits 0 to 8 N/A A
P240 column PCOLM D 15 of “S” are stored in (* Note 1)
conversion bit “n” of (D to D+15).
F241 Bit column to LINE S1, S2, The values of bit “n” of 8 N/A A
P241 bit line PLINE D (S to S+15) are stored (* Note 1)
conversion in bits 0 to 15 of “D.”
Integer type data processing instructions
F270 Maximum MAX S1, S2, Searches the maximum 8 N/A A
P270 value (word PMAX D value in the word data (* Note 1)
data (16-bit)) table between the “S1”
and “S2”, and stores it
in the “D.” The address
relative to “S1” is stored
in “D+1.”
F271 Maximum DMAX S1, S2, Searches for the 8 N/A A
P271 value (double PDMAX D maximum value in the (* Note 1)
word data double word data table
(32-bit)) between the area
selected with “S1” and
“S2”, and stores it in the
“D.” The address
in “D+2.”
F272 Minimum MIN S1, S2, Searches for the 8 N/A A
P272 value (word PMIN D minimum value in the (* Note 1)
data (16-bit)) word data table
between the area
“D.” The address
in “D+1.”
Notes
Ver.4.0 or later.


FP3 FP10SH
F273 Minimum DMIN S1, S2, Searches for the 8 N/A A
P273 value (double PDMIN D minimum value in the (* Note 1)
word data double word data table
(32-bit)) between the area
“D”. The address relative
to “S1” is stored in “D+2.”
F275 Total and MEAN S1, S2, The total value and the 8 N/A A
P275 mean values PMEAN D mean value of the word (* Note 1)
(word data data with sign from the
(16-bit)) area selected with “S1”
to the “S2” are obtained
and stored in the “D.”
F276 Total and DMEAN S1, S2, The total value and the 8 N/A A
P276 mean values PDMEAN D mean value of the (* Note 1)
(double word double word data with
data (32-bit)) sign from the area
selected with “S1” to
“S2” are obtained and
stored in the “D.”
F277 Sort (word SORT S1, S2, The word data with sign 8 N/A A
P277 data (16-bit)) PSORT S3 from the area specified by (* Note 1)
“S1” to “S2” are sorted in
ascending order (the
smallest word is first) or
descending order (the
largest word is first).
F278 Sort (double DSORT S1, S2, The double word data 8 N/A A
P278 word data PDSORT S3 with sign from the area (* Note 1)
(32-bit)) specified by “S1” to “S2”
are sorted in ascending
order (the smallest word
is first) or descending
order (the largest word
is first).
Integer type non-linear function instructions
F285 Upper and LIMT S1, S2, When S1 > S3, S1 → D 10 N/A A
P285 lower limit PLIMT S3, D When S2 < S3, S2 → D (* Note 1)
control (16-bit When S1 ≦ S3 ≦ S2,
data) S3 → D
Notes
Ver.4.0 or later.


FP3 FP10SH
F286 Upper and DLIMT S1, S2, When (S1+1, S1) > 16 N/A A
P286 lower limit PDLIMT S3, D (S3+1, S3), (S1+1, S1) (* Note 1)
control (32-bit → (D+1, D)
data) When (S2+1, S2) <
(S3+1, S3), (S2+1, S2)
→ (D+1, D)
When (S1+1, S1) ≦
(S3+1, S3) ≦ (S2+1,
S2), (S3+1, S3) →
(D+1, D)
F287 Deadband BAND S1, S2, When S1 > S3, S3 − S1 10 N/A A
P287 control (16-bit PBAND S3, D →D (* Note 1)
data) When S2 < S3, S3 − S2
→D
When S1 ≦ S3 ≦ S2, 0
→D
F288 Deadband DBAND S1, S2, When (S1+1, S1) > 16 N/A A
P288 control (32-bit PDBAND S3, D (S3+1, S3), (S3+1, S3) − (* Note 1)
data) (S1+1, S1) → (D+1, D)
When (S2+1, S2) <
(S3+1, S3), (S3+1, S3) −
(S2+1, S2) → (D+1, D)
When (S1+1, S1) ≦
(S3+1, S3) ≦ (S2+1,
S2), 0 → (D+1, D)
F289 Zone control ZONE S1, S2, When S3 < 0, S3 + S1 10 N/A A
P289 (16-bit data) PZONE S3, D →D (* Note 1)
When S3 = 0, 0 → D
When S3 > 0, S3 + S2
→D
F290 Zone control DZONE S1, S2, When (S3+1, S3) < 0, 16 N/A A
P290 (32-bit data) PDZONE S3, D (S3+1, S3) + (S1+1, S1) (* Note 1)
→ (D+1, D)
When (S3+1, S3) = 0, 0
→ (D+1, D)
When (S3+1, S3) > 0,
(S3+1, S3) + (S2+1, S2)
→ (D+1, D)
Notes
Ver.4.0 or later.


FP3 FP10SH
BCD type real number operation instructions
F300 BCD type BSIN S, D SIN (S+1, S) → 6 N/A A
P300 sine PBSIN (D+1, D) (* Note 1)
operation
F301 BCD type BCOS S, D COS (S+1, S) → 6 N/A A
P301 cosine PBCOS (D+1, D) (* Note 1)
operation
F302 BCD type BTAN S, D TAN (S+1, S) → 6 N/A A
P302 tangent PBTAN (D+1, D) (* Note 1)
operation
F303 BCD type BASIN S, D SIN−1 (S+1, S) → 6 N/A A
P303 arcsine PBASIN (D+1, D) (* Note 1)
operation
F304 BCD type BACOS S, D COS−1 (S+1, S) → 6 N/A A
P304 arccosine PBACOS (D+1, D) (* Note 1)
operation
F305 BCD type BATAN S, D TAN−1 (S+1, S) → 6 N/A A
P305 arctangent PBATAN (D+1, D) (* Note 1)
operation
Floating-point type real number operation instructions
F309 Floating-point FMV S, D (S+1, S) → (D+1, D) 8 N/A A
P309 type real data PFMV (* Note 1)
move
F310 Floating-point F+ S1, S2, ( S1+1, S1) + (S2+1, 14 N/A A
P310 type real data PF+ D S2)→ ( D+1, D) (* Note 1)
addition
F311 Floating-point F− S1, S2, ( S1+1, S1) − (S2+1, 14 N/A A
P311 type real data PF− D S2)→ ( D+1, D) (* Note 1)
subtraction
F312 Floating-point F* S1, S2, ( S1+1, S1) × (S2+1, 14 N/A A
P312 type real data PF* D S2)→ ( D+1, D) (* Note 1)
multiplication
F313 Floating-point F% S1, S2, ( S1+1, S1) ÷ (S2+1, 14 N/A A
P313 type real data PF% D S2)→ ( D+1, D) (* Note 1)
division
F314 Floating-point SIN S, D SIN (S+1, S) → 10 N/A A
P314 type real data PSIN (D+1, D) (* Note 1)
sine
operation
Notes
Ver.4.0 or later.


FP3 FP10SH
F315 Floating-point COS S, D COS (S+1, S) → 10 N/A A
P315 type real data PCOS (D+1, D) (* Note 1)
cosine
operation
F316 Floating-point TAN S, D TAN (S+1, S) → 10 N/A A
P316 type real data PTAN (D+1, D) (* Note 1)
tangent
operation
F317 Floating-point ASIN S, D SIN−1 (S+1, S) → 10 N/A A
P317 type real data PASIN (D+1, D) (* Note 1)
arcsine
operation
F318 Floating-point ACOS S, D COS−1 (S+1, S) → 10 N/A A
P318 type real data PACOS (D+1, D) (* Note 1)
arccosine
operation
F319 Floating-point ATAN S, D TAN−1 (S+1, S) → 10 N/A A
P319 type real data PATAN (D+1, D) (* Note 1)
arctangent
operation
F320 Floating-point LN S, D LN (S+1, S) → (D+1, D) 10 N/A A
P320 type real data PLN (* Note 1)
natural
logarithm
F321 Floating-point EXP S, D EXP (S+1, S) → 10 N/A A
P321 type real data PEXP (D+1, D) (* Note 1)
exponent
F322 Floating-point LOG S, D LOG (S+1, S) → 10 N/A A
P322 type real data PLOG (D+1, D) (* Note 1)
logarithm
F323 Floating-point PWR S1, S2, (S1+1, S1) ^ (S2+1, S2) 14 N/A A
P323 type real data PPWR D → (D+1, D) (* Note 1)
power
F324 Floating-point FSQR S, D (S+1, S) → (D+1, D) 10 N/A A
P324 type real data PFSQR (* Note 1)
square root
Notes
Ver.4.0 or later.


FP3 FP10SH
F325 16-bit integer FLT S, D Converts the 16-bit 6 N/A A
P325 data to PFLT integer data with sign (* Note 1)
floating-point specified by “S” to real
type real data number data, and the
conversion converted data is stored
in “D.”
F326 32-bit integer DFLT S, D Converts the 32-bit 8 N/A A
P326 data to PDFLT integer data with sign (* Note 1)
floating-point specified by (S+1, S) to
type real data real number data, and
conversion the converted data is
stored in (D+1, D).
F327 Floating-point INT S, D Converts real number 8 N/A A
P327 type real data PINT data specified by (S+1, (* Note 1)
to 16-bit S) to the 16-bit integer
integer data with sign (the
conversion largest integer not
(the largest exceeding the
integer not floating-point data), and
exceeding the converted data is
the floating- stored in “D.”
point type
real data)
F328 Floating-point DINT S, D Converts real number 8 N/A A
P328 type real data PDINT data specified by (S+1, (* Note 1)
integer data with sign (the
conversion largest integer not
(the largest exceeding the
integer not floating-point data), and
exceeding the converted data is
the floating- stored in (D+1, D).
point type
real data)
F329 Floating-point FIX S, D Converts real number 8 N/A A
P329 type real data PFIX data specified by (S+1, (* Note 1)
integer data with sign (rounding
conversion the first decimal point
(rounding the down), and the
first decimal converted data is stored
point down to in “D.”
integer)
Notes
Ver.4.0 or later.


FP3 FP10SH
F330 Floating-point DFIX S, D Converts real number 8 N/A A
P330 type real data PDFIX data specified by (S+1, (* Note 1)
(rounding the down), and the
first decimal converted data is stored
point down to in (D+1, D).
integer)
F331 Floating-point ROFF S, D Converts real number 8 N/A A
P331 type real data PROFF data specified by (S+1, (* Note 1)
(rounding the off), and the converted
first decimal data is stored in “D.”
point off to
integer)
F332 Floating-point DROFF S, D Converts real number 8 N/A A
P332 type real data PDROFF data specified by (S+1, (* Note 1)
integer data with sign(rounding
(rounding the off), and the converted
first decimal data is stored in (D+1,
point off to D).
integer)
F333 Floating-point FINT S, D The decimal part of the 8 N/A A
P333 type real data PFINT real number data (* Note 1)
rounding the specified in (S+1, S) is
first decimal rounded down, and the
point down result is stored in (D+1,
D).
F334 Floating-point FRINT S, D The decimal part of the 8 N/A A
P334 type real data PFRINT real number data stored (* Note 1)
rounding the in (S+1, S) is rounded
first decimal off, and the result is
point off stored in (D+1, D).
F335 Floating-point F+/− S, D The real number data 8 N/A A
P335 type real data PF+/− stored in (S+1, S) is (* Note 1)
sign changes changed the sign, and
the result is stored in
(D+1, D).
Notes
Ver.4.0 or later.


FP3 FP10SH
F336 Floating-point FABS S, D Takes the absolute 8 N/A A
P336 type real data PFABS value of real number (* Note 1)
absolute data specified by (S+1,
S), and the result
(absolute value) is
stored in (D+1, D).
F337 Floating-point RAD S, D The data in degrees of 8 N/A A
P337 type real data PRAD an angle specified in (* Note 1)
degree → (S+1, S) is converted to
radian radians (real number
data), and the result is
stored in (D+1, D).
F338 Floating-point DEG S, D The angle data in 8 N/A A
P338 type real data PDEG radians (real number (* Note 1)
radian → data) specified in (S+1,
degree S) is converted to angle
data in degrees, and the
result is stored in (D+1,
D).
Floating-point type real number data processing instructions
F345 Floating-point FCMP S1, S2 (S1+1, S1) > (S2+1, S2) 10 N/A A
P345 type real data PFCMP → R900A: ON (* Note 1)
compare (S1+1, S1) = (S2+1, S2)
→ R900B: ON
(S1+1, S1) < (S2+1, S2)
→ R900C: ON
F346 Floating-point FWIN S1, S2, (S1+1, S1) > (S3+1, S3) 14 N/A A
P346 type real data PFWIN S3 → R900A: ON (* Note 1)
band (S2+1, S2) ≦ (S1+1,
compare S1) ≦ (S3+1,S3)
→ R900B: ON
(S1+1, S1) < (S2+1, S2)
→ R900C: ON
Notes
Ver.4.0 or later.


FP3 FP10SH
F347 Floating-point FLIMT S1, S2, When (S1+1, S1) > 17 N/A A
P347 type real data PFLIMT S3, D (S3+1, S3), (* Note 1)
upper and (S1+1, S1) → (D+1, D)
lower limit When (S2+1, S2) <
control (S3+1, S3),
(S2+1, S2) → (D+1, D)
When (S1+1, S1) ≦
(S3+1, S3) ≦ (S2+1,
S2), (S3+1, S3) → (D+1,
D)
F348 Floating-point FBAND S1, S2, When (S1+1, S1) > 17 N/A A
P348 type real data PFBAND S3, D (S3+1, S3), (* Note 1)
deadband (S3+1, S3) − (S1+1, S1)
control → (D+1, D)
When (S2+1, S2) <
(S3+1, S3),
(S3+1, S3) − (S2+1, S2)
→ (D+1, D)
When (S1+1, S1) ≦
(S3+1, S3) ≦ (S2+1,
S2), 0.0 → (D+1, D)
F349 Floating-point FZONE S1, S2, When (S3+1, S3) < 0.0, 17 N/A A
P349 type real data PFZONE S3, D (S3+1, S3) + (S1+1, S1) (* Note 1)
zone control → (D+1, D)
When (S3+1, S3) = 0.0,
0.0 → (D+1, D)
When (S3+1, S3) > 0.0,
(S3+1, S3) + (S2+1, S2)
→ (D+1, D)
F350 Floating-point FMAX S1, S2, Searches the maximum 8 N/A A
P350 type real data PFMAX D value in the real number (* Note 1)
maximum data table between the
value area selected with “S1”
in the (D+1, D). The
address relative to “S1”
is stored in (D+2).
Notes
Ver.4.0 or later.


FP3 FP10SH
F351 Floating-point FMIN S1, S2, Searches the minimum 8 N/A A
P351 type real data PFMIN D value in the real number (* Note 1)
minimum data table between the
value area selected with “S1”
in the (D+1, D). The
address relative to “S1”
is stored in (D+2).
F352 Floating-point FMEAN S1, S2, The total value and the 8 N/A A
P352 type real data PFMEAN D mean value of the real (* Note 1)
total and number data from the
mean values area selected with “S1”
to “S2” are obtained.
The total value is stored
in the (D+1, D) and the
mean value is stored in
the (D+3, D+2).
F353 Floating-point FSORT S1, S2, The real number data 8 N/A A
P353 type real data PFSORT D from the area specified (* Note 1)
sort by “S1” to “S2” are
sorted in ascending
order (the smallest word
is first) or descending
order (the largest word
is first).
Time series processing instruction
F355 PID PID S PID processing is 4 N/A A
P355 processing PPID performed depending (* Note 1)
on the control value
(mode and parameter)
specified by (S to S+2)
and (S+4 to S+10), and
the result is stored in
the (S+3).
Notes
Ver.4.0 or later.


FP3 FP10SH
Compare instructions
F373 16-bit data DTR S, D If the data in the 16-bit 6 N/A A
P373 revision PDTR area specified by “S” has (* Note 1)
detection changed since the
previous execution,
internal relay R9009
(carry flag) will turn ON.
“D” is used to store the
data of the previous
execution.
F374 32-bit data DDTR S, D If the data in the 32-bit 6 N/A A
P374 revision PDDTR area specified by (S+1, (* Note 1)
detection S) has changed since
the previous execution,
internal relay R9009
(carry flag) will turn ON.
(D+1, D) is used to store
the data of the previous
execution.
Index register bank processing instructions
F410 Index register SETB S Setting the index 4 N/A A
P410 bank change PSETB register (I0 to ID) bank. (* Note 1)
over
F411 Changing the CHGB S Index register (I0 to ID) 4 N/A A
P411 index register PCHGB bank change over with (* Note 1)
bank remembering preceding
bank.
F412 Restoring the POPB Changes index register 2 N/A A
P412 index register PPOPB (I0 to ID) bank to the
bank bank before F411
(CHGB)/P411 (PCHGB)
instruction.
Notes
Ver.4.0 or later.


Appendix H
Table of Binary/Hexadecimal/BCD
Expressions
Table of Binary/Hexadecimal/BCD Expressions FP3/FP10SH
H −2 Matsushita Automation Controls

FP3/FP10SH Table of Binary/Hexadecimal/BCD Expressions
Decimal Hexadecimal Binary BCD code
0 0000 00000000 00000000 0000 0000 0000 0000

1 0001 00000000 00000001 0000 0000 0000 0001
2 0002 00000000 00000010 0000 0000 0000 0010
3 0003 00000000 00000011 0000 0000 0000 0011
4 0004 00000000 00000100 0000 0000 0000 0100
5 0005 00000000 00000101 0000 0000 0000 0101
6 0006 00000000 00000110 0000 0000 0000 0110
7 0007 00000000 00000111 0000 0000 0000 0111
8 0008 00000000 00001000 0000 0000 0000 1000

9 0009 00000000 00001001 0000 0000 0000 1001
10 000A 00000000 00001010 0000 0000 0001 0000
11 000B 00000000 00001011 0000 0000 0001 0001
12 000C 00000000 00001100 0000 0000 0001 0010
13 000D 00000000 00001101 0000 0000 0001 0011
14 000E 00000000 00001110 0000 0000 0001 0100
15 000F 00000000 00001111 0000 0000 0001 0101
16 0010 00000000 00010000 0000 0000 0001 0110

17 0011 00000000 00010001 0000 0000 0001 0111
18 0012 00000000 00010010 0000 0000 0001 1000
19 0013 00000000 00010011 0000 0000 0001 1001
20 0014 00000000 00010100 0000 0000 0010 0000
21 0015 00000000 00010101 0000 0000 0010 0001
22 0016 00000000 00010110 0000 0000 0010 0010
23 0017 00000000 00010111 0000 0000 0010 0011
24 0018 00000000 00011000 0000 0000 0010 0100

25 0019 00000000 00011001 0000 0000 0010 0101
26 001A 00000000 00011010 0000 0000 0010 0110
27 001B 00000000 00011011 0000 0000 0010 0111
28 001C 00000000 00011100 0000 0000 0010 1000
29 001D 00000000 00011101 0000 0000 0010 1001
30 001E 00000000 00011110 0000 0000 0011 0000
31 001F 00000000 00011111 0000 0000 0011 0001
⋮ ⋮ ⋮ ⋮
63 003F 00000000 00111111 0000 0000 0110 0011
⋮ ⋮ ⋮ ⋮
255 00FF 00000000 11111111 0000 0010 0101 0101
⋮ ⋮ ⋮ ⋮
9999 270F 00100111 00001111 1001 1001 1001 1001
Matsushita Automation Controls H −3

Table of Binary/Hexadecimal/BCD Expressions FP3/FP10SH
H −4 Matsushita Automation Controls

Appendix I
ASCII Codes
ASCII Codes FP3/FP10SH
I −2 Matsushita Automation Controls

FP3/FP10SH ASCII Codes
b6 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
b5 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
b4 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Most significant digit

ASCII
b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
HEX code
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 0 0 0 0 NUL DEL SPACE 0 @ P ｀ p
0 0 0 1 1 SOH DC1 ! 1 A Q a q
0 0 1 0 2 STX DC2 〃 2 B R b r
0 0 1 1 3 ETX DC3 # 3 C S c s
0 1 0 0 4 EOT DC4 $ 4 D T d t
0 1 0 1 5 ENQ NAK % 5 E U e u
0 1 1 0 6 ACK SYN & 6 F V f v

digit
ficant d
0 1 1 1 7 BEL ETB ’ 7 G W g w
Leastt signifi
1 0 0 0 8 BS CAN ( 8 H X h x
1 0 0 1 9 HT EM ) 9 I Y i y
1 0 1 0 A LF SUB ＊ : J Z j z
1 0 1 1 B VT ESC + ; K [ k {
1 1 0 0 C FF FS , < L ¥ l |
1 1 0 1 D CR GS − = M ] m }
1 1 1 0 E SO RS . > N ^ n ∼
1 1 1 1 F SI US ／ ? O _ o DEL
Matsushita Automation Controls I −3

ASCII Codes FP3/FP10SH
I −4 Matsushita Automation Controls

FP3/FP10SH Index
Index
A I
ALARM LED 7 −7 I/O allocation 3 −3
alarm output 4 − 37 I/O occupied points 3 − 11
arbitrary allocation with NPST−GR 3 − 6 IC memory card 2 − 37
input unit 2 − 52
B input wiring 4 − 14
installation space 4 −3
backplane 2 − 10
basic configuration 1 −6
L
battery of IC memory card 2 − 40, 8 − 6
LED of power supply unit 7 −7
C
M
computer link function 1 − 28
connecting backup battery 4 − 10 MEWNET−F (remote I/O) system 1 − 20
connecting expansion cable 4 −9 MEWNET−P (Optical) system 1 − 26
connector for wire−pressed MEWNET−TR system 1 − 22
terminal cable 4 − 31 MEWNET−W system 1 − 24
current consumption 1 − 15 modem 1 − 30
momentary power failures 4 − 37
D monitoring function 5 −4
mounting method 4 −7
debug 5 −4
dimensions 2 −3
N
E NPST CONFIGURATION 5 −7
number of control I/O points 1 −6
EEPROM 2 − 18
environment 4 −3
O
EPROM 2 − 18
ERROR LED 7 −5 output unit 2 − 68
expansion cable 2 − 12 output wiring 4 − 18
expansion memory area 6 −6
expansion memory unit 2 − 29 P
performance specifications 2 − 4, 2 − 7
F
power supply dummy unit 2 − 45
FLASH-EEPROM type 2 − 37 power supply unit 2 − 42
flat cable connector 4 − 33 power supply wiring 4 − 11
FP I/O transmitter unit 1 − 22 program area 6 −6
FP10SH CPU 2 − 20 programming tools 1 − 34
FP3 CPU 2 − 14 protect error 7 − 11
G R
grounding 4 − 13 RAM operation 5 − 11
registration of I/O mount allocation 3 − 9
remote I/O control function 1 − 22
Matsushita Automation Controls i−1

Index FP3/FP10SH
replacement of
−backup battery 8 −3
−fuse for output unit 8 − 11
−fuse for power supply unit 8 −8
−relay for output unit 8 −9
ROM operation 5 − 11
S
safety instructions 4 − 36
self−diagnostic function 7 −3
T
tools needed for
ROM writing 1 − 35, 1 − 37
W
wiring the connector type units 4 − 21
wiring the terminal type units 4 − 35
i−2 Matsushita Automation Controls

FP3/FP10SH Record of changes
Record of changes
ACG No. Date Description of Changes
ACG−M0080−1 SEPT. 1997 First edition
ARCT1F300E/ FEB. 1999 2nd edition

ACG−M300E Newly addition of ROM/RAM memory information
Newly addition of IC memory card information
Size change (from A4 to B5)
ARCT1F300E−1/ SEPT. 2006 3rd edition
ACG−M300E−1
Matsushita Automation Controls R−1

Record of changes FP3/FP10SH
R−2 Matsushita Automation Controls

ARCT1F300E-1 SEPT.06
ACG-M300E-1

FP3/FP10SH: Hardware

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FP3/FP10SH: Hardware

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

FP3/FP10SH: Hardware

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER

Chapter 1 Features and System Configuration

1.1 General Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 3

Chapter 2 Parts and Its Specifications

ii Matsushita Automation Controls

2.1.4 FP10SH Performance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 7

Matsushita Automation Controls iii

iv Matsushita Automation Controls

Chapter 3 I/O Allocation

3.1 Fundamentals of I/O Allocation (Automatic Allocation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 3

Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring

Matsushita Automation Controls v

4.3.2 Output Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 18

Chapter 5 Procedure Until Operation

5.1 Before Turning ON the Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 3

vi Matsushita Automation Controls

Chapter 6 IC Memory Card

6.1 Overview of IC Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 − 3

Matsushita Automation Controls vii

6.3.2 For Use as Expansion Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 − 19

Chapter 7 Self−Diagnostic and Troubleshooting

7.1 Self−Diagnostic Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 − 3

8.1 Replacement of Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 3

Appendix A Performance Specifications

A.1 FP10SH Performance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A − 3

Appendix B Table of System Registers

B.1 System Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B − 3

viii Matsushita Automation Controls

B.3 Table of System Registers (for FP3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B − 10

Appendix C Table of Relays, Memory Areas and Constants

C.1 Relays, Memory Areas and Constants for FP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C − 3

Appendix D Table of Special Internal Relays

Appendix E Table of Special Data Registers

Appendix F Table of Error Codes

F.1 Confirmation of Error When the Error LED Turns ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F − 3

Appendix G Table of Instructions

G.1 Table of Basic Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G − 3

Appendix H Table of Binary/Hexadecimal/BCD Expressions

Appendix I ASCII Codes

Matsushita Automation Controls ix

Before You Start

Before turning ON the power

x Matsushita Automation Controls

Hardware compatibility between the two models

Precautions when using the FP10SH

Type Order Version/Lot number

Matsushita Automation Controls xi

Before entering a program

3. When [CLEAR A PROGRAM] window appears, press

When using FP programmer II Ver.2

xii Matsushita Automation Controls

1.2 Basic System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 6

1.3 Unit Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 10

1.4 Expansion System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 20

1.5 Programming Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 32

1.5.2 Table of Programming Tools . . . . . . 1 − 34

1 −2 Matsushita Automation Controls

1.1 General Features

1.1 General Features